Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

4K 120p Upgrade License for ZV-E1

For details on the 4K 120p upgrade license for ZV-E1 and how to download it, refer to the link below.
https://creatorscloud.sony.net/cameraupgrade/4k120p/

For information about items related to the additional functions, refer to the link below.
https://helpguide.sony.net/di/4k120p_2310/v1/en/index.html

For how to activate and manage licenses, refer to the link below.
https://helpguide.sony.net/di/activate/v1/en/index.html

Recommended pages in the Help Guide

Finding functions from MENU

You can check the list of the menu items. You can also move to the explanation page for each item from the menu
item on the list.

Memory cards that can be used

Information about memory cards that can be used with this camera.

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

You can operate the camera using a Bluetooth compatible remote commander (sold separately) or shooting grip
(sold separately).

Touch function icons

You can quickly recall frequently used or convenient functions when shooting by simply touching the icons on the
screen.

Adjusting images in the auto mode (My Image Style)

When shooting with [Intelligent Auto] or [Scene Selection], you can easily adjust the brightness and color to your
liking with touch operations.

Vertical Display

You can set the camera to rotate the information display of the shooting screen automatically for easy viewing when
holding the camera vertically.

1
Support information

Looking for valuable information, such as essential points on shooting

This website introduces convenient functions, ways of usage, and setting examples. Refer to the website when you
set up your camera.

Firmware, Questions & Answers and Compatibility

This website provides Firmware update, Question & Answers and Compatibility information

Basic Knowledge

Improve your shooting techniques by learning the basics of camera.

Shooting tips

Learn how to choose lenses and shooting techniques in various scenes.

How to use the “Help Guide”

Notes on using your camera

Precautions

Lending, transferring or discarding the camera and/or memory card to others (Notes on protecting private
information)

Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery

Notes on memory card

Cleaning the image sensor (Sensor Cleaning)

On cleaning

Checking the camera and the supplied items

Names of parts

Front side

Rear side

Top side

Sides

Bottom

Basic icons displayed on the monitor

2
Touch function icons

FE 28-60mm F4-5.6

Basic operations

Touch panel

Touch function icons

Control wheel

Still/Movie/S&Q switch

MENU button

Main menu (shooting setting list)

Fn (function) button

C (custom) buttons

DISP (Display Setting) button

Delete button

Control dial

Keyboard screen

In-Camera Guide

Preparing the camera/Basic shooting operations

Charging the battery pack

Inserting/removing the battery pack

Charging the battery with a USB-PD-compatible device

Using the battery charger abroad

Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)

Memory cards that can be used

Inserting/removing a memory card

Attaching/removing a lens

Performing initial setup for the camera

Basic shooting operations

Confirmation before shooting

Shooting movies (Intelligent Auto)

3
 Shooting still images (Intelligent Auto)

Finding functions from MENU

Using the shooting functions

Contents of this chapter

Selecting a shooting mode

Shoot Mode (still image)/Shoot Mode (movie)/Shoot Mode (S&Q/time-lapse)

Shoot Mode: Intelligent Auto

Shoot Mode: Scene Selection

Adjusting images in the auto mode (My Image Style)

Shoot Mode: Program Auto

Shoot Mode: Aperture Priority

Shoot Mode: Shutter Priority

Shoot Mode: Manual Exposure

Convenient functions for shooting self-portrait videos and vlogs

Product Showcase Set

Background Defocus

Defocus Level Set

Cinematic Vlog Set.

Self-timer (movie)

Auto Framing Settings

Framing Stabilizer

Focusing

Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)

Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

Tracking subject (Tracking function)

Manual Focus

Direct manual focus (DMF)

Subject Recognition

Focusing using subject recognition functions

4
 Subject Recog in AF (still image/movie)

Recognition Target (still image/movie)

Recog Trgt Select Set (still image/movie)

Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)

Sbj Recog Frm Disp. (still image)

Sbj Recog Frm Disp. (movie)

Face Memory (still image/movie)

Regist. Face Priority (still image/movie)

Selecting a person to track (Select Face to Track)

Using focusing functions

Focus Standard

Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)

Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)

Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)

Focus Area Limit (still image/movie)

Circ. of Focus Point (still image/movie)

AF Frame Move Amt (still image/movie)

Focus Area Color (still image/movie)

AF Area Auto Clear

AF-C Area Display

Phase Detect. Area

AF Tracking Sensitivity

AF Transition Speed

AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity

AF Assist

AF/MF Selector

AF w/ Shutter

AF On

Focus Hold

Pre-AF

5
 Priority Set in AF-S

Priority Set in AF-C

Aperture Drive in AF

AF in Focus Mag.

Auto Magnifier in MF

Focus Magnifier

Focus Magnif. Time (still image/movie)

Initial Focus Mag. (movie)

Initial Focus Mag. (still image)

Focus Map

Peaking Display

Adjusting the exposure/metering modes

Exposure Comp. (still image/movie)

Histogram display

Exposure step (still image/movie)

Exposure Std. Adjust (still image/movie)

D-Range Optimizer (still image/movie)

Metering Mode (still image/movie)

Face Priority in Multi Metering (still image/movie)

Spot Metering Point (still image/movie)

AE lock

AEL w/ Shutter

Auto Slow Shutter

Zebra Display

Selecting the ISO sensitivity

ISO (still image/movie)

ISO Range Limit (still image/movie)

ISO AUTO Min. SS

White balance

White Balance (still image/movie)

6
 Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)

Priority Set in AWB (still image/movie)

Shutter AWB Lock

Shockless WB

Log shooting settings

Log shooting

Log Shooting Setting

Select LUT

Manage User LUTs

Display LUT

Adding effects to images

Creative Look (still image/movie)

Picture Profile (still image/movie)

Soft Skin Effect (still image/movie)

Shooting with drive modes (continuous shooting/self-timer)

Drive Mode

Cont. Shooting

Self-timer(Single)

Self-timer(Cont)

Cont. Bracket

Single Bracket

Indicator during bracket shooting

Focus Bracket

WB bracket

DRO Bracket

Bracket Settings

Self-timer (movie)

Interval Shoot Func.

Setting the image quality and recording format

7
 File Format (still image)

RAW File Type

JPEG/HEIF Switch

JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality

JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size

Aspect Ratio

HLG Still Image

Color Space

File Format (movie)

Movie Settings (movie)

S&Q Settings

Time-lapse Settings

Proxy Settings

APS-C S35 (Super 35mm) Shooting (still image/movie)

Angle of view

Using touch functions

Touch Operation

Shooting Screen

Playback Screen

Menu Screen

Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)

Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)

Shooting with touch operations (Touch Shutter)

Adjusting the exposure with touch operations (Touch AE)

Shutter settings

Silent Mode Settings (still image/movie)

Release w/o Lens (still image/movie)

Release w/o Card

Anti-flicker Set.

Using the zoom

8
 The zoom features available with this product

Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom

Zoom Range (still image/movie)

Zoom Lever Speed (still image/movie)

Custom Key Z. Speed (still image/movie)

Remote Zoom Speed (still image/movie)

Step Zoom Magnif. (still image/movie)

About zoom scale

Zoom Ring Rotate

Using the flash

Using flash (sold separately)

Flash Mode

Flash Comp.

Exp.comp.set

Wireless Flash

Red Eye Reduction

FEL lock

External Flash Set.

Reducing blur

SteadyShot (still image)

SteadyShot (movie)

SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)

SteadyShot focal length (still image/movie)

Framing Stabilizer

Lens Compensation (still image/movie)

Noise reduction

High ISO NR

Setting the monitor display during shooting

Shoot Mode Sel. Screen

Auto Review (still image)

9
 Grid Line Display (still image/movie)

Grid Line Type (still image/movie)

Live View Display Set.

Aperture Preview

Shot. Result Preview

Bright Monitoring

Emphasized REC Display

Marker Display (still image)

Marker Display (movie)

Gamma Display Assist

Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.

Recording movie audio

Audio Recording

Audio Rec Level

Audio Out Timing

Wind Noise Reduct.

Microphone Directivity

Mic Direct Select Setting

Shoe Audio Set.

Creating still images while recording a movie

Automatic creation of still images from Shot Marks

Shot Marks after still image creation (shooting)

TC/UB settings

TC/UB

TC/UB Disp. Setting

Livestreaming video and audio

Network Streaming (movie)

USB Streaming (movie)

Customizing the camera

10
Contents of this chapter

Customization features of the camera

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

Registering and recalling camera settings

Camera Set. Memory

Recalling registered shooting settings (Cam.Set)

Registering frequently used functions to the function menu

Fn Menu Settings

Registering frequently used functions to My Menu

Add Item

Sort Item

Delete Item

Delete Page

Delete All

Display From My Menu

Separately adjusting the camera settings for still images and movies

Different Set for Still/Mv

Customizing the functions of the ring/dial

Av/Tv Rotate

Function Ring(Lens)

Dial / Wheel Lock

Using the shutter button when shooting movies

REC w/ Shutter (movie)

Adding Shot Marks with the shutter button (movies)

Monitor settings

Monitor Flip Direction

Vertical Display

DISP (Screen Disp) Set

11
Viewing

Contents of this chapter

Viewing images

Playing back still images

Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

Enlarge Initial Mag.

Enlarge Initial Position

Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)

Playing back movies

Volume Settings

4ch Audio Monitoring (movie)

Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)

Cont. Play for Interval

Play Speed for Interval

Changing how images are displayed

Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)

Playback Filter Condition

Image Order

Display as Group

Focus Frame Display (playback)

Aspect Marker Disp. (still image)

Disp Specified Time Img.

Setting how to jump between images

Select Image Jump Dial

Image Jump Method

Protecting recorded images (Protect)

Adding information to images

Rating

Rating Set(Custom Key)

12
 Rotating an image (Rotate)

Crop

Extracting still images from a movie

Photo Capture

Creating still images from Shot Marks

Shot Marks after still image creation (playback)

JPEG/HEIF Switch (Photo Capture / Creating still images from Shot Marks)

Deleting images

Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)

Delete pressing twice

Delete confirm.

Viewing images on a TV

Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable

Changing the camera settings

Memory card settings

Format

Recover Image DB (still image/movie)

Display Media Info. (still image/movie)

File settings

File/Folder Settings

Select REC Folder

Create New Folder

File Settings

Copyright Info

Write Serial Number (still image/movie)

Network settings

Wi-Fi Connect

WPS Push

Access Point Set.

13
 Wi-Fi Frequency Band (models supporting 5 GHz)

Display Wi-Fi Info.

SSID/PW Reset

Bluetooth Settings

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

Wired LAN (USB-LAN)

USB-LAN/Tethering

Airplane Mode

Edit Device Name

Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)

Access Authen. Settings

Access Authen. Info

Wi-Fi Direct Settings

Reset Network Set.

Monitor settings

Monitor Brightness

Power settings

Auto Monitor OFF (still image)

Power Save Start Time

Power Save by Monitor

Auto Power OFF Temp.

Display Quality (still image)

USB settings

USB Connection Mode

USB LUN Setting

USB Power Supply

External output settings

HDMI Resolution

HDMI Output Settings (movie)

HDMI Info. Display

14
 CTRL FOR HDMI

General settings

Language

Area/Date/Time Setting

NTSC/PAL Selector

Audio signals

REC Lamp

Video Light Mode

Pixel Mapping

Version

Display Serial Number

Privacy Notice

Screen Reader (For some models only)

Certification Logo (For some models only)

Save/Load Settings

Setting Reset

Functions available with a smartphone

Functions available with a smartphone (Creators' App)

Monitor & Control

Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)

Using a smartphone as a remote commander

Using a smartphone as a remote commander

Remote Shoot Setting

Transferring images to a Smartphone

Select on Cam & Send (transferring to a smartphone)

Reset Transfer Status (transferring to a smartphone)

Connecting while the camera is turned OFF

Cnct. while Power OFF (smartphone)

Reading location information from a smartphone

15
Using a computer

Recommended computer environment

Connecting/disconnecting the camera and a computer

Connecting the camera to a computer

Disconnecting the camera from the computer

Managing and editing images on a computer

Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)

Importing images to the computer

Operating the camera from a computer

Operating the camera from a computer (Remote Shoot Function)

Remote Shoot Setting

USB Streaming (movie)

Using the cloud service

Creators’ Cloud

Creating an account for Creators’ Cloud and linking your camera to the account (Cloud Connection)

Displaying cloud connection information (Cloud Information)

Notes on using the cloud service (Creators’ Cloud)

Appendix

Audio accessories compatible with the Multi Interface Shoe

Mount Adaptor

Mount Adaptor

LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor

LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor

Multi Battery Adaptor Kit

Battery life and number of recordable images

Number of recordable images

Recordable movie times

List of icons on the monitor

List of icons on the screen for shooting movies

16
 List of icons on the screen for shooting still images

List of icons on the playback screen

List of default setting values

List of default setting values (Shooting)

List of default setting values (Exposure/Color)

List of default setting values (Focus)

List of default setting values (Playback)

List of default setting values (Network)

List of default setting values (Setup)

List of default setting values (My Menu)

Specifications

Trademarks

License

If you have problems

Troubleshooting

Warning messages

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

17
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

How to use the “Help Guide”

The “Help Guide” is a “Web Instruction Manual” that has been designed to describe the functions and operating methods
of this camera. Use the “Help Guide” to search for any information that you require in order to make full use of the
camera.
(The “Help Guide” screens shown on this page are for reference only. They may differ from the actual on-screen display
of your model.)

Hint
The “Startup Guide” supplied with the camera describes basic operating methods and precautions for use. Please refer to the
“Startup Guide” in combination with this “Help Guide.”

Icons used in the “Help Guide”

: Menu items displayed in the still image shooting modes
: Menu items displayed in the movie recording modes and slow-motion/quick-motion shooting modes
: Menu items displayed in any of the still image shooting modes, movie recording modes, or slow-
motion/quick-motion shooting modes
For details on the relationship between each shooting mode and the menu, refer to “MENU button.”

Finding your desired information

Method A: Searching by keyword

Enter a search keyword (“white balance,” “focus area,” etc.), and use the search results to display the description page
that you want to view. If you enter two or more keywords by separating them with spaces (blanks), you can search for
pages that contain all of those keywords.

Method B: Viewing the table of contents

Select a heading from the table of contents to display the description page.

Screen displayed on a computer

Screen displayed on a smartphone

18
Method C: Finding functions from MENU
If you want to search for information while checking it against the MENU screen of the camera, use the “Finding functions
from MENU” page. Select a MENU item from the list to go directly to the description page.

Viewing information about related features

“Related Topic” at the bottom of each page lists sections that contain information related to the description page currently
being displayed. For a deeper understanding of the currently displayed page, refer to the listed sections as well.

Printing all the pages of the “Help Guide”

To print all the pages, select the [ Printable PDF] button in the upper right corner of the top page. When the PDF file
appears, use the printing menu of the browser to print it out.
This function is not available for certain languages.
19
 Printing only the currently displayed page (only on a computer)

To print only the page currently being displayed, select the [ Print] button at the top of the page. When the printing
screen appears, specify your printer.

TP1001265310

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

20
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Precautions

Refer also to “Notes on use” in the Startup Guide (supplied) for this product.

We use environmentally conscious packaging materials

Environmentally conscious packaging materials were used for the camera and supplied accessories. Due to the
characteristics of the packaging materials, note the following points.

Powder, etc. from the packaging materials may adhere to the camera or supplied accessories. In this case, remove it
with a commercially available blower or cleaning paper before use.
The packaging materials will deteriorate with continuous use. Be careful when carrying the product by the packaging.

On the data specifications described in this manual

The data on performance and specifications in this manual are based on an ordinary ambient temperature of 25ºC
(77°F), except where otherwise indicated.
For the battery pack, the data are based on a battery pack that was fully charged until the charge lamp turned off.

On operating temperatures

Shooting in extremely cold or hot environments that exceed the operating temperature range is not recommended.
Under high ambient temperatures, the temperature of the camera rises quickly.
When the temperature of the camera rises, the image quality may deteriorate. It is recommended that you wait until
the temperature of the camera drops before continuing to shoot.
Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the camera may become unable to record movies or the power
may turn off automatically to protect the camera. A message will be displayed on the screen before the power turns
off or you can no longer record movies. In this case, leave the power off and wait until the camera and battery
temperature goes down. If you turn on the power without letting the camera and battery cool sufficiently, the power
may turn off again, or you may still be unable to record movies.

Notes on recording for long periods of time or recording 4K movies

During use, the camera and battery may become warm. This is not a malfunction.
Especially during 4K shooting, the recording time may be shorter under low temperature conditions. Warm up the
battery pack or replace it with a new battery.

Notes on playing movies on other devices

XAVC HS and XAVC S movies can only be played back on compatible devices.

Notes on recording/playback

Before you start recording, make a trial recording to make sure that the camera is working correctly.
Playback of images recorded with your product on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with
other equipment on your product are not guaranteed.
Sony can provide no guarantees in the event of failure to record, or loss of or damage to recorded images or audio
data, due to a malfunction of the camera or recording media, etc. We recommend backing up important data.
Once you format the memory card, all the data recorded on the memory card will be deleted and cannot be restored.
Before formatting, copy the data to a computer or other device.
Attach the shoulder strap to the camera to prevent it from falling.
When using this product with a tripod or grip, be sure to attach the camera securely.

21
 Notes on using a tripod

Use a tripod with a screw less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inches) long. Otherwise, you cannot firmly secure the camera, and
damage to the camera may occur.

Notes on handling memory cards

The temperature of memory cards may rise after saving. This is not a malfunction.

Backing up memory cards

Data may be corrupted in the following cases. Be sure to back up the data for protection.

When the memory card is removed, the USB cable is disconnected, or the product is turned off in the middle of a
read or write operation.
When the memory card is used in locations subject to static electricity or electrical noise.

Database file error

If you insert a memory card that does not contain an image database file into the product and turn on the power, the
product automatically creates an image database file using some of the memory card’s capacity. The process may
take a long time and you cannot operate the product until the process is completed.
If a database file error occurs, export all images to your computer, and then format the memory card using this
product.

Do not use/store the product in the following places

In an extremely hot, cold or humid place

In places such as in a car parked in the sun, the camera body may become deformed and this may cause a
malfunction.
Storing under direct sunlight or near a heater
The camera body may become discolored or deformed, and this may cause a malfunction.
In a location subject to rocking vibration
It may cause malfunctions and an inability to record data. In addition, the recording media may become unusable,
and recorded data may be corrupted.
Near strong magnetic place
In sandy or dusty places
Be careful not to let sand or dust get into the product. This may cause the product to malfunction, and in some cases
this malfunction cannot be repaired.
In places with high humidity
This may cause the lens to mold.
In areas where strong radio waves or radiation are being emitted
Recording and playback may not function correctly.

On moisture condensation

If the product is brought directly from a cold to a warm location, moisture may condense inside or outside the product.
This moisture condensation may cause a malfunction of the product.
To prevent moisture condensation when you bring the product directly from a cold to a warm location, first put it in a
plastic bag and seal it to prevent air from entering. Wait for about an hour until the temperature of the product has
reached the ambient temperature.
If moisture condensation occurs, turn off the product and wait about an hour for the moisture to evaporate. Note that if
you attempt to shoot with moisture remaining inside the lens, you will be unable to record clear images.

Precaution on carrying

Do not hold, hit, or apply excessive force to the following parts, if your camera is equipped with them:

The lens part

22
 The movable monitor part
The movable flash part
The movable viewfinder part
Do not carry the camera with the tripod attached. This may cause the tripod socket hole to break.
Do not sit down in a chair or other place with the camera in the back pocket of your trousers or skirt, as this may
cause malfunction or damage the camera.

Notes on handling the product

Although this camera is designed and built to be dustproof and drip-proof, it cannot completely prevent the ingress of
dust or water droplets.
Before you connect the cable to the terminal, be sure to check the orientation of the terminal. Then, insert the cable
straight. Do not insert or remove the cable forcefully. This may cause the terminal part to break.
The camera uses magnetic parts including magnets. Do not bring objects affected by magnetism, including credit
cards and floppy disks, close to the camera.
The recorded image may be different from the image you monitored before recording.

On storing

For lens-integrated cameras

Always attach the lens cap when you are not using the camera. (Only for models supplied with a lens cap)
For interchangeable-lens cameras
Always attach the lens front cap or body cap when you are not using the camera. To prevent dust or debris from
getting inside the camera, remove dust from the body cap before attaching it to the camera.
If the camera is dirty after use, clean it. Water, sand, dust, salt, etc. left in the camera may cause a malfunction.

Notes on using lenses

When using the power zoom lens, be careful not to get your fingers or any other objects caught in the lens. (Only for
models with a power zoom feature or interchangeable lens cameras)
If you must place the camera under a light source such as sunlight, attach the lens cap to the camera. (Only for
models supplied with a lens cap or interchangeable lens cameras)
If sunlight or a strong light source enters the camera through the lens, it may focus inside the camera and cause
smoke or fire. Attach the lens cap to the lens when storing the camera. When you shoot with backlighting, keep the
sun sufficiently far away from the angle of view. Note that smoke or fire may occur even if the light source is slightly
away from the angle of view.
Do not directly expose the lens to beams such as laser beams. These may damage the image sensor and cause the
camera to malfunction.
If the subject is too close, the image may show any dust or fingerprints on the lens. Wipe the lens with a soft cloth,
etc.

Notes on the flash (Only for models with a flash)

Keep your fingers away from the flash. The light-emitting part may get hot.
Remove any dirt from the surface of the flash. Dirt on the surface of the flash may emit smoke or burn due to heat
generated by the emission of light. If there is dirt/dust, clean it off with a soft cloth.
Restore the flash to its original position after using it. Make sure that the flash portion is not sticking up. (Only for
models with a movable flash)

Notes on the Multi Interface Shoe (Only for models with a Multi Interface Shoe)

When attaching or detaching accessories such as an external flash to the Multi Interface Shoe, first turn the power to
OFF. When attaching the accessory, confirm that it is firmly fastened to the camera.
Do not use the Multi Interface Shoe with a commercially available flash that applies voltages of 250 V or more or has
the opposite polarity of the camera. It may cause a malfunction.

Notes on the viewfinder and flash (Only for models with a viewfinder or a flash)

23
 Take care that your finger is not in the way when pushing the viewfinder or flash down. (Only for models with a
movable viewfinder or a movable flash)
If water, dust or sand adheres to the viewfinder or flash unit, it may cause a malfunction. (Only for models with a
movable viewfinder or a movable flash)

Notes on the viewfinder (Only for models with a viewfinder)

When shooting with the viewfinder, you may experience symptoms such as eyestrain, fatigue, travel sickness, or
nausea. We recommend that you take a break at regular intervals when you are shooting with the viewfinder.
In case you may feel uncomfortable, refrain from using the viewfinder until your condition recovers, and consult your
doctor if necessary.
Although the viewfinder is built with high-precision technology for 99.99% or more effective pixels, black dots may
appear, and white, red, blue, and green dots may not disappear. This is not a malfunction. These dots are not
recorded.
Do not forcibly push down the viewfinder when the eyepiece is pulled out. It may cause a malfunction. (Only for
models with a movable viewfinder and an eyepiece that can be pulled out)
If you pan the camera while looking into the viewfinder or move your eyes around, the image in the viewfinder may be
distorted or the color of the image may change. This is a characteristic of the lens or display device and is not a
malfunction. When you shoot an image, we recommend that you look at the center area of the viewfinder.
The image may be slightly distorted near the corners of the viewfinder. This is not a malfunction. When you want to
see the full composition with all its details, you can also use the monitor.
If you use the camera in a cold location, the image may have a trailing appearance. This is not a malfunction.
Do not directly expose the viewfinder to beams such as laser beams. These may damage the inside of the viewfinder
and cause the camera to malfunction.

Notes on the monitor

Although the monitor is built with high-precision technology for 99.99% or more effective pixels, black dots may
appear, and white, red, blue, and green dots may not disappear. This is not a malfunction. These dots are not
recorded.
Do not press against the monitor. The monitor may be discolored and that may cause a malfunction.
If the monitor has drops of water or other liquids on it, wipe it with a soft cloth. If the monitor stays wet, the surface of
the monitor may change or deteriorate. This may cause a malfunction.
If you use the camera in a cold location, the image may have a trailing appearance. This is not a malfunction.
When you connect cables to the terminals on the camera, the rotating range of the monitor may become limited.

Notes on the image sensor

If you point the camera at an extremely strong light source while shooting images with a low ISO sensitivity, highlighted
areas in the images may be recorded as black areas.

Notes on the wind screen (Only for models supplied with a wind screen)

If the wind screen is stored for a long time in a place exposed to direct sunlight or near a heating device, it may
become discolored. The texture and degree of raising of the hairs may change depending on the environment during
use and storage as well as aging.
Brushing or forcefully pulling the hairs on the wind screen may cause them to come off.
If the wind screen gets wet or dirty, do not remove it from the wind screen adaptor. Wipe it off with a soft, dry cloth
and dry it in the shade.

On image data compatibility

This product conforms with DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan
Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association).

Services and software provided by other companies

Network services, content, and the [operating system and] software of this Product may be subject to individual terms
and conditions and changed, interrupted or discontinued at any time and may require fees, registration and credit card

24
information.

Notes on connecting to the internet

To connect the camera to a network, connect it through a router or a LAN port with the same function. Failure to connect
in this manner may result in security issues.

Notes on security

SONY WILL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO IMPLEMENT
PROPER SECURITY MEASURES ON TRANSMISSION DEVICES, UNAVOIDABLE DATA LEAKS CAUSED BY
TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS, OR OTHER SECURITY PROBLEMS.
Depending on the usage environment, unauthorized third parties on the network may be able to access the product.
When connecting the camera to a network, be sure to confirm that the network is protected securely.
The content of communications may be unknowingly intercepted by unauthorized third parties in the vicinity of the
signals. When using wireless LAN communication, implement proper security measures to protect the content of
communications.

Optional accessories

It is recommended that you use genuine Sony accessories.

Some Sony accessories are only available in certain countries and regions.

Available models and kits

Some models and kits are only available in certain countries and regions.

TP1001263931

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

25
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Lending, transferring or discarding the camera and/or memory card to others (Notes
on protecting private information)

Important information may be recorded on the camera and/or memory card depending on the functions and camera
settings.
Before lending, transferring, or discarding the camera and/or memory card to others, be sure to read the following and
make sure that you have completed the procedures.

Notes on lending, transferring, or discarding the camera to others

Before lending, transferring, or discarding the camera to others, be sure to perform the following operation to protect
private information.

Select [Setting Reset] → [Initialize].

Notes on using the cloud service (Creators’ Cloud)

Before lending or transferring the camera, make sure that the camera linkage information and upload settings are
appropriate to prevent damage such as the content on the camera being uploaded to an unintended third party’s
Creators’ Cloud. If the settings are not appropriate, be sure to perform the following operations.

If you will transfer or lend the camera: initialize the camera or cancel the linkage with Creators’ Cloud on the camera.
Also, cancel the camera linkage in Creators’ Cloud.
If the camera is transferred to you or you borrow the camera: initialize the camera or cancel the linkage with Creators’
Cloud on the camera.

Note that Creators’ Cloud may only be available in certain countries and regions.

Notes on lending, transferring, or discarding a memory card to others

Executing [Format] or [Delete] on the camera or a computer may not completely delete the data on the memory card.
Before lending or transferring a memory card to others, we recommend that you delete any data on it completely using
data deletion software. When discarding a memory card, we recommend that you physically destroy it.

Notes on network functions

When you use network functions, unintended third parties on the network may access the camera, depending on the
usage environment. For example, unauthorized access to the camera may occur in network environments to which
another network device is connected or can connect without permission. Sony bears no responsibility for any loss or
damage caused by connecting to such network environments.

Notes on location information

If you upload and share still images or movies taken with this camera on the Internet while the location information is
linked with the dedicated smartphone application, you may accidentally reveal the location information to a third party. To
prevent third parties from obtaining your location information, deactivate the [Location Information Linkage] function of
the dedicated application.

Warning on copyrights

Television programs, films, videotapes, and other materials may be copyrighted. Unauthorized recording of such
materials may be contrary to the provisions of the copyright laws.

26
 TP1001271182

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

27
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery

Notes on using the battery pack

Be sure to use only genuine Sony brand battery packs.

The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or environmental conditions.
Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant.
Do not leave the battery pack in extremely hot places, such as in a car or under direct sunlight.

Notes on charging the battery pack

Charge the battery pack (supplied) before using the product for the first time.
The charged battery pack will discharge little by little even if you do not use it. Charge the battery pack each time
before you use the product so that you do not miss any opportunities to shoot images.
Do not charge battery packs except battery packs specified for this product. Doing so can result in leaks, overheating,
explosions, electric shocks, burns, or injuries.
When you use a completely new battery pack or a battery pack that has not been used for a long time, the charge
lamp (CHARGE) may flash quickly when the battery is charged. If this happens, remove the battery pack and then re-
insert it to recharge.
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 °F and 86 °F).
The battery pack may not be correctly charged in temperatures outside this range.
Operation cannot be guaranteed with all external power supplies.
When charging is finished, disconnect the AC Adaptor from the wall outlet (wall socket) or disconnect the USB cable
from the camera. Not doing so may result in a shorter battery life.
Do not continuously or repeatedly charge the battery pack without using it if it is already fully charged or close to fully
charged. Doing so may cause a deterioration in battery performance.
If the product's charge lamp flashes while charging, remove the battery pack being charged, and then insert the same
battery pack firmly back into the product. If the charge lamp flashes again, this may indicate a faulty battery or that a
battery pack other than the specified type has been inserted. Check that the battery pack is the specified type.
If the battery pack is the specified type, remove the battery pack, replace it with a new or different one and check that
the newly inserted battery is charging correctly. If the newly inserted battery is charging correctly, the previously
inserted battery may be faulty.
If the charge lamp flashes while charging the battery pack inside the camera, this indicates that charging has stopped
temporarily and is on standby. Charging stops and enters standby status automatically when the temperature is
outside of the recommended operating temperature. When the temperature returns to the appropriate range,
charging resumes and the charge lamp lights up again.

Remaining battery indicator

The remaining battery indicator appears on the screen. It takes about one minute for the correct remaining battery
indicator to appear.
The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or environmental conditions.
If the remaining battery indicator does not appear on the screen, press the DISP (Display Setting) button to display it.

Effective use of the battery pack

Battery performance decreases in low temperature environments. So in cold places, the operational time of the
battery pack is shorter. To ensure longer battery pack use, we recommend putting the battery pack in your pocket
close to your body to warm it up, and insert it in the product immediately before you start shooting. If there are any
metal objects such as keys in your pocket, be careful of causing a short-circuit.

28
 The battery pack will run down quickly if you use the flash or continuous shooting function frequently, turn the power
on/off frequently, or set the monitor very bright.
We recommend preparing spare battery packs and taking trial shots before taking the actual shots.
If the battery terminal is dirty, you may not be able to turn on the product or the battery pack may not be properly
charged. In that case, clean the battery by lightly wiping off any dust using a soft cloth or a cotton swab.

How to store the battery pack

To maintain the battery pack’s function, charge the battery pack and then fully discharge it in the camera at least once a
year before storing it. Store the battery in a cool, dry place after removing it from the camera.

On battery life

The battery life is limited. If you use the same battery repeatedly, or use the same battery for a long period, the
battery capacity decreases gradually. If the available time of the battery is shortened significantly, it is probably time to
replace the battery pack with a new one.
The battery life varies according to how the battery pack is stored and the operating conditions and environment in
which each battery pack is used.

TP1001224969

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

29
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Notes on memory card

If (overheating warning icon) is displayed on the monitor, do not remove the memory card from the camera right
away. Instead, wait for a while after turning off the camera, and then remove the memory card. If you touch the
memory card while it is hot, you may drop it and the memory card may be damaged. Be careful when removing the
memory card.
If you repeatedly shoot and delete images for a long time, fragmentation of data in a file in the memory card may
occur, and movie recording may be interrupted in the middle of shooting. If this happens, save your images to a
computer or other storage location, then execute [Format] using this camera.
Do not remove the battery pack or the memory card, disconnect the USB cable, or turn the camera off while the
access lamp is lit up. This may cause the data on the memory card to become damaged.
Be sure to back up the data for protection.
Not all memory cards are guaranteed to operate correctly.
Images recorded on an SDXC memory card cannot be imported to or played on computers or AV devices not
compatible with exFAT when connected using a USB cable. Make sure that the device is compatible with exFAT
before connecting it to the camera. If you connect your camera to an incompatible device, you may be prompted to
format the card. Never format the card in response to this prompt, as doing so will erase all data on the card.
(exFAT is the file system used on SDXC memory cards.)
Do not expose the memory card to water.
Do not strike, bend or drop the memory card.
Do not use or store the memory card under the following conditions:

High temperature locations such as in a car parked under the sun

Locations exposed to direct sunlight
Humid locations or locations with corrosive substances present

If the memory card is used near areas with strong magnetization, or used in locations subject to static electricity or
electrical noise, the data on the memory card may become damaged.
Do not touch the terminal section of the memory card with your hand or a metal object.
Do not leave the memory card within the reach of small children. They might accidentally swallow it.
Do not disassemble or modify the memory card.
The memory card may be hot just after it has been used for a long time. Be careful when you handle it.
Memory card formatted with a computer is not guaranteed to operate with the product. Be sure to format the memory
card using this product.
Data read/write speeds differ depending on the combination of the memory card and the equipment used.
Do not press down hard when writing in the memo space on the memory card.
Do not attach a label on the memory card itself nor on a memory card adaptor. You may not be able to remove the
memory card.
If the write-protect switch or delete-protect switch of an SD memory card is set to the LOCK position, you cannot
record or delete images. In this case, set the switch to the record position.
To use a microSD memory card with this product:

Be sure to insert the memory card into a dedicated adaptor. If you insert a memory card into the product without a
memory card adaptor, you might not be able to remove it from the product.
When inserting a memory card into a memory card adaptor, be sure that the memory card is inserted in the
correct direction and then insert it as far as it will go. If the card is not inserted properly, it may result in a
malfunction.

Related Topic
Format

30
 TP1001248340

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

31
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Cleaning the image sensor (Sensor Cleaning)

If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to
an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens,
clean the image sensor quickly by following the steps below.

1 Confirm that the battery has been charged sufficiently.

2 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Sensor Cleaning] → [Enter].

The image sensor vibrates a little to shake off the dust.

3 Turn off the camera following the instructions on the screen.

4 Detach the lens.

5 Use a commercially available blower to clean the image sensor surface and the surrounding area.

Hold the camera slightly face downward so that the dust falls out.

6 Attach the lens.

Hint
For how to check the amount of dust on the image sensor, and for further details on cleaning methods, please refer to the
following URL.
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/www/support/ilc/sensor/index.php

Note
Make sure that the remaining battery level is 51% or more before performing cleaning.

Do not use a spray type blower as it may scatter water droplets inside the camera body.

Do not put the tip of a blower into the cavity beyond the lens mount area, so that the tip of the blower does not touch the image
sensor.

When cleaning the image sensor with a blower, do not blow too hard. If you blow the sensor too hard, the inside of the product
may be damaged.

32
 If the dust remains even after you cleaned the product as described, consult the service facility.

During cleaning, the image sensor emits a vibrating noise. This is not a malfunction.

Cleaning may be performed automatically when the power is turned off.

Related Topic
Attaching/removing a lens

TP1001224910

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

33
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

On cleaning

Cleaning the lens

Do not use a cleaning solution containing organic solvents, such as thinner, or benzine.
When cleaning the lens surface, remove dust with a commercially available blower. In case of dust that sticks to the
surface, wipe it off with a soft cloth or tissue paper slightly moistened with lens cleaning solution. Wipe in a spiral
pattern from the center to the outside. Do not spray lens cleaning solution directly onto the lens surface.

Cleaning the camera body

Do not touch the parts of the product inside the lens mount, such as a lens signal contact. To clean inside the lens mount,
use a commercially available blower* to blow any dust off.
* Do not use a spray-type blower as doing so may cause a malfunction.

Cleaning the product surface

Clean the product surface with a soft cloth slightly moistened with water, then wipe the surface with a dry cloth. To
prevent damage to the finish or casing:

Do not expose the product to chemical products such as thinner, benzine, alcohol, disposable cloths, insect repellent,
sunscreen or insecticide.
Do not touch the product with any of the above on your hand.
Do not leave the product in contact with rubber or vinyl for a long time.

Cleaning the monitor

If you wipe the monitor firmly using tissue paper, etc., the monitor may be scratched.
If the monitor becomes dirty with fingerprints or dust, gently remove the dust from the surface, and then clean the
monitor using soft cloth, etc.

TP1001224972

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

34
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Checking the camera and the supplied items

The number in parentheses indicates the number of pieces.

Camera (1)
NP-FZ100 Rechargeable Battery Pack (1)

Wind screen (1) (Attached to the wind screen adaptor)

Wind screen adaptor (1)

Shoulder Strap (1)

Body Cap (1) (Attached to the camera)

Shoe Cap (1) (Attached to the camera)

Startup Guide (1)

Reference Guide (1)

Note
Accessories may differ depending on the country or region. Please check the Startup Guide for details on accessories.

TP1001264514

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

35
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Front side

1. Shutter button
2. ON/OFF (Power) switch
3. For shooting: W/T (zoom) lever
For viewing: (Index) lever/Playback zoom lever
4. Lens release button
5. Self-timer lamp/Recording lamp
6. Mounting index
7. Image sensor*
8. Mount
9. Lens contacts*

* Do not directly touch these parts.

Related Topic
Rear side
Top side
Sides
Bottom

TP1001271233

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

36
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Rear side

1. Monitor/Touch panel
You can adjust the monitor to an easily viewable angle and shoot from any position.

(A): Approx. 176°

(B): Approx. 270°

You may not be able to adjust the monitor angle depending on the type of a tripod you use. In such a case,
release the tripod screw once to adjust the monitor angle.
Do not apply excessive force when opening, closing, or rotating the monitor. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

2. MENU button
3. Control dial
4. C2 button (Custom button 2)/ (Step zoom) button
5. For shooting: Fn (Function) button
For viewing: (Send to Smartphone) button
You can display the screen for transferring images to a smartphone by pressing this button.

6. Control wheel
7. (Playback) button
8. For shooting: (Product Showcase Set) button
For viewing: (Delete) button

Related Topic
Front side

37
Top side
Sides
Bottom

TP1001271229

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

38
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Top side

1. Still/Movie/S&Q switch
2. MOVIE (Movie) button
3. C1 button (Custom button 1)/ (Background Defocus) button
4. Speaker
5. Internal microphone
Do not cover this part during movie recording. Doing so may cause noise or lower the volume.

6. Multi Interface Shoe*

Some accessories may not go in all the way and protrude backward from the Multi interface shoe. However, when the
accessory reaches the front end of the shoe, the connection is completed.

7. Image sensor position mark

The image sensor is the sensor that converts light into an electric signal. The position of the image sensor is
indicated by (Image sensor position mark). When you measure the exact distance between the camera and
the subject, refer to the position of the horizontal line.

If the subject is closer than the minimum shooting distance of the lens, the focus cannot be confirmed. Make sure
you put enough distance between the subject and the camera.

* For details on compatible accessories for the Multi Interface Shoe, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony
service facility.
Accessories for the Accessory Shoe can also be used. Operations with other manufacturers’ accessories are not guaranteed.

39
 Using the wind screen (supplied)

Use the wind screen to reduce wind noise picked up by the internal microphone when recording a movie.
Attach the wind screen to the Multi Interface Shoe.

Note
When attaching the wind screen, make sure that the wind screen does not get caught in the Multi Interface Shoe.

When attaching a lens, make sure that the wind screen does not get caught in the lens mount.

Related Topic
Front side
Rear side
Sides
Bottom

TP1001271230

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

40
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Sides

1. Hooks for shoulder strap

Attach both ends of the strap onto the camera.

2. (Microphone) jack
When an external microphone is connected, the built-in microphone turns off automatically. When the external
microphone is a plugin-power type, the power of the microphone is supplied by the camera.

3. USB Type-C® terminal

4. Memory card slot
5. HDMI micro jack
6. (Headphones) jack
7. Access lamp

Related Topic
Front side
Rear side
Top side
Bottom

41
 TP1001271231

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

42
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Bottom

1. Battery insertion slot

2. Lock lever
3. Battery cover
4. Tripod socket hole
Supports 1/4-20 UNC screws
Use a tripod with a screw less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inches) long. Otherwise, you cannot firmly secure the camera, and
damage to the camera may occur.

Related Topic
Front side
Rear side
Top side
Sides

TP1001271232

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

43
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Basic icons displayed on the monitor

This section describes the screen display when the shooting mode is (Program Auto).

The following is an example of the display when [DISP (Screen Disp) Set] is set to [Display All Info.] and the touch
function icons are hidden.
The displayed content and positions are for reference only, and may differ from the actual display. Also, the displayed
content may vary depending on the camera settings and the camera’s system software (firmware) version.
For information on how to show/hide the touch function icons and examples of the touch function icon display, refer to
“Touch function icons.”

During movie recording

Display when holding the camera vertically

1. [ Shoot Mode] is set to [Program Auto].

2. Audio level
3. [Microphone Directivity] is set to [Auto].
4. [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
5. Actual shooting time of the movie
6. The camera is in the shooting standby mode.
7. [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [60p].
8. Recordable movie time on the memory card
9. Remaining battery level
44
10. Shutter speed
11. Aperture value
12. Exposure compensation
13. [ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO]. (The ISO value automatically set by the camera is displayed.)
14. [ White Balance] is set to [Auto].
15. [ Shooting] is set to [On] or [Auto], and the recordable area is the APS-C-equivalent size.

During still image shooting

Display when holding the camera vertically

1. Number of still images that can be recorded on the memory card

2. [JPEG/HEIF Switch] is set to [JPEG]. [JPEG Quality] is set to [Fine].
3. [JPEG Image Size] is set to [L: 12M].
4. [ SteadyShot] is set to [On].
5. [ Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF].
6. [ Shoot Mode] is set to [Program Auto].
7. [Drive Mode] is set to [Single Shooting].
8. [ Focus Area] is set to [Wide].
9. [D-Range Optimizer: Auto] is selected.
10. [ Creative Look] is set to [ST].
11. [ Metering Mode] is set to [Multi].
12. [ White Balance] is set to [Auto].
13. [ Subject Recog in AF] is set to [On] and [ Recognition Target] is set to [Human].
14. [ Soft Skin Effect] is set to [On: Mid].
15. [ Picture Profile] is set to [Off].

Related Topic
Touch function icons
List of icons on the screen for shooting movies

45
List of icons on the screen for shooting still images
List of icons on the playback screen

TP1001271250

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

46
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Touch function icons

Some functions have icons for touch operations (touch function icons). You can execute or change the settings of the
functions by touching the icons.

Settings for using the touch function icons

[Touch Operation]: [On]
[Shooting Screen]:

Set [Shooting Screen] to [On].

[Swipe Right] or [Swipe Left] → desired setting.

To show/hide the touch function icons

Swipe right or left on the shooting standby screen. The touch function icons will appear on the left and right sides of the
screen according to the settings for [Swipe Right] and [Swipe Left] under [Shooting Screen].
To hide the touch function icons, swipe the screen in the opposite direction from when you made the icons appear.

Examples of the touch function icon display and functions of each icon
The examples show the display when you set the icons to appear on both the left and right sides.
During movie recording

Icons on the left side: Shoot Mode, Self-timer, Mic Directivity Select, Cinematic Vlog Set., Creative Look*
Icons on the right side: Starts recording movies, Product SC Set, Recog. Target Select, Step Zoom, switches to the
playback screen**
* When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], the icon changes to the (image adjustment) setting icon.
** The shot mark button is displayed during movie recording so that shot marks can be set for the movie being recorded.

During still image shooting

Icons on the left side: Shoot Mode, Drive Mode, Focus Area, White Balance, Creative Look*

47
Icons on the right side: Shoots a still image, starts recording movies, Recog. Target Select, Step Zoom, switches to the
playback screen**
* When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], the icon changes to the (image adjustment) setting icon.
** The shot mark button is displayed even during movie recording in the still image shooting mode so that shot marks can be set for the movie
being recorded.

Hint
When MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Playback Screen] is set to [On], the touch function icons on the playback
screen are always displayed.

If you set MENU → (Setup) →[Touch Operation] → [Shooting Screen] → [Icon When Monitor Flipped] to [Flip], you can set
whether to switch the left and right icons on the shooting screen when the monitor is flipped.

Related Topic
Shooting Screen
Shoot Mode (still image)/Shoot Mode (movie)/Shoot Mode (S&Q/time-lapse)
Self-timer (movie)
Microphone Directivity
Cinematic Vlog Set.
Creative Look (still image/movie)
Adjusting images in the auto mode (My Image Style)
Shooting movies (Intelligent Auto)
Product Showcase Set
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Step Zoom Magnif. (still image/movie)
Playing back movies
Drive Mode
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
White Balance (still image/movie)
Shooting still images (Intelligent Auto)
Playing back still images

TP1001271188

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

48
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

FE 28-60mm F4-5.6

1. Focusing ring
2. Zooming ring
3. Focal-length scale

When shooting, rotate the zooming ring until the focal-length index comes within the focal-length scale range (A) to
extend the lens.

4. Lens mount rubber ring

5. Mounting index
6. Lens contacts*
7. Lens retraction index
After shooting, rotate the zooming ring until the lens retraction index reaches the focal-length index to retract the lens.

8. Focal-length index

* Do not touch this part directly.

Specifications
Focal length: 28 – 60 mm
35mm equivalent focal length*1: 42 – 90 mm
Lens groups-elements: 7 – 8
Angle of view 1*2: 75° – 40°
Angle of view 2*2: 54° – 27°
Minimum focus*3: 0.3 – 0.45 m (0.99 – 1.48 ft.)
Maximum magnification: 0.16×
Minimum aperture: f/22 – f/32
Filter diameter: 40.5 mm
Dimensions (max. diameter × height): Approx. 66.6 mm × 45 mm (Approx. 2 5/8 inches × 1 13/16 inches)
Mass: Approx. 167 g (Approx. 5.9 oz.)
SteadyShot: No

*1 This is the equivalent focal length in 35mm format when mounted on an Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera equipped with an APS-C sized
image sensor.
*2 Angle of view 1 is the value for 35mm cameras, and angle of view 2 is the value for Interchangeable Lens Digital Cameras equipped with an
APS-C sized image sensor.
*3 Minimum focus is the distance from the image sensor to the subject.

49
Supplied items
Lens (1), Front Lens Cap (1), Rear Lens Cap (1)
Note
If you use this lens attached to a camera other than this model, an alert may not appear on the monitor or the viewfinder even
when the focal-length index is outside the range of the focal-length scale. In such cases, the camera shoots images as follows.
The aperture value is locked at F14.
The focus mode is locked to manual focusing, but you cannot adjust the focus using the focusing ring.
The ending of the lens name in the Exif information is recorded as “(Retract)” or “F0” when the image is shot with the lens
retracted.

This lens is only supplied with lens-kit models. The release status of lens-kit models may vary among countries and regions.

TP1001271253

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

50
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Touch panel

By touching the monitor, you can intuitively perform operations such as focusing on the shooting screen and operating
the playback screen.

Touch operations (on the shooting screen)

Touch the monitor to specify where to focus (Touch Focus).

Touch a subject on the monitor to use the touch tracking function (Touch Tracking).
You can also focus on a subject and shoot images simply by touching the subject on the screen (Touch Shutter).
When you touch the subject on the screen, the camera adjusts the brightness automatically according to the subject
(Touch AE). [Touch AE] can also be used in combination with [Touch Focus], [Touch Tracking], or [Touch Shutter].
For information on how to switch the function activated by touch operation, refer to “ Shooting Screen .”

Touch operations (on the playback screen)

During single-image playback, swipe the screen to the left or right to move to the previous or next image.

During single-image playback, you can enlarge or reduce the displayed image by moving apart or bringing together two
fingers on the screen (pinch-out/pinch-in).

You can also double-tap the monitor to enlarge a still image or exit the enlarged image.
During movie playback, you can start or pause playback using touch operations.

51
 Hint
You can also operate the camera by touching the guides displayed on the bottom of the screen (Except when in the [Intelligent
Auto] mode).

You can open the function menu by swiping upward quickly on the shooting screen. You can show and hide the icons for functions
displayed on the left and right sides of the screen by swiping left and right quickly on the shooting screen.

You can set whether to enable touch operations and configure detailed settings under [Shooting Screen], [Playback Screen], and
[Menu Screen].

Related Topic
Touch Operation
Shooting Screen
Menu Screen
Touch function icons
Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)
Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)
Shooting with touch operations (Touch Shutter)
Adjusting the exposure with touch operations (Touch AE)

TP1001265409

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

52
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Touch function icons

Some functions have icons for touch operations (touch function icons). You can execute or change the settings of the
functions by touching the icons.

Settings for using the touch function icons

[Touch Operation]: [On]
[Shooting Screen]:

Set [Shooting Screen] to [On].

[Swipe Right] or [Swipe Left] → desired setting.

To show/hide the touch function icons

Swipe right or left on the shooting standby screen. The touch function icons will appear on the left and right sides of the
screen according to the settings for [Swipe Right] and [Swipe Left] under [Shooting Screen].
To hide the touch function icons, swipe the screen in the opposite direction from when you made the icons appear.

Examples of the touch function icon display and functions of each icon
The examples show the display when you set the icons to appear on both the left and right sides.
During movie recording

Icons on the left side: Shoot Mode, Self-timer, Mic Directivity Select, Cinematic Vlog Set., Creative Look*
Icons on the right side: Starts recording movies, Product SC Set, Recog. Target Select, Step Zoom, switches to the
playback screen**
* When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], the icon changes to the (image adjustment) setting icon.
** The shot mark button is displayed during movie recording so that shot marks can be set for the movie being recorded.

During still image shooting

Icons on the left side: Shoot Mode, Drive Mode, Focus Area, White Balance, Creative Look*

53
Icons on the right side: Shoots a still image, starts recording movies, Recog. Target Select, Step Zoom, switches to the
playback screen**
* When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], the icon changes to the (image adjustment) setting icon.
** The shot mark button is displayed even during movie recording in the still image shooting mode so that shot marks can be set for the movie
being recorded.

Hint
When MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Playback Screen] is set to [On], the touch function icons on the playback
screen are always displayed.

If you set MENU → (Setup) →[Touch Operation] → [Shooting Screen] → [Icon When Monitor Flipped] to [Flip], you can set
whether to switch the left and right icons on the shooting screen when the monitor is flipped.

Related Topic
Shooting Screen
Shoot Mode (still image)/Shoot Mode (movie)/Shoot Mode (S&Q/time-lapse)
Self-timer (movie)
Microphone Directivity
Cinematic Vlog Set.
Creative Look (still image/movie)
Adjusting images in the auto mode (My Image Style)
Shooting movies (Intelligent Auto)
Product Showcase Set
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Step Zoom Magnif. (still image/movie)
Playing back movies
Drive Mode
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
White Balance (still image/movie)
Shooting still images (Intelligent Auto)
Playing back still images

TP1001271188

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

54
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Control wheel

On the menu screen or the screen displayed by pressing the Fn button, you can move the selection frame by turning the
control wheel or by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel. Your selection is confirmed when you
press the center of the control wheel.

The DISP (Display Setting), ( Exposure Comp.), / ( Self-timer/Drive Mode), and ISO ( ISO)
functions are assigned to the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel. In addition, you can assign selected
functions to the left/right/bottom side and the center of the control wheel, and to the rotation of the control wheel.
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel or by
turning the control wheel.
During vertical display, the movement directions of the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel are also rotated
to match the orientation of the monitor so that intuitive operation is possible. (when the camera’s system software
(firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later)
The functions assigned to the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [
Custom Key/Dial Set.] will not rotate during vertical display.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
Vertical Display

TP1001248232

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

55
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Still/Movie/S&Q switch

You can use the Still/Movie/S&Q switch to select a shooting mode.

You can select the still image shooting mode, movie recording mode, or slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode as the
shooting mode using the Still/Movie/S&Q switch.

Hint
The menu items displayed in the [Shooting], [Exposure/Color], and [Focus] tabs of the menu screen vary depending on the
shooting mode (still image/movie/S&Q). Before you adjust these settings, select the desired shooting mode with the
Still/Movie/S&Q switch.

When shooting a time-lapse movie, set the Still/Movie/S&Q dial to S&Q, and select [ Time-lapse].

Related Topic
MENU button
Shooting movies (Intelligent Auto)
Shooting still images (Intelligent Auto)
S&Q Settings
Time-lapse Settings

TP1001271281

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

56
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

MENU button

The menu screen is displayed by pressing the MENU button. You can change settings related to all of the camera
operations including shooting and playback, or you can execute a function from the menu screen.

(A) Menu tab

Menu tabs are categorized by usage scenario, such as shooting, playback, network settings, etc.

(B) Menu group

In each tab, menu items are grouped by function.
The number assigned to the group is the serial number in the tab. Refer to the number to determine the location of the
group in use.

(C) Menu item

Select the function you want to set or execute.

Hint
The name of the selected tab or group is displayed at the top of the screen.

When [Touch Operation] is set to [On] and [Menu Screen] is set to [On], touch operations on the menu screen are possible.

Basic operations on the menu screen

1. Press the MENU button to display the menu screen.
2. Move within the menu tree and find the desired menu item by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control
wheel.

The displayed menu items differ between the still image shooting modes and movie recording modes.

57
 (A) Menu tabs
(B) Menu groups
(C) Menu items
3. Press the center of the control wheel to select the menu item.
The setting screen or execution screen for the selected item will appear on the monitor.

4. Select a parameter or execute the function.

If you want to cancel changing the parameter, press the MENU button and go back to the previous screen.

5. Press the MENU button to exit the menu screen.

You will return to the shooting screen or playback screen.
Hint
In the (Main) tab, you can view a list of the current shooting settings. Select a setting value in the tab to open the
corresponding menu item and change the setting value.

You can display the menu screen by assigning the [MENU] function to a custom key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [
Custom Key/Dial Set.], and then pressing that key.

Relationship between the Still/Movie/S&Q switch and menu screen

The menu groups and menu items displayed in the [Main], [Shooting], [Exposure/Color], and [Focus] tabs vary depending
on the Still/Movie/S&Q switch position.

The displayed menu groups and menu items are the same in the movie recording modes and the slow-motion/quick-
motion shooting modes.

Still image shooting modes

Menu items for shooting still images are displayed.*

* Since you can record movies with the MOVIE (Movie) button even in the still image shooting mode, some basic movie menu items are also
displayed.

Movie recording modes/Slow-motion and quick-motion shooting modes

Menu items for recording movies are displayed.

58
Latest software notification badge

If newer camera software is available, a red notification badge will appear over the (Setup) tab, [Setup Option], and
[Version] in the menu screen to notify you that an update is available (when the camera’s system software (firmware) is
Ver.2.00 or later).

Icons used in the “Help Guide”

: Menu items displayed in the still image shooting modes
: Menu items displayed in the movie recording modes and slow-motion/quick-motion shooting modes
: Menu items displayed in any of the still image shooting modes, movie recording modes, or slow-
motion/quick-motion shooting modes

Related Topic
Add Item
Display From My Menu
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Still/Movie/S&Q switch
Main menu (shooting setting list)

TP1001248234

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

59
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Main menu (shooting setting list)

Select the (Main) tab on the menu screen to display a list of shooting settings. You can confirm the settings before
shooting or for each scene, and also change the settings directly from this screen.

Main menu for shooting movies

Main 1

1. Rec Frame Rate/ Frame Rate Settings (when shooting slow-motion/quick-motion movies)/ Rec Frame Rate
(when shooting time-lapse)

2. Shutter Speed

3. Aperture

4. ISO

5. White Balance

6. Picture Profile

7. File Format

8. Record Setting/ Record Setting (when shooting slow-motion/quick-motion movies)/ Record Setting (when
shooting time-lapse)

9. Gamma Display Assist

10. Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.

11. Proxy Recording

12. Wind Noise Reduct.

13. Audio Rec Level

Main 2

60
 1. Log Shooting Setting

2. Shooting

3. Format

4. Shoot Mode

5. File Settings

6. Microphone Directivity

7. SteadyShot

8. Focus Mode

9. Focus Area

10. Subject Recog in AF

11. Recognition Target

12. Remaining battery level

Main menu for shooting still images

Main 1

1. Shutter Speed *

2. Aperture *

3. Exposure Comp.

4. ISO

5. Format
61
 6. File Format

7. RAW File Type

8. JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality

9. JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size

10. Aspect Ratio

11. Shoot Mode

12. Drive Mode

13. Flash Mode

14. Flash Comp.

15. Wireless Flash

16. White Balance

17. Focus Mode

18. Focus Area

19. Remaining battery level

* When the shooting mode is [Program Auto], the shutter speed and aperture value are displayed in the same area. You can perform Program Shift
by selecting the area.

Hint
If you assign the [Display Main Menu] function to the desired key using the custom key settings, you can also open the Main
menu by pressing the assigned key.

You can open the setting screens by touching the icons on the main menu when [Touch Operation] is set to [On] and [Menu
Screen] is set to [On].

Related Topic
MENU button
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Touch Operation
Menu Screen

TP1001271204

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

62
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Fn (function) button

If you press the Fn (function) button during shooting, a menu containing frequently used functions such as the audio
recording level and focus mode will appear on the screen (function menu). This allows you to access functions quickly.

Example of function menu

The displayed items differ depending on the camera status.

Hint
Use MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] →[Fn Menu Settings] to register your favorite functions in the function
menu. You can register 12 functions for shooting still images and 12 functions for shooting movies separately.

When [Touch Operation] is set to [On] and [Shooting Screen] is set to [On], touch operations on the function menu screen are
possible.

When [Touch Operation] is set to [On] and [Shooting Screen] is set to [On], you can also open [Fn Menu Settings] by holding
down the icon in the function menu.

When [Swipe Up] under [Shooting Screen] is set to [Open the Fn Menu], the function menu can be displayed using touch
operations by swiping the shooting screen upward quickly.

Swipe downward from the area outside of the function menu or touch the area outside of the function menu to close the function
menu.

1 Press the Fn (Function) button.

2 Press the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel to select a function to set.

63
 3 Select the desired setting by turning the control wheel, and press the center of the control wheel.

Some functions can be fine-tuned using the control dial.

To adjust settings from the dedicated setting screens

Select the icon for the desired function and then press the center of the control wheel. The dedicated setting screen for
the function will appear. Follow the operating guide (A) to adjust settings.

Related Topic
Fn Menu Settings
Touch Operation
Shooting Screen

TP1001224844

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

64
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

C (custom) buttons

If you assign frequently used functions to the custom buttons (C1 to C2) in advance, you can quickly call up those
functions simply by pressing the button during shooting or playback.
Recommended functions are assigned to the custom buttons by default.

To check/change the functions of the custom buttons

You can confirm the function currently assigned to each custom button via the following procedure.
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [
Custom Key Setting].
If you want to change the function of the custom button, press the center of the control wheel while the custom button is
selected. The functions that can be assigned to that button will appear. Select your desired function.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001265410

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

65
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

DISP (Display Setting) button

By pressing the DISP (Display Setting) button, you can change the content displayed on the screen during shooting and
playback. The display switches each time the DISP button is pressed.

During shooting
Display All Info. → No Disp. Info. → Histogram → Level → Display All Info.
When shooting movies:

When shooting still images:

During playback
Display Info. → Histogram → No Disp. Info. → Display Info.

If the image has an overexposed or underexposed area, the corresponding section will blink on the histogram display
(overexposed/underexposed warning).

66
 The settings for playback are also applied in [ Auto Review].

Hint
If [Vertical Display] is set to [On], the information display will rotate vertically to fit the orientation of the camera when you hold the
camera vertically in the shooting mode (when the camera's system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later).

Note
The displayed contents and their position shown in the illustration are just a guideline, and may differ from the actual display.

Related Topic
DISP (Screen Disp) Set
Vertical Display

TP1001265456

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

67
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Delete button

You can delete an image currently being displayed by pressing the (Delete) button.

When a confirmation message appears after you press the (Delete) button, use the control wheel to select
[Delete] and press the center.
You can also delete two or more images at once.
Select MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → [Delete]. Then, select the images you want to delete.

Hint
If you set MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → [ Delete pressing twice] to [On], you can delete images by pressing the
(Delete) button twice in a row.

Other than the single-image playback screen, you can also use the (Delete) button for the following operations.
Custom Key
Opening the context menu ([Add to My Menu]/[In-Camera Guide]) (when the camera's system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or
later)

Related Topic
Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)
Delete confirm.
Delete pressing twice
C (custom) buttons
In-Camera Guide

TP1001224900

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

68
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Control dial

You can use the control dial to quickly change the setting values in the following cases:

When you want to adjust the aperture value or shutter speed.

When you want to change the camera settings during shooting.

During playback, you can turn the dials to browse images.

(A): Control dial

Hint
You can use [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]/[ Custom Key/Dial Set.] to assign the desired function to the control dial.

You can also use the [My Dial Settings] function to assign your desired function to the control dial, and recall the function when
required.

Related Topic
Shoot Mode: Aperture Priority
Shoot Mode: Shutter Priority
Shoot Mode: Manual Exposure
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
Av/Tv Rotate

TP1001271280

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

69
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Keyboard screen

When manual character entry is required, a keyboard is displayed on the screen. For examples of functions that use the
keyboard, see “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.

1. Input box
The characters you entered are displayed.
2. Switch character types
Each time you press this key, the character type will switch between alphabet letters, numerals and symbols.
3. Keyboard
Each time you press this key, the characters corresponding to that key will be displayed one-by-one in order. To
switch letters from lower to upper case, press (Up arrow).
4. (Left arrow)
Moves the cursor in the input box to the left.
5. (Right arrow)
Moves the cursor in the input box to the right. This key is also used to finalize the input of a character being edited
and move to the next character.
6. (Delete)
Deletes the character preceding the cursor.
7. (Up arrow)
Switches a letter to upper or lower case.
8. (Space)
Enters a space.
9. OK
Press this key after entering characters to finalize the entered characters.

The procedure for entering alphabetic characters is explained below.

1 Use the control wheel to move the cursor to the desired key.

Each time you press the center of the control wheel, the characters will change.
To switch the letter to upper or lower case, press (Up arrow).

2 When the character that you want to enter appears, press (Right arrow) to confirm the character.

Make sure to confirm one character at a time. Unless a character is confirmed, you cannot enter the next
character.
Even if you do not press (Right arrow), the entered character will be automatically confirmed after several
seconds.

3 After you finish entering all characters, press [OK] to finalize the entered characters.

70
 To cancel input, select [Cancel].

Related Topic
Copyright Info
Access Point Set.
Wired LAN (USB-LAN)
Edit Device Name
Access Authen. Settings

TP1001257129

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

71
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

In-Camera Guide

The [In-Camera Guide] displays descriptions of MENU items, Fn (Function) items, and settings.

1 Select the MENU or Fn item for which you want to see a description, and then press the (Delete) button
(A).

The descriptions of the item are displayed.

Select [In-Camera Guide] and press the center of the control wheel when the context menu appears (when the
camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later).

TP1001248247

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

72
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Inserting/removing the battery pack

1 Slide the switch on the battery cover to open the cover.

2 Insert the battery pack while pressing the lock lever (A) with the tip of the battery until the battery locks into
place.

3 Close the cover and slide the switch to the LOCK side.

To remove the battery pack

Make sure that the access lamp is not lit, and turn off the camera. Then, slide the lock lever (A) and remove the battery
pack. Be careful not to drop the battery pack.

73
Related Topic
Charging the battery with a USB-PD-compatible device
Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery

TP1001248222

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

74
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Charging the battery with a USB-PD-compatible device

1 Turn off the camera.

2 Connect the USB Type-C terminal of the camera to the USB Type-C terminal of a device compatible with
USB PD (USB Power Delivery) using a commercially available USB Type-C cable (USB-C® – USB-C).

Use a USB-PD-compatible device with an output of 18 W (9 V/2 A) or more and a USB Type-C cable (USB-C –
USB-C) that supports 3 A or more.

Charge lamp on the camera (orange)

Lit: Charging
Off: Charging finished
Flashing: Charging error or charging paused temporarily because the camera is not within the proper temperature
range

Charging time (Full charge): The charging time is approximately 175 min. (when using a USB-PD-compatible
device with an output of 27 W (9 V/3 A)).
The charging time varies depending on the USB-PD-compatible device and USB cable.
The above charging time applies when charging a fully depleted battery pack at a temperature of 25 °C (77 °F).
Charging may take longer depending on conditions of use and circumstances.
The charge lamp turns off when charging is completed.
If the charge lamp lights up and then immediately turns off, the battery pack is fully charged.

Hint
You can also charge using a device that is not compatible with USB PD. Use a USB Type-C cable (USB-A - USB-C)
(commercially available). When you use an AC adaptor, use one with a rated output of 1.5 A or higher.
Charging may take longer than when using a USB-PD-compatible device.

Note
Use a nearby wall outlet (wall socket) when using an AC Adaptor. If any malfunction occurs, disconnect the plug from the wall
outlet (wall socket) immediately to disconnect from the power source. If you use the product with a charge lamp, note that the
product is not disconnected from the power source even when the lamp turns off.

If you turn on the camera, power will be supplied from the wall outlet (wall socket) and you will be able to operate the camera.
However, the battery pack will not be charged.

75
 If the product is connected to a laptop computer that is not connected to a power source, the laptop battery level decreases. Do
not leave the product connected to a laptop computer for an extended period of time.

Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode when a USB connection has been established
between the computer and the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or
waking the computer from sleep mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.

Charging cannot be guaranteed with a custom-built computer, modified computer, or a computer connected through a USB hub.

The camera may not operate correctly when other USB devices are used at the same time.

Before charging, be sure to also read “Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery.”

Related Topic
Inserting/removing the battery pack
Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery

TP1001248224

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

76
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Using the battery charger abroad

You can use the battery charger (sold separately) in any country or region where the power supply is within 100 V to 240
V AC and 50 Hz/60 Hz.
Depending on the country/region, a converting plug adaptor may be needed to connect to a wall outlet (wall socket).
Consult a travel agency, etc., and prepare one in advance.

Note
Do not use an electronic voltage transformer as doing so may cause a malfunction.

TP1001224976

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

77
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)

Use an AC adaptor, etc. to shoot and play back images while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). This
conserves the camera's battery power.
We recommend using a USB-PD (USB Power Delivery) device that is compatible with an output of 9V/3A.

1 Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the camera.

The camera will not activate if there is no remaining battery. Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the
camera.

2 Connect a USB cable (commercially available) to the USB Type-C terminal on the camera.

3 Connect to a wall outlet (wall socket) using an AC adaptor, etc.

4 Turn on the camera.

An icon ( ) indicating USB power supply will appear next to the battery display on the monitor, and power
supply will start.

Note
As long as the power is on, the battery pack will not be charged even if the camera is connected to the AC Adaptor, etc.

Under certain conditions, power may be supplied from the battery pack supplementarily even if you are using the AC adaptor, etc.

Do not remove the battery pack while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). If you remove the battery pack, the
camera will be turned off.

Only connect the USB cable to the camera or disconnect the USB cable from the camera while the camera is turned off.

Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the continuous recording time may be shortened while power is supplied from
a wall outlet (wall socket). The area around the terminal may become hot. Be careful when handling it.

When using a mobile charger as a power source, confirm that it is fully charged before use. Also, be careful of the remaining
power on the mobile charger during use.

Operation cannot be guaranteed with all external power supplies.

Related Topic
Inserting/removing the battery pack

TP1001248226

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

78
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Memory cards that can be used

This camera supports only SD memory cards (UHS-II compatible). When using microSD memory cards with this camera,
be sure to use the appropriate adaptor.

For still-image shooting

The following memory cards can be used.

SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards

For movie recording (When [ Proxy Recording] is set to [Off])

Movie recording formats and compatible memory cards are as follows.

File Format Maximum recordable bit rate when recording Supported memory card

XAVC HS 4K 200Mbps SDHC/SDXC card (U3 or higher)

XAVC S 4K 200Mbps SDHC/SDXC card (U3 or higher)

XAVC S HD 100Mbps SDHC/SDXC card (U3 or higher)

XAVC S-I 4K 600Mbps SDXC V90 or higher

XAVC S-I HD 222Mbps SDXC V90 or higher

For movie recording (When [ Proxy Recording] is set to [On])

Proxy recording is not possible when the recording frame rate is [120p]/[100p]. Depending on the setting for [ File
Format], the maximum recording bit rate may be lower than when [ Proxy Recording] is set to [Off]. Supported
memory cards for [ File Format] are as follows.
This camera cannot perform proxy recording when shooting in the XAVC S-I format.

File Format Maximum recordable bit rate when recording Supported memory card

XAVC HS 4K 200Mbps + 16Mbps* SDXC card (V60 or higher)

XAVC S 4K 200Mbps + 16Mbps* SDXC card (V60 or higher)

XAVC S HD 50Mbps + 16Mbps* SDHC/SDXC card (U3 or higher)

79
* The maximum recording bit rate for proxy movies on this camera is 16 Mbps.

For S&Q Motion shooting (When [ Proxy Recording] is set to [Off])

File formats and compatible memory cards are as follows.

File Format Maximum recordable bit rate when recording Supported memory card

XAVC HS 4K 250Mbps SDXC V60 or higher

XAVC S 4K 280Mbps SDXC V60 or higher

XAVC S HD 250Mbps SDXC V60 or higher

XAVC S-I 4K 600Mbps SDXC V90 or higher

XAVC S-I HD 445Mbps SDXC V90 or higher

For S&Q Motion shooting (When [ Proxy Recording] is set to [On])

Proxy recording is not possible when the recording frame rate is [120p]/[100p]. Depending on the setting for [ File
Format], the maximum recording bit rate may be lower than when [ Proxy Recording] is set to [Off]. Supported
memory cards for [ File Format] are as follows.
This camera cannot perform proxy recording when shooting in the XAVC S-I format.

File Format Maximum recordable bit rate when recording Supported memory card

XAVC HS 4K 250Mbps + 16Mbps* SDXC card (V60 or higher)

XAVC S 4K 280Mbps + 16Mbps* SDXC card (V60 or higher)

XAVC S HD 125Mbps + 16Mbps* SDXC card (V60 or higher)

* The maximum recording bit rate for proxy movies on this camera is 16 Mbps.

For time-lapse shooting (When [ Proxy Recording] is set to [Off])

Supported memory cards for [ File Format] are as follows.

File Format Supported memory card

XAVC HS 4K

XAVC S 4K SDHC/SDXC card (U3 or higher)

XAVC S HD

80
 File Format Supported memory card

XAVC S-I 4K
SDXC card (V90 or higher)
XAVC S-I HD

For time-lapse shooting (When [ Proxy Recording] is set to [On])

Supported memory cards for [ File Format] are as follows.
This camera cannot perform proxy recording when shooting in the XAVC S-I format.

File Format Supported memory card

XAVC HS 4K
SDXC card (V60 or higher)
XAVC S 4K

XAVC S HD SDHC/SDXC card (U3 or higher)

Note
In slow-motion recording, the recording bit rate is higher than usual. You may need a memory card that can be written at a higher
speed.

When an SDHC memory card is used to record an XAVC S movie over extended periods of time, the recorded movies will be
divided into files 4 GB in size. When shooting a time-lapse, recording stops automatically right before the file is divided.

Charge the battery pack sufficiently before attempting to recover the database files on the memory card.

Related Topic
Notes on memory card
Number of recordable images
Recordable movie times
S&Q Settings

TP1001248230

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

81
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Inserting/removing a memory card

Explains how to insert a memory card (sold separately) to the camera. You can use the SD memory cards with this
camera.

1 Slide the switch on the memory card cover to open the cover.

2 Insert the memory card.

With the notched corner facing in the direction illustrated, insert the memory card until it clicks into place. Insert
the memory card correctly. Not doing so may cause a malfunction.

3 Close the cover, and then slide the switch towards the LOCK side.

Hint
When you use a memory card with the camera for the first time, it is recommended that you format the card on the camera for
more stable performance of the memory card.

To remove the memory card

82
Open the memory card cover and make sure that the access lamp (A) is not lit, then push in the memory card lightly
once to remove it.

Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used
Notes on memory card
Format

TP1001248228

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

83
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Attaching/removing a lens

Turn off the camera before attaching or removing the lens.

1 Remove the body cap (A) from the camera and the rear lens cap (B) from the rear of the lens.

It is recommended that you attach the front lens cap when you have done shooting.

2 Mount the lens by aligning the two white index marks (mounting indexes) on the lens and camera.

Hold the camera with the lens mount facing down to prevent dust and debris from entering the camera.

3 While pushing the lens lightly toward the camera, turn the lens slowly in the direction of the arrow until it
clicks into the locked position.

Be sure to hold the lens straight when attaching it.

84
To remove the lens
Keep pressing the lens release button (A) and turn the lens in the direction of the arrow until it stops.
After removing the lens, attach the body cap to the camera and the lens caps to the front and rear of the lens to prevent
dust and debris from entering the camera and lens.

Note
When attaching/removing the lens, work quickly in a dust-free location.

Do not press the lens release button when attaching a lens.

Do not use force when attaching a lens.

A Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is required to use an A-mount lens (sold separately). When using the Mount Adaptor, refer to
the operating manual supplied with the Mount Adaptor.

If you want to shoot full-frame images, use a full-frame size compatible lens.

When you use a lens with a tripod socket, attach a tripod to the tripod socket of the lens to help balance the weight of the lens.

When carrying the camera with a lens attached, hold both the camera and the lens firmly.

Do not hold the part of the lens that is extended for zoom or focus adjustment.

Related Topic
Mount Adaptor

TP1001257080

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

85
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Performing initial setup for the camera

By establishing a Bluetooth connection (pairing) between the camera and a smartphone and using the smartphone
application Creators' App, you can perform initial camera settings such as date and time settings from the smartphone.
Install Creators' App from your smartphone’s application store. If the application is already installed, be sure to update it
to the latest version.
You can also install Creators' App by scanning the QR Code displayed on the screen of the camera using your
smartphone.
For details on Creators' App, refer to the following website.
https://www.sony.net/ca/

1 Set the ON/OFF (Power) switch to “ON” to turn on the camera.

2 Select the desired language and then press the center of the control wheel.

The privacy notice screen will appear. Read the privacy notice regarding biometrics by opening the link using
your smartphone, etc.

3 Press the center of the control wheel.

4 Follow the instructions on the camera screen to connect the camera with your smartphone.

Launch Creators' App on your smartphone to connect the camera with your smartphone.
If you do not connect a smartphone, the area/date/time setting screen will appear.
To connect your smartphone to the camera after the initial setup, select MENU → (Network) → [
Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [Smartphone Connection].

5 Perform initial camera setup on the Creators' App screen.

Follow the instructions on the screen to set the following items.

Date and time / Display format

Auto Power OFF Temp.
Device name

You can change these settings later from the camera menu.

On maintaining the date and time

This camera has an internal rechargeable backup battery for maintaining the date and time and other settings regardless
of whether the power is turned on or off, or whether the battery pack is charged or discharged.
To charge the internal backup battery, insert a charged battery pack into the camera, and leave the product for 24 hours
or more with the power turned off.
If the clock resets every time the battery pack is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out.
Consult your service facility.

Hint

86
 By connecting the camera and a smartphone via the Bluetooth function, you can operate the camera using the smartphone and
transfer images from the camera to the smartphone.

Note
If the date and time setting is canceled halfway, the setting screen for the date and time appears every time you turn on the
camera.

The built-in clock of the camera may exhibit time errors. Adjust the time at regular intervals.

Related Topic
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
Area/Date/Time Setting
Auto Power OFF Temp.
Edit Device Name
Privacy Notice

TP1001269018

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

87
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Confirmation before shooting

This section introduces useful settings and functions that you should know when using the camera. We recommend that
you confirm these settings and functions before using the camera.
From each item name listed below, you can jump to the page explaining the respective functions.

Preparing a memory card for use with this camera

Format
Recover Image DB (still image/movie)

Preventing accidental failure to insert a memory card

Release w/o Card

Setting whether camera operating sounds are generated

Audio signals

Convenient functions for shooting self-portrait videos and vlogs

Product Showcase Set
Background Defocus
Cinematic Vlog Set.
Microphone Directivity

Making it easy to check whether the camera is on standby or recording when set to a movie mode
Emphasized REC Display

Resetting shooting settings or resetting all camera settings

Setting Reset

TP1001265417

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

88
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Shooting movies (Intelligent Auto)

This section describes how to record movies in the [Intelligent Auto] mode. In the [Intelligent Auto] mode, the camera
automatically focuses and automatically determines the exposure based on the recording conditions.

1 Set the Still/Movie/S&Q switch to (Movie) to select the movie recording mode.

2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode] → [Intelligent Auto].

The shooting mode will be set to (Intelligent Auto).

3 Press the MOVIE (Movie) button to start recording.

4 Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

To shoot with the touch function icons

You can also start shooting by touching an icon on the screen instead of pressing the MOVIE (movie) button. Swipe the
monitor left or right to display the touch function icons, and then touch the (start recording) icon. You can view the
captured image by touching the (switch to playback screen) icon.
For details on how to display the touch function icons, see “Touch function icons.”

To adjust the image brightness, color tone, etc. ( My Image Style)

Swipe the monitor left or right to display the touch function icons on the shooting screen, and touch (image
adjustment). You can set (Background Defocus), (Brightness), (Color), and [ Creative Look] to your
preferences. Touch each icon at the bottom of the screen to set each item.
For details, refer to “ Adjusting images in the auto mode (My Image Style) .”
89
To select the recording format ( File Format)
The resolution and degree of compatibility vary depending on the recording format (XAVC HS 4K/XAVC S 4K/XAVC S
HD/XAVC S-I 4K/XAVC S-I HD). Select the format in accordance with the purpose of the movie to be shot.

To select the frame rate or image quality ( Movie Settings)

The frame rate determines the smoothness of motion in movies. ([ Movie Settings] → [Rec Frame Rate])
The image quality changes with the bit rate. ([ Movie Settings] → [Record Setting])
If the bit rate is high, the amount of information will increase and you can shoot high-quality movies. However, this will
result in a larger volume of data.
Select the frame rate and bit rate according to your preference and purpose.

To adjust the exposure ( Shoot Mode)

You can select the exposure mode in [ Shoot Mode]. Select the exposure mode through the combination of a shutter
speed and aperture value.
Also, if you enable [Touch AE] under [Touch Func. in Shooting], you can adjust the exposure to the touched area.

To select the focusing method ( Focus Mode/ Focus Area)

Select (Continuous AF) or (Manual Focus) for [ Focus Mode]. You can specify the focus area by setting
[ Focus Area].

Even during shooting with manual focus, you can temporarily switch to auto focus in the following ways.

Press the custom key to which [AF On] is assigned, or press the shutter button halfway.
Press the custom key to which [Subject Recognition AF] is assigned.
Touch the subject on the monitor. (when [Touch Func. in Shooting] under [Shooting Screen] is set to [Touch Focus] or
[Touch Tracking])

To record movie audio in 4 channels

Attach a genuine Sony accessory that supports 4-channel and 24-bit audio recording to the Multi Interface Shoe of the
camera.

Hint
You can also assign the start/stop movie recording function to a preferred key.

You can focus quickly while shooting movies by pressing the shutter button halfway down. (The sound of auto focus operation
may be recorded in some cases.)

You can change the settings for ISO sensitivity, exposure compensation, and focus area while shooting movies.

The sounds of the camera and lens in operation may be recorded during movie shooting. To prevent sounds from being recorded,
set [Audio Recording] to [Off].

To prevent the operating sound of the zoom ring from being recorded when a power zoom lens is used, we recommend recording
movies using the zoom lever of the lens. When moving the zoom lever of the lens, be careful not to flip the lever.

When [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High], the camera can continue movie recording even when the temperature of the
camera becomes high.

Note
An icon indicating that data is being written is displayed after shooting. Do not remove the memory card while the icon is
displayed.

You cannot start recording a movie while writing data. Wait until data writing is completed and “STBY” is displayed before
recording a movie.

If the (Overheating warning) icon appears, the temperature of the camera has risen. Turn the power off and cool the camera
and wait until the camera is ready to shoot again.

90
 The temperature of the camera tends to rise when shooting movies continuously, and you may feel that the camera is warm. This
is not a malfunction. Also, [Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.] may appear. In such cases, turn the power off and cool the
camera and wait until the camera is ready to shoot again.

For the continuous shooting time of a movie recording, refer to “Recordable movie times.” When movie recording is finished, you
can record another movie by pressing the MOVIE button again. Recording may stop to protect the product, depending on the
temperature of the product or the battery.

Still images cannot be captured during movie recording.

Related Topic
Touch function icons
Adjusting images in the auto mode (My Image Style)
File Format (movie)
Movie Settings (movie)
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Shoe Audio Set.
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
REC w/ Shutter (movie)
Audio Recording
Auto Power OFF Temp.
Recordable movie times

TP1001224759

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

91
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Shooting still images (Intelligent Auto)

This section describes how to shoot still images in the [Intelligent Auto] mode. In the [Intelligent Auto] mode, the camera
automatically focuses and automatically determines the exposure based on the shooting conditions.

1 Set the Still/Movie/S&Q switch to (Still) to select the still image shooting mode.

2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode] → [Intelligent Auto].

The shooting mode will be set to (Intelligent Auto).

3 Adjust the monitor angle, and hold the camera.

4 When a zoom lens is mounted, enlarge images by using the zoom lever or the zoom ring.

5 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

When the image is in focus, a beep sounds and the indicator ( , etc.) lights up.

6 Press the shutter button fully down.

To shoot with the touch function icons

You can also shoot by touching an icon on the screen instead of pressing the shutter button. Swipe the monitor left or
right to display the touch function icons, and then touch the (shutter) icon. You can view the captured image by
touching the (switch to playback screen) icon.
For details on how to display the touch function icons, see “Touch function icons.”

92
To adjust the image brightness, color tone, etc. ( My Image Style)
Swipe the monitor left or right to display the touch function icons on the shooting screen, and touch (image
adjustment). You can set (Background Defocus), (Brightness), (Color), and [ Creative Look] to your
preferences. Touch each icon at the bottom of the screen to set each item.
For details, refer to “ Adjusting images in the auto mode (My Image Style) .”

To select the focus mode yourself ( Focus Mode / Focus Area)

Specifying [ Focus Mode], such as selecting (Single-shot AF) for landscapes or still subjects and selecting
(Continuous AF) for moving subjects, makes it easier to focus on the desired subject. You can also specify the
focus position and range using [ Focus Area].

Shooting while focusing on human eyes

The [ Subject Recog in AF] function under [Subject Recognition] is enabled in the default settings, so you can use the
Eye AF function immediately.

To shoot images with the focus locked on the desired subject (Focus-lock)
When you focus on the subject, the focus is locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway down. Switch to the
desired composition and press the shutter button all the way down to take the picture.

You can lock the focus on non-moving subjects. Set [ Focus Mode] to (Single-shot AF).
Setting [ Focus Area] to [Center Fix] makes it easier to focus on subjects located in the center of the screen.

Hint
When the product cannot focus automatically, the focus indicator flashes and the beep does not sound. Either recompose the
shot or change the focus mode or focus area settings. In [Continuous AF] mode, (focus indicator) lights up and the beep
indicating that the focus has been achieved does not sound.

Note
An icon indicating that data is being written is displayed after shooting. Do not remove the memory card while the icon is
displayed. Doing so will prevent images from being recorded normally.

Related Topic
Touch function icons
Adjusting images in the auto mode (My Image Style)
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Playing back still images
Auto Review (still image)

TP1001248235

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

93
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Finding functions from MENU

The displayed MENU items vary depending on the position of the Still/Movie/S&Q switch. In the table below, the modes
in which each MENU item is displayed are indicated by the still image/movie/S&Q icons.

: The menu item is displayed when the Still/Movie/S&Q switch is set to (still image shooting mode).
: The menu item is displayed when the Still/Movie/S&Q switch is set to (movie recording mode) or S&Q
(slow-motion/quick-motion shooting mode).
: The menu item is displayed regardless of the mode to which the Still/Movie/S&Q switch is set.

(Main) tab

Shooting settings are displayed in a list. For details, refer to “Main menu (shooting setting list).”

(Shooting) tab

94
 Groups Menu items

JPEG/HEIF Switch

File Format

RAW File Type

JPEG Quality

HEIF Quality

JPEG Image Size

HEIF Image Size

Aspect Ratio

File Format

Image Quality/Rec Movie Settings

S&Q Settings

Time-lapse Settings

Log Shooting Setting

Proxy Settings

Shooting

High ISO NR

HLG Still Image

Color Space

Lens Compensation

Format

Media Recover Image DB

Display Media Info.

File/Folder Settings

Select REC Folder

Create New Folder

File
Copyright Info

Write Serial Number

File Settings

95
 Groups Menu items

Shoot Mode

Shoot Mode
Shooting Mode
Shoot Mode

Camera Set. Memory

Drive Mode

Drive Mode Bracket Settings

Interval Shoot Func.

Silent Mode Settings

Release w/o Lens

Shutter/Silent
Release w/o Card

Anti-flicker Set.

Audio Recording

Audio Rec Level

Audio Out Timing

Audio Recording Wind Noise Reduct.

Microphone Directivity

Mic Direct Select Setting

Shoe Audio Set.

Time Code Preset

User Bit Preset

Time Code Format

TC/UB
Time Code Run

Time Code Make

User Bit Time Rec

SteadyShot

SteadyShot

Image Stabilization SteadyShot Adjust.

Focal Length

Framing Stabilizer

96
 Groups Menu items

Zoom Range

Step Zoom Magnif.

Zoom Zoom Lever Speed

Custom Key Z. Speed

Remote Zoom Speed

Grid Line Display

Grid Line Type

Shooting Display
Live View Display Set.

Emphasized REC Display

Aspect Marker

Aspect Marker Type

Aspect Marker Level

Marker Display
Marker Display
Center Marker

Aspect Marker

Safety Zone

Guideframe

Product SC Set

Defocus Level Set

Cinematic Vlog Set.

Shooting Option Self-timer

Auto Framing Settings

AutoCreateStillImage

after still img crt

(Exposure/Color) tab

Groups Menu items

Auto Slow Shutter

ISO
Exposure
ISO Range Limit

ISO AUTO Min. SS

97
 Groups Menu items

Exposure Comp.

Exposure Comp. Exposure step

Exposure Std. Adjust

Metering Mode

Face Priority in Multi Metering

Metering
Spot Metering Point

AEL w/ Shutter

Flash Mode

Flash Comp.

Exp.comp.set
Flash
Wireless Flash

Red Eye Reduction

External Flash Set.

White Balance

Priority Set in AWB

White Balance
Shutter AWB Lock

Shockless WB

D-Range Optimizer

Creative Look

Picture Profile
Color/Tone
Select LUT

Manage User LUTs

Soft Skin Effect

Zebra Display
Zebra Display
Zebra Level

(Focus) tab

98
 Groups Menu items

Focus Mode

Priority Set in AF-S

Priority Set in AF-C

AF Tracking Sensitivity

Aperture Drive in AF
AF/MF
AF w/ Shutter

Pre-AF

AF Transition Speed

AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity

AF Assist

Focus Area

Focus Area Limit

Switch V/H AF Area

Focus Area Color

AF Area Registration

Focus Area Del. Regist. AF Area

AF Area Auto Clear

AF-C Area Display

Phase Detect. Area

Circ. of Focus Point

AF Frame Move Amt

Subject Recog in AF

Recognition Target

Recog Trgt Select Set

Right/Left Eye Select

Subject Recognition
Sbj Recog Frm Disp.

Sbj Recog Frm Disp.

Face Memory

Regist. Face Priority

99
 Groups Menu items

Focus Map

Auto Magnifier in MF

Focus Magnifier

Focus Assistant Focus Magnif. Time

Initial Focus Mag.

AF in Focus Mag.

Initial Focus Mag.

Peaking Display

Peaking Display Peaking Level

Peaking Color

(Playback) tab

Groups Menu items

Playback Filter Condition

Playback Target
Image Order

Enlarge Image

Magnification Enlarge Initial Mag.

Enlarge Initial Position

Protect

Selection/Memo Rating

Rating Set(Custom Key)

Delete

Delete Delete pressing twice

Delete confirm.

Crop

Rotate

Photo Capture
Edit
Create Still Image

after still img crt

JPEG/HEIF Switch

100
 Groups Menu items

Cont. Play for Interval

Viewing Play Speed for Interval

Slide Show

Image Index

Display as Group

Display Rotation

Focus Frame Display

Playback Option
Aspect Marker Disp.

Disp Specified Time Img.

Select Image Jump Dial

Image Jump Method

(Network) tab

Groups Menu items

Smartphone Connection

Remote Shoot Function

Select on Cam & Send

Cnct./Remote Sht.
Reset Transfer Status

Cnct. while Power OFF

Remote Shoot Setting

Network Streaming
Streaming
USB Streaming

Cloud Connection
Creators' Cloud
Cloud Information

Wi-Fi Connect

WPS Push

Access Point Set.

Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi Frequency Band *

Display Wi-Fi Info.

SSID/PW Reset

101
 Groups Menu items

Bluetooth Function

Pairing

Bluetooth Manage Paired Device

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

Disp Device Address

IP Address Setting
Wired LAN
Display Wired LAN Info.

USB-LAN Connection

USB-LAN Disconnection
USB-LAN/Tethering
Tethering Connection

Tethering Disconnection

Airplane Mode

Edit Device Name

Import Root Certificate

Network Option Access Authen. Settings

Access Authen. Info

Wi-Fi Direct Settings

Reset Network Set.

* For some models only

(Setup) tab

Groups Menu items

Language

Area/Date Area/Date/Time Setting

NTSC/PAL Selector

Setting Reset
Reset/Save Settings
Save/Load Settings

102
 Groups Menu items

Custom Key/Dial Set.

Custom Key/Dial Set.

Custom Key Setting

Fn Menu Settings

Operation Customize Different Set for Still/Mv

DISP (Screen Disp) Set

REC w/ Shutter

with Shutter Button

Zoom Ring Rotate

Custom Key/Dial Set.

Custom Key/Dial Set.

My Dial Settings
Dial Customize
Av/Tv Rotate

Function Ring(Lens)

Dial / Wheel Lock

Touch Operation

Shooting Screen
Touch Operation
Playback Screen

Menu Screen

Accessibility * Screen Reader

Monitor Brightness

Display Quality
Monitor
Monitor Flip Direction

Vertical Display

TC/UB Disp. Setting

Gamma Display Assist

Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.

Display Option
Display LUT

Auto Review

Shoot Mode Sel. Screen

103
 Groups Menu items

Auto Monitor OFF

Power Save Start Time

Power Setting Option
Power Save by Monitor

Auto Power OFF Temp.

Volume Settings

Sound Option 4ch Audio Monitoring

Audio signals

USB Connection Mode

USB USB LUN Setting

USB Power Supply

HDMI Resolution

HDMI Output Settings

External Output
HDMI Info. Display

CTRL FOR HDMI

Video Light Mode

REC Lamp

Sensor Cleaning

Pixel Mapping
Setup Option
Version

Display Serial Number

Privacy Notice

Certification Logo *

* For some models only

(My Menu) tab

Groups Menu items

Add Item

Sort Item

Delete Item
My Menu Setting
Delete Page

Delete All

Display From My Menu

104
Note
The order in which the menu tabs are listed here differs from the actual display.

TP1001271178

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

105
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Contents of this chapter

The following table of contents lists the features described in this chapter (“Using the shooting functions”). From each
item name, you can jump to the page describing the respective functions.

Selecting a shooting mode

Shoot Mode (still image)/Shoot Mode (movie)/Shoot Mode (S&Q/time-lapse)
Shoot Mode: Intelligent Auto
Shoot Mode: Scene Selection
Adjusting images in the auto mode (My Image Style)
Shoot Mode: Program Auto
Shoot Mode: Aperture Priority
Shoot Mode: Shutter Priority
Shoot Mode: Manual Exposure

Convenient functions for shooting self-portrait videos and vlogs

Product Showcase Set
Background Defocus
Defocus Level Set
Cinematic Vlog Set.
Self-timer (movie)
Auto Framing Settings
Framing Stabilizer

Focusing
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Tracking subject (Tracking function)
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)

Subject Recognition
Focusing using subject recognition functions
Subject Recog in AF (still image/movie)
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Recog Trgt Select Set (still image/movie)
Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)
Sbj Recog Frm Disp. (still image)
Sbj Recog Frm Disp. (movie)
Face Memory (still image/movie)
Regist. Face Priority (still image/movie)
Selecting a person to track (Select Face to Track)

Using focusing functions

Focus Standard
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)
Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)
Focus Area Limit (still image/movie)

106
 Circ. of Focus Point (still image/movie)
AF Frame Move Amt (still image/movie)
Focus Area Color (still image/movie)
AF Area Auto Clear
AF-C Area Display
Phase Detect. Area
AF Tracking Sensitivity
AF Transition Speed
AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity
AF Assist
AF/MF Selector
AF w/ Shutter
AF On
Focus Hold
Pre-AF
Priority Set in AF-S
Priority Set in AF-C
Aperture Drive in AF
AF in Focus Mag.
Auto Magnifier in MF
Focus Magnifier
Focus Magnif. Time (still image/movie)
Initial Focus Mag. (movie)
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
Focus Map
Peaking Display
Adjusting the exposure/metering modes
Exposure Comp. (still image/movie)
Histogram display
Exposure step (still image/movie)
Exposure Std. Adjust (still image/movie)
D-Range Optimizer (still image/movie)
Metering Mode (still image/movie)
Face Priority in Multi Metering (still image/movie)
Spot Metering Point (still image/movie)
AE lock
AEL w/ Shutter
Auto Slow Shutter
Zebra Display

Selecting the ISO sensitivity

ISO (still image/movie)
ISO Range Limit (still image/movie)
ISO AUTO Min. SS

White balance
White Balance (still image/movie)
Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)
Priority Set in AWB (still image/movie)
Shutter AWB Lock
Shockless WB

Log shooting settings

Log shooting
Log Shooting Setting
Select LUT

107
 Manage User LUTs
Display LUT
Adding effects to images
Creative Look (still image/movie)
Picture Profile (still image/movie)
Soft Skin Effect (still image/movie)

Shooting with drive modes (continuous shooting/self-timer)

Drive Mode
Cont. Shooting
Self-timer(Single)
Self-timer(Cont)
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
Indicator during bracket shooting
Focus Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
Bracket Settings

Self-timer (movie)

Interval Shoot Func.

Setting the image quality and recording format

File Format (still image)
RAW File Type
JPEG/HEIF Switch
JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality
JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size
Aspect Ratio
HLG Still Image
Color Space
File Format (movie)
Movie Settings (movie)
S&Q Settings
Time-lapse Settings
Proxy Settings
APS-C S35 (Super 35mm) Shooting (still image/movie)
Angle of view

Using touch functions

Touch Operation
Shooting Screen
Playback Screen
Menu Screen
Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)
Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)
Shooting with touch operations (Touch Shutter)
Adjusting the exposure with touch operations (Touch AE)

Shutter settings
Silent Mode Settings (still image/movie)
Release w/o Lens (still image/movie)
Release w/o Card

108
 Anti-flicker Set.
Using the zoom
The zoom features available with this product
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom
Zoom Range (still image/movie)
Zoom Lever Speed (still image/movie)
Custom Key Z. Speed (still image/movie)
Remote Zoom Speed (still image/movie)
Step Zoom Magnif. (still image/movie)
About zoom scale
Zoom Ring Rotate

Using the flash

Using flash (sold separately)
Flash Mode
Flash Comp.
Exp.comp.set
Wireless Flash
Red Eye Reduction
FEL lock
External Flash Set.

Reducing blur
SteadyShot (still image)
SteadyShot (movie)
SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)
SteadyShot focal length (still image/movie)
Framing Stabilizer

Lens Compensation (still image/movie)

Noise reduction
High ISO NR

Setting the monitor display during shooting

Shoot Mode Sel. Screen
Auto Review (still image)
Grid Line Display (still image/movie)
Grid Line Type (still image/movie)
Live View Display Set.
Aperture Preview
Shot. Result Preview
Bright Monitoring
Emphasized REC Display
Marker Display (still image)
Marker Display (movie)
Gamma Display Assist
Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.

Recording movie audio

Audio Recording
Audio Rec Level
Audio Out Timing
Wind Noise Reduct.
Microphone Directivity

109
 Mic Direct Select Setting
Shoe Audio Set.
Creating still images while recording a movie
Automatic creation of still images from Shot Marks
Shot Marks after still image creation (shooting)

TC/UB settings
TC/UB
TC/UB Disp. Setting

Livestreaming video and audio

Network Streaming (movie)
USB Streaming (movie)

TP1001271175

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

110
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Shoot Mode (still image)/Shoot Mode (movie)/Shoot Mode (S&Q/time-lapse)

You can set the shooting mode according to the subject you want to shoot or the function you want to adjust.

1 Set the Still/Movie/S&Q switch to the desired shooting mode.

If S&Q (slow-motion/quick-motion) is selected and [Shoot Mode Sel. Screen] is set to [Display], the [
Shoot Mode] screen in Step 2 will be displayed at this point.

2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot

Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Intelligent Auto:
The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition.
Program Auto:
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority:
You can shoot by adjusting the aperture and changing the range in focus, or by defocusing the background.
Shutter Priority:
By adjusting the shutter speed, you can shoot still images with different effects for moving objects, or record movies with
natural movement.
Manual Exposure:
You can shoot with the desired exposure setting by adjusting both the shutter speed and aperture.
Cam.Set:
Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered in advance.
Scene Selection (only when shooting still images):
Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene.

Related Topic
Shoot Mode: Intelligent Auto
Shoot Mode: Program Auto
Shoot Mode: Aperture Priority
Shoot Mode: Shutter Priority
Shoot Mode: Manual Exposure
Recalling registered shooting settings (Cam.Set)
Shoot Mode: Scene Selection

TP1001271185

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

111
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Shoot Mode: Intelligent Auto

The camera shoots images with automatically adjusted settings.

1 Set the Still/Movie/S&Q switch to the desired shooting mode.

If S&Q (slow-motion/quick-motion) is selected and [Shoot Mode Sel. Screen] is set to [Display], the [
Shoot Mode] screen in Step 2 will be displayed at this point.

2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot

Mode] → [Intelligent Auto].

3 Point the camera at the subject.

When the camera recognized the scene, the icon for the recognized scene appears on the screen.

4 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

About Scene Recognition

The Scene Recognition function allows the camera to automatically recognize shooting conditions.
When the camera recognizes certain scenes, the following icons and guides are displayed at the top of the screen:

(Portrait)
(Infant)
(Night Portrait)
(Night Scene)
(Backlight Portrait)
(Backlight)
(Landscape)
(Macro)
(Spotlight)
(Low Light)
(Night Scene using a tripod)
(Tripod)*

* Only an icon is displayed.

To adjust the image brightness, color tone, etc. ( My Image Style)

Swipe the monitor left or right to display the touch function icons on the shooting screen, and touch (image
adjustment). You can set (Background Defocus), (Brightness), (Color), and [ Creative Look] to your
preferences. Touch each icon at the bottom of the screen to set each item.
For details, refer to “ Adjusting images in the auto mode (My Image Style) .”

Note
112
 The product will not recognize the scene when you shoot still images with zoom functions other than optical zoom.

The product may not properly recognize the scene under certain shooting conditions.

In the [Intelligent Auto] mode, when the camera recognizes multiple people, it changes the aperture so that the recognized faces
can be captured clearly. However, depending on the shooting conditions, not all recognized faces may be captured clearly. This
function does not work in the following cases.
When shooting still images
When the [Background Defocus] button is pressed
When [ Subject Recog in AF] is set to [Off]
When [ Recognition Target] is other than [Human]

Related Topic
Touch function icons
Adjusting images in the auto mode (My Image Style)
Creative Look (still image/movie)

TP1001268932

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

113
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Shoot Mode: Scene Selection

Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene.

1 Set the Still/Movie/S&Q switch to (Still) to select the still image shooting mode.

2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode] → [Scene Selection].

3 Select the desired mode in scene selection.

Menu item details

Portrait:
Blurs background and sharpens the subject. Accentuates the skin tones softly.

Sports Action:
Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still. The product shoots
images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.

Macro:
Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.

Landscape:
Shoots the entire range of a scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors.

114
 Sunset:
Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.

Night Scene:
Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere.

Night Portrait:
Shoots night scene portraits using the flash (sold separately).

To adjust the image brightness, color tone, etc. ( My Image Style)

Swipe the monitor left or right to display the touch function icons on the shooting screen, and touch (image
adjustment). You can set (Background Defocus), (Brightness), (Color), and [ Creative Look] to your
preferences. Touch each icon at the bottom of the screen to set each item.
For details, refer to “ Adjusting images in the auto mode (My Image Style) .”

Related Topic
Touch function icons
Adjusting images in the auto mode (My Image Style)
Creative Look (still image/movie)

TP1001271275

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

115
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Adjusting images in the auto mode (My Image Style)

You can adjust the amount of background defocus, the brightness and the color tone of the image, and select the finish of
the image in the [Intelligent Auto] or [Scene Selection] mode using the touch function icons on the screen.
Set the camera as follows beforehand.

[Touch Operation]: [On]

[Shooting Screen]:
Set [Shooting Screen] to [On].
Set [Footer Icon Touch] to [On].

1 Touch (image adjustment) icon on the shooting screen in the [Intelligent Auto] or [Scene Selection]
mode.

Image adjustment is enabled.

To adjust images to your preferences, you need to display the touch function icons on the screen in advance. If
the icons are not displayed, swipe the screen to the left or right to display them.

For details, refer to “Touch function icons.”

2 Set (Background Defocus), (Brightness), (Color), and [ Creative Look] in the footer (bottom
of the screen) to the desired values.

Touch [AUTO] or press the (delete) button to return to the camera’s automatic settings.

3 Shoot an image.

The adjusted values can be reset by touching the (image adjustment) icon. The original shooting settings for
[Intelligent Auto] or [Scene Selection] will be applied.

Details of the image adjustment screen

1. (image adjustment) icon

2. RESET: Resets all changes.
3. Background Defocus: Sets a value from [Defocused] to [Clear] using the slider.
4. Brightness: Sets a value from [Dark] to [Bright] using the slider.
5. Color: Sets a value from [Cool] to [Warm] using the slider.
6. Creative Look: Selects [Auto], ST, PT, NT, VV, VV2, FL, IN, SH, BW, or SE.

Note

116
 Image adjustments are not reflected when you change the shooting mode or when you start recording movies in the still image
mode. In addition, settings that were adjusted prior to that point will be reset.

In the [Intelligent Auto] mode, the scene recognition function is locked when you start image adjustment and the shooting mode
icon changes to / / (During image adjustment). The recognized scene will not be updated even if the shooting
environment changes during image adjustment.

When [Cinematic Vlog Set.] is set to [On], (Color) and [ Creative Look] cannot be adjusted.

If you touch the screen while the touch AE function is enabled, the (Brightness) setting will be temporarily disabled, and the
exposure will be set according to the brightness of the touched area.

Related Topic
Touch Operation
Shooting Screen
Touch function icons
Shoot Mode: Intelligent Auto
Shoot Mode: Scene Selection
Creative Look (still image/movie)

TP1001271277

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

117
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Shoot Mode: Program Auto

Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
You can set shooting functions such as [ ISO].

1 Set the Still/Movie/S&Q switch to the desired shooting mode.

If S&Q (slow-motion/quick-motion) is selected and [Shoot Mode Sel. Screen] is set to [Display], the [
Shoot Mode] screen in Step 2 will be displayed at this point.

2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot

Mode] → [Program Auto].

3 Set the shooting functions to your desired settings.

4 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

Program Shift (only during still image shooting)

When you are not using a flash, you can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination without changing
the appropriate exposure set by the camera.
Turn the control dial to select the aperture value and shutter speed combination.

“P” on the screen changes to “P*” when you turn the control dial.
To cancel program shift, set the shooting mode to other than [Program Auto], or turn off the camera.
If [Footer Icon Touch] under [Shooting Screen] is set to [On], you can also perform program shift by touching the
shutter speed and aperture display area at the bottom of the screen.

Note
According to the brightness of the environment, the program shift may not be used.

Set the shooting mode to another one than “P” or turn off the power to cancel the setting you made.

When the brightness changes, the aperture (F-value) and shutter speed also change while maintaining the shift amount.

TP1001268933

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

118
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Shoot Mode: Aperture Priority

You can shoot by adjusting the aperture and changing the range in focus, or by defocusing the background.

1 Set the Still/Movie/S&Q switch to the desired shooting mode.

If S&Q (slow-motion/quick-motion) is selected and [Shoot Mode Sel. Screen] is set to [Display], the [
Shoot Mode] screen in Step 2 will be displayed at this point.

2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot

Mode] → [Aperture Priority].

3 Select the desired value by turning the control dial.

Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond the subject are blurred.
Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in focus.
If the aperture value you have set is not suitable for appropriate exposure, the shutter speed on the shooting
screen will blink. If this happens, change the aperture value.

4 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

The shutter speed is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.

Note
The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.

Related Topic
Aperture Preview

TP1001268934

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

119
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Shoot Mode: Shutter Priority

By adjusting the shutter speed, you can shoot still images with different effects for moving objects, or record movies with
natural movement.

1 Set the Still/Movie/S&Q switch to the desired shooting mode.

If S&Q (slow-motion/quick-motion) is selected and [Shoot Mode Sel. Screen] is set to [Display], the [
Shoot Mode] screen in Step 2 will be displayed at this point.

2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot

Mode] → [Shutter Priority].

3 Select the desired value by turning the control dial.

If proper exposure cannot be obtained after setup, the aperture value on the shooting screen blinks. If this
happens, change the shutter speed.

4 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.

Hint
Use a tripod to prevent camera-shake when you have selected a slow shutter speed.

When you shoot indoor sports scenes, set the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

Note
The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in [Shutter Priority] mode.

The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.

TP1001268936

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

120
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Shoot Mode: Manual Exposure

You can shoot with the desired exposure setting by adjusting both the shutter speed and aperture.

1 Set the Still/Movie/S&Q switch to the desired shooting mode.

If S&Q (slow-motion/quick-motion) is selected and [Shoot Mode Sel. Screen] is set to [Display], the [
Shoot Mode] screen in Step 2 will be displayed at this point.

2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot

Mode] → [Manual Exposure].

3 Select the desired shutter speed by turning the control wheel.

Select the desired aperture value by turning the control dial.

You can set which dial changes the aperture value and shutter speed with [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [
Custom Key/Dial Set.].
You can also set [ ISO] to [ISO AUTO] in manual exposure mode. The ISO value automatically changes to
achieve the appropriate exposure using the aperture value and shutter speed you have set.
When [ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO], the ISO value indicator will blink if the value you have set is not suitable for
appropriate exposure. If this happens, change the shutter speed or aperture value.
When [ ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO], use MM (Metered Manual)* to check the exposure value.
Toward +: Images become brighter.
Toward -: Images become darker.
0: Appropriate exposure analyzed by the camera.
* Indicates under/over for appropriate exposure.

4 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

Hint
You can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination without changing the set exposure value (Manual shift).
Assign [AEL hold] or [AEL toggle] to a desired key using the custom key settings, and then turn the control dial while pressing that
key.

Note
The Metered Manual indicator does not appear when [ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].

When the amount of ambient light exceeds the metering range of the Metered Manual, the Metered Manual indicator flashes.

The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in manual exposure mode.

The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.

Related Topic
121
ISO (still image/movie)

TP1001268967

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

122
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Product Showcase Set

The camera settings are optimally configured for situations such as movie shooting for product reviews. The camera
tends to focus on objects that are closer to it.

1 Press (Product Showcase Set) button to switch the [Product Showcase Set] function on or off.

You can also switch the [Product Showcase Set] function on or off by selecting MENU → (Shooting) →
[Shooting Option].

Menu item details

On:
Shoots with optimal settings for product reviews. [ Subject Recog in AF] under [Subject Recognition] is locked to [Off],
and [ Focus Area] is set to [Zone].
Off:
Shoots in the ordinary shooting mode.

Note
Settings for [Product Showcase Set] cannot be changed during movie recording.

When [Auto Framing] under [Auto Framing Settings] is set to [On], the foremost subject within the entire angle of view before
being cropped by the auto-framing function is in focus. Before shooting, make sure that the intended subject is in focus.

TP1001268909

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

123
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Background Defocus

You can change the level of defocus in the background simply by pressing the button while shooting still images or
movies.

1 Press the (Background Defocus) button repeatedly.

Once you press the button, the [Background Defocus] mode is activated, and the background becomes defocused.
Afterwards, the level of defocus in the background switches between “Defocus” and “Clear” each time you press the
button.
The camera returns to the normal shooting mode and the aperture returns to the former value when you press
the MENU button.

Hint
The aperture value becomes locked and the icon (Defocus) or (Clear) is indicated instead of the aperture value in the
[Background Defocus] mode.

You can set the amount of background defocus when (Defocus) is indicated using [ Defocus Level Set].

Note
[Background Defocus] mode is canceled, the camera returns to normal shooting mode, and the aperture returns to the former
value when you perform the following operations:
Turning the power off and back on again
Operating the Still/Movie/S&Q switch
Pressing the MENU button
Changing the aperture value while the shooting mode is set to [Aperture Priority] or [Manual Exposure]
Exposure Comp.
Performing Program Shift or Manual Shift

Even if you press the button, you cannot change the level of defocus while using [Focus Magnifier] in the [Background Defocus]
mode.

Depending on the shooting mode and shooting conditions, the camera may be unable to obtain the optimal exposure due to the
locking of the aperture value in the [Background Defocus] mode.

Related Topic
Defocus Level Set

TP1001268908

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

124
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Defocus Level Set

You can set the level of background defocus when using [Background Defocus].

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Option] → [ Defocus Level Set].

2 Adjust the level of defocus by moving the slider using the control wheel, and then select [OK].

Note
The level of [ Defocus Level Set] is reset when the lens is exchanged.

Related Topic
Background Defocus

TP1001271274

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

125
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Cinematic Vlog Set.

You can easily shoot cinematic images. When [Cinematic Vlog Set.] is set to [On], black bars are added at the top and
bottom of the image, and the frame rate is locked to 24 fps.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Option] → [Cinematic Vlog Set.] → desired setting.

When [On] is selected, you can configure detailed settings for the effect by pressing the right side of the control
wheel.

Menu item details

On:
Shoots images using the cinematic vlog effect. You can configure detailed settings for [Look]/[Mood]/[AF Transition
Speed].
Off:
Does not use the cinematic vlog effect.

Settings for cinematic vlog

[Look], [Mood], and [AF Transition Speed] can be set according to the image to be shot.

When making settings for the cinematic vlog function from MENU

(A): Look
(B): Mood
(C): AF Transition Speed

When making settings for the cinematic vlog function from the shooting screen (touch function icons)

126
(A): Look
(B): Mood
(C): AF Transition Speed
(D): Close icon

Touch the Close icon to hide the [Look], [Mood], and [AF Transition Speed] submenus. After hiding them, you can
redisplay the submenus by holding down the (Cinematic Vlog) icon.

Look:
Select the finish of images from presets with varied contrast, saturation, etc. or from user LUTs in which you have
registered settings.

S-Cinetone:
Creates an image with a cinematic look.
CLEAN:
Creates images with a refreshing look.
CHIC:
Creates images with a profound look.
FRESH:
Creates images with a colorful look.
MONO:
Creates images with a black and white look.
User1–User16 *:
Creates images with the look of the set User LUT.
Once you have registered the desired LUT by selecting MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [Manage
User LUTs], that LUT is selectable under [Look].

* When the camera’s system software (firmware) version is Ver.2.00 or later

Mood:
Select the color tone of the image from presets according to the color you want to emphasize. [Mood] cannot be selected
when [Look] is set to [MONO].

AUTO:
Creates images with colors optimal for the environment.
GOLD:
Creates images with warm colors.
OCEAN:
Creates images with cool colors.
FOREST:
Creates images with nostalgic colors.

127
AF Transition Speed:
Sets the focusing speed when the target of the auto focus is switched or moving.

HI:
Sets a fast switching speed of focusing to focus on the subject rapidly.
MID:
Sets a normal switching speed of focusing.
LO:
Sets a slow switching speed of focusing to focus on the subject smoothly.

Hint
By shooting images with the same [Look] and [Mood] throughout the work, you can create a sense of unity in your work.

Note
The black bars at the top and bottom of the screen are recorded as part of the image. The image area excluding the black bars at
the top and bottom of the screen has the aspect ratio of the cinema scope size, but the aspect ratio of the recorded image is 16:9.

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K] and the S&Q (slow-motion/quick-motion) shooting mode is selected, the
[Cinematic Vlog Set.] setting is not reflected in the movie.

When [Cinematic Vlog Set.] is set to [On], [AF Transition Speed] under [AF/MF] becomes temporarily invalid.

When [Cinematic Vlog Set.] is set to [On], [ White Balance] becomes locked to [Auto], and the color tone changes according to
the setting for [Mood].

If you press the MOVIE (movie) button in the still image shooting mode to record a movie, the [Cinematic Vlog Set.] setting will
not be reflected in the movie.

Related Topic
Manage User LUTs

TP1001271273

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

128
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Self-timer (movie)

You can start shooting with the self-timer when recording a movie.

1 Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel.

The [ Self-timer] setting screen will be displayed.

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Option] → [ Self-
timer].

2 Select [On] using the control wheel and set the desired countdown time.

Rec Start delay: Sets the count time until the start of movie recording. (3 s/5 s/10 s)

Repetition: Sets whether to repeat the movie self-timer. (Repeat/Only Once)

If you select [Repeat], the movie self-timer will be activated repeatedly even after movie recording is completed.
If you select [Only Once], the movie self-timer will be canceled after movie recording is completed, and the
camera will return to the normal movie recording standby mode.

3 Adjust the focus and press the MOVIE (movie) button.

When the countdown appears on the recording standby screen, the self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and
recording starts after the designated number of seconds has elapsed.
Press the MOVIE button again to end recording.

Menu item details

On:
Uses the movie self-timer function.
Off:
Does not use the movie self-timer function.

Hint
To stop the self-timer countdown, press the MOVIE button again or press the button to which the [ Self-timer] function is
assigned.

Note
If you press the MOVIE button in the still image shooting mode to start movie recording, [ Self-timer] will not work.

TP1001268935

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

129
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Auto Framing Settings

During movie recording or streaming, the camera automatically changes the composition by following the recognized
subject and cropping so that even if the camera is fixed, you can shoot with camera-work (auto-framed shooting).
You can set the timing to start shooting with [Auto Framing], the size of the subject on the screen, etc.
This function cannot be used during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting or time-lapse shooting.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Option] → [Auto Framing Settings] → [Auto Framing] → [On].

2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Option] → [Auto Framing Settings] → Select an item to set, and
then select the desired setting.

3 Start shooting or streaming.

A cropping frame is displayed on the monitor screen and follows the movement of the subject.
When [Touch Operation] is set to [On], you can select the subject of automatic framing using touch operations.

Menu item details

Auto Framing:
Sets whether to automatically frame shooting. When [On] is selected, the composition is automatically set so that the
recognized person or touch-tracked subject is in the center of the screen. ([On]/[Off])
Framing Oper. Mode:
Sets the start method and operating method for [Auto Framing].
Start When Tracking : Auto-framing starts at the same time as tracking starts with touch tracking, etc.
Auto Start : Auto-framing starts when the subject is recognized.
Auto Start(15s swtc) : When the subject is recognized, the camera repeats camera-work that smoothly switches
between the cropped angle of view and the full angle of view at 15-second intervals.
Auto Start(30s swtc) : When the subject is recognized, the camera repeats camera-work that smoothly switches
between the cropped angle of view and the full angle of view at 30-second intervals.

Crop Level:
Sets the displayed size of the subject within the cropped frame after recognizing the subject. ([Large crop level]/[Medium
crop level]/[Small crop level])
When [ Recognition Target] is set to [Human], the cropped frame size changes dynamically according to the
recognition frame. If [ Recognition Target] is set to an item other than [Human], the cropped frame size will be locked.

130
Framing Tracking Speed:
Sets the subject tracking speed for camera-work. (1 to 5)
Movie Rec/Streaming:
Sets whether the images recorded on the memory card and the images output via streaming are auto-framed images or
full-angle images. ([Crop]/[Do not crop])
When [Crop] is selected, auto-framed images are recorded or streamed.
HDMI Output:
Sets whether the images output to HDMI are auto-framed images or full-angle images. ([Crop]/[Do not crop])
When [Crop] is selected, auto-framed images are output.
Hint
The auto-framing function performs camera-work by cropping the 4K-resolution image. When using the auto-framing function, it is
recommended that you set [ File Format] to HD image quality in order to prevent deterioration of image quality.

When setting the shutter speed manually and shooting with auto framing, it is recommended that you set a faster shutter speed to
reduce blurring of the subject.

When [ Focus Area] is set to [Wide], the subject is recognized and framed. When it is set to [Spot], framing is performed
around the spot frame. You can also change the cropping position by moving the spot frame during shooting.

By using the smartphone application Creators' App, you can check the framing status and perform touch operations even at a
distance from the camera.
For details on how to use Creators' App, refer to the following support page.
https://www.sony.net/ca/help/opr/

Note
Auto-framing is available only in the movie recording mode.

Even when [Auto Framing] is set to [On], the monitor always displays image in the full angle of view, and a frame indicating the
cropping area is displayed during auto-framed shooting.

If there are multiple recognized subjects, only the subject with the highest priority will be targeted.

When [Product Showcase Set] is set to [On], subjects outside the area cropped by the auto-framing function may come into
focus.

TP1001271272

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

131
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Framing Stabilizer

The camera automatically corrects the composition so that the subject being tracked is kept at the same position in the
composition, allowing you to record movies with the position of the subject stable.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [Framing Stabilizer] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
[Framing Stabilizer] is enabled.
Selects [On: Center], which locks the composition so that the subject being tracked is in the center, or [On: Manual],
which requires you to manually set the position to which the subject being tracked is locked.

When [On: Manual] is selected, you can lock/unlock the position of the subject by touching (composition lock
icon) on the screen or pressing the center of the control wheel.

Off:
[Framing Stabilizer] is disabled.

Hint
When the subject is moving, keeping the camera aimed at the subject while shooting will make it easier to correct the
composition.

With [Framing Stabilizer], the angle of view becomes narrower because cropping is performed using images in 4K resolution.

To avoid deterioration of the image quality, it is recommended that you set [ File Format] to HD image quality when using
[Framing Stabilizer].

Note
The camera may focus on a subject outside the area cropped with [Framing Stabilizer].

It may not be possible to correct the composition depending on the movement of the subject.

TP1001271268

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

132
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)

Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [ Focus Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Single-shot AF:
The product locks the focus once focusing is complete. Use this when the subject is motionless.

Automatic AF:
[Single-shot AF] and [Continuous AF] are switched according to the movement of the subject. When the shutter button is
pressed halfway down, the product locks the focus when it determines that the subject is motionless, or continues to
focus when the subject is in motion. During continuous shooting, the product automatically shoots with [Continuous AF]
from the second shot.

Continuous AF:
The product continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down. Use this when the subject is in
motion. In [Continuous AF] mode, there is no beep when the camera focuses.

DMF:
You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than
when using [Manual Focus] from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.

Manual Focus:
Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on the intended subject using auto focus, use [Manual Focus].

Focus indicator
(lit):
The subject is in focus and the focus is locked.
(flashing):
The subject is not in focus.
(lit):
The subject is in focus. The focus will be adjusted continuously according to the movements of the subject.
(lit):
Focusing is in progress.

Subjects on which it is difficult to focus using auto focus

Dark and distant subjects
Subjects with poor contrast
Subjects seen through glass
Fast-moving subjects
Reflective light or shiny surfaces
Flashing light
133
 Back-lit subjects
Continuously repetitive patterns, such as the facades of buildings
Subjects in the focusing area with different focal distances
Hint
In [Continuous AF] mode, you can lock the focus by pressing and holding the button that has been assigned the [Focus Hold]
function.

When you set the focus to infinity in [Manual Focus] mode or [DMF] mode, make sure that the focus is on a sufficiently distant
subject by checking the monitor.

Note
[Automatic AF] is available only when you are using a lens that supports phase detection AF.

When [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] is set, the angle of view may change little by little while focusing.

Only [Continuous AF] and [Manual Focus] are available when shooting movies or when the Still/Movie/S&Q switch is set to
(Movie) or S&Q (S&Q Motion).

Related Topic
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Manual Focus
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001257076

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

134
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

Set the type of focusing frame when shooting with the auto focus. Select the mode according to the subject.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ Focus Area] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Wide:
Focuses on a subject covering the whole range of the screen automatically. When you press the shutter button halfway
down in the still image shooting mode, a green frame is displayed around the area that is in focus.

Zone:
Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus area.

Center Fix:
Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the image. Use together with the focus-lock function to create the
composition you want.

Spot: S/Spot: M/Spot: L:

Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a
narrow area.

Expand Spot:
If the product cannot focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the [Spot] as a secondary priority area
for focusing.

Tracking:
This setting is available only when the [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF]. When the shutter button is pressed
and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. Point the cursor at [Tracking]
on the [ Focus Area] setting screen, and then select the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the
control wheel. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a [Tracking:
Zone], [Tracking: Spot S]/[Tracking: Spot M]/[Tracking: Spot L] or [Tracking: Expand Spot].

Note
[ Focus Area] is locked to [Wide] in the following situations:
[Scene Selection]

The focus area may not light up during continuous shooting or when the shutter button is pressed all the way down at once.

When the shooting mode is set to [Movie] or [S&Q Motion] or during movie shooting, [Tracking] cannot be selected for [ Focus
Area].

When the Still/Movie/S&Q switch is set to (Movie) or S&Q (S&Q Motion) or during movie shooting, [Tracking] cannot be
selected for [ Focus Area].

135
Examples of the focusing frame display
The focusing frame differs as follows.

When focusing on a larger area

When focusing on a smaller area

When [ Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], the focusing frame may switch between “When focusing on a larger
area” and “When focusing on a smaller area” depending on the subject or situation.
When you attach an A-mount lens with a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA3 or LA-EA5) (sold separately), the focusing frame for
“When focusing on a smaller area” may be displayed.

When focus is achieved automatically based on the whole range of the monitor

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom in the still image shooting mode, the [ Focus Area]
setting is disabled and the focusing frame is shown by the dotted line. The AF operates with priority on and around
the center area.

To move the focus area

When [ Focus Area] is set to [Zone], [Spot] or [Expand Spot], if pressing the button to which [Focus Standard] is
assigned, you can shoot while moving the focusing frame using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel. To
return the focusing frame to the center of the monitor, press the (Delete) button while moving the frame. To
change the shooting settings using the control wheel, press the button to which [Focus Standard] is assigned.

Hint

136
 When [ Focus Area] is set to [Spot] or [Expand Spot], you can move the focusing frame over a greater distance at a time by
setting [ AF Frame Move Amt] to [Large].

You can move the focusing frame quickly by touching and dragging it on the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On], and set
[Touch Func. in Shooting] under [Shooting Screen] to [Touch Focus] beforehand.

Note
You cannot execute functions assigned to the control wheel or the (Product Showcase Set) button while moving the focusing
frame.

To track the subject temporarily when shooting still images and movies (Tracking On)
You can temporarily change the setting for [ Focus Area] to [Tracking] while pressing and holding down the custom
key to which you have assigned [Tracking On] with [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] in advance.
The [ Focus Area] setting before you activated [Tracking On] will switch to the equivalent [Tracking] setting.
For example:

[ Focus Area] before you activate [Tracking On] [ Focus Area] while [Tracking On] is active

[Wide] [Tracking: Wide]

[Spot: S] [Tracking: Spot S]

[Expand Spot] [Tracking: Expand Spot]

Phase detection AF
When there are phase detection AF points within the auto focus area, the product uses the combined autofocus of the
phase detection AF and contrast AF.

Note
Phase detection AF is available only when a compatible lens is attached. If you use a lens that does not support phase detection
AF, you cannot use the following functions.

[Automatic AF]
[AF Tracking Sensitivity]
[AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity]
[AF Transition Speed]

Also, even if you use a previously purchased applicable lens, the phase detection AF might not function unless you update the
lens.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Touch Operation
Shooting Screen
Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)

TP1001248263

137
5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

138
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Tracking subject (Tracking function)

This camera has the function of tracking which tracks the subject, and keeps marking it with the focusing frame.
You can set the start position to track by selecting from focusing areas, or by specifying by touch operation. The required
function varies depending on the setting method.

You can refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.

Setting the start position to track by focusing area ([Tracking] under [ Focus Area])
The selected focusing frame is set as the start position to track, and the tracking starts by pressing the shutter button
halfway down.

This function is available in still image shooting mode.

This function is available when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].

Setting the start position to track by touch operation ([Touch Tracking] under [Touch Func. in
Shooting])
You can set the subject to track by touching it on the monitor.

This function is available in still image shooting mode and movie shooting mode.
You can use this function for shooting still images when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF], [Automatic AF],
[Continuous AF], or [DMF].
You can use this function for shooting movies when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] or [Manual Focus].

Changing the setting for [ Focus Area] to [Tracking] temporarily ([Tracking On] by Custom Key)
Even [ Focus Area] is set to other than [Tracking], you can temporarily change the setting for [ Focus Area] to
[Tracking] while pressing and holding the key to which you have assigned [Tracking On] function.

Assign the [Tracking On] function to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] in
advance.
This function is available in still image shooting mode and movie shooting mode.
You can use this function for shooting still images when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
You can use this function for shooting movies when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] or [Manual Focus].

Temporarily pausing the tracking function

By pressing the key to which you assigned [Tracking Off on Hold] or [Tracking Off on Toggle] using [ Custom Key/Dial
Set.], you can temporarily pause the tracking function.
Use this function when you are in a shooting situation where it is difficult to keep tracking, or when the tracking frame
switches to another subject.
If you press the key to which you assigned [Track Recog Off on Hold] or [Track Recog Off Toggle] using [ Custom
Key/Dial Set.], [ Subject Recog in AF] will temporarily switch to [Off], suspending tracking of the recognized subject.
Use this function when the tracking frame switches to an unintended subject.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)

139
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001263912

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

140
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Manual Focus

When it is difficult to focus properly in the autofocus mode, you can adjust the focus manually.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [ Focus Mode] → [Manual Focus].

2 Rotate the focusing ring to achieve sharp focus.

When you shoot a still image, you can display the focus distance on the screen by rotating the focusing ring.
The focus distance is not displayed when the Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is attached.

Note
The displayed focus distance is just a reference.

Related Topic
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Auto Magnifier in MF
Focus Magnifier
Peaking Display

TP1001224792

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

141
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Direct manual focus (DMF)

You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than
when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [ Focus Mode] → [DMF].

2 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus automatically.

3 Keep the shutter button pressed halfway down, and then rotate the focusing ring to achieve a sharper
focus.

When you rotate the focusing ring, the focus distance is displayed on the screen.
The focus distance is not displayed when the Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is attached.

4 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot an image.

Related Topic
Manual Focus
Peaking Display

TP1001224793

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

142
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Focusing using subject recognition functions

If you set the subject in advance, the camera will automatically recognize the subject and can focus on the eyes, etc.
when shooting images.
This table describes two methods to focus and shoot using subject recognition. Select the appropriate method according
to your purpose.

Item [ Subject Recog in AF] function [Subject Recognition AF] via a custom key

Assign [Subject Recognition AF] to the desired

Select [ Subject Recog in AF] → [On]. key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [
Advance Select [Human], [Animal/Bird], [Animal], Custom Key/Dial Set.].
preparation [Bird], [Insect], [Car/Train], or [Airplane] Select [Human], [Animal/Bird], [Animal], [Bird],
for [ Recognition Target]. [Insect], [Car/Train], or [Airplane] for [
Recognition Target].

Press the key to which you have assigned the

How to focus Press the shutter button halfway down.*1
[Subject Recognition AF] function.*2

The camera focuses on the eye, head,

body, or entirety of the subject recognized The camera focuses on the recognized subject's
in or around the designated [ Focus eye, head, or body or the entirety of the subject
Area]. anywhere on the screen, regardless of the setting
Function
details If the camera does not recognize any for [ Focus Area].
subjects in or around the designated [ The camera will not perform auto-focusing if no
Focus Area], normal auto-focusing will be subjects are recognized anywhere on the screen.
performed.

Follows the setting designated with [

Focus mode Follows the setting designated with [ Focus Mode]
Focus Mode]

Follows the setting designated with [ The focus area temporarily becomes the entire
Focus area
Focus Area] screen, regardless of the setting for [ Focus Area].

*1 This operation is for focusing when shooting still images. When shooting movies, the camera will focus on the recognized subject, even if you do
not press the shutter button.
*2 Regardless of whether [ Subject Recog in AF] is set to [On] or [Off], if you have assigned [Subject Recognition AF] to a custom key, you can
use [Subject Recognition AF] while you are pressing that custom key.

To focus on the eyes of an animal or a bird

Before shooting, set [ Recognition Target] to [Animal], [Bird], or [Animal/Bird] according to the subject. You can select
[Eye/Head/Body], [Eye/Head], or [Eye] as the desired part to be recognized with priority in the still image shooting mode.

To focus on insects
Before shooting, set [ Recognition Target] to [Insect].

To focus on cars, trains, or airplanes

143
Before shooting, set [ Recognition Target] to [Car/Train] or [Airplane].

Hint
Setting [ Sbj Recog Frm Disp.] to [On] makes it easier to check the detection status of faces or eyes, etc.

[Subject Recognition AF] using a custom key is convenient in the following cases.
When you want to temporarily use [Subject Recognition AF] on the entire screen only while pressing the key, regardless of the [
Focus Area] setting
When you do not want to perform auto-focusing when the camera does not recognize a subject

Positioning the entire subject in the angle of view makes the subject easier to recognize.

Note
It may be difficult to focus on the subject in the following situations:
In low-light or back-lit conditions.
When the subject is in the shade.
When the subject is out of focus.
When the subject is moving too much, etc.

It may be difficult to focus on eyes in the following situations even when the camera recognizes eyes:
When the eyes are closed.
When the eyes are covered by hair, etc.
When the person is wearing sunglasses.

There are also other situations in which it may not be possible to focus on the subjects.

When the camera cannot focus on the part you want to prioritize, such as the eyes of the subject, the camera may automatically
focus on other recognized parts such as the head or body of the subject.

Even when a white subject recognition frame is displayed around the subject's face, etc., the camera may automatically focus on
the part you want to prioritize, such as the subject's eye.

The subject may not be recognized when only a part of the subject is within the angle of view.
When only the hands and feet of a person or animal are visible
When a part of the subject is hidden and cannot be seen, etc.

The camera may accidentally recognize other objects as the designated subject under some conditions.

Related Topic
Subject Recog in AF (still image/movie)
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Recog Trgt Select Set (still image/movie)
Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)
Sbj Recog Frm Disp. (still image)
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

TP1001268984

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

144
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Subject Recog in AF (still image/movie)

Sets whether to recognize and focus on subjects in the focus area when autofocusing.

1 MENU→ (Focus) → [Subject Recognition] → [ Subject Recog in AF] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Focuses on a subject with priority if it has been recognized inside or around the designated focus area.
Off:
Does not recognize subjects when autofocusing.

Hint
By combining the [ Subject Recog in AF] function with [ Focus Area] → [Tracking], you can maintain the focus on a moving
subject.

When [ Subject Recog in AF] is assigned to the desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.],
you can switch the [ Subject Recog in AF] function on or off by pressing the key.

By assigning [Recognition Off on Hold] or [Recog. Off on Toggle] to the desired key with [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can
switch [ Subject Recog in AF] to [Off] temporarily using the key.

Note
If the camera does not recognize the subject specified with [ Recognition Target] in or around the designated focus area, it will
focus on another subject.

Related Topic
Focusing using subject recognition functions
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Recog Trgt Select Set (still image/movie)
Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001268985

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

145
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Recognition Target (still image/movie)

Selects the target to be recognized by the subject recognition function when autofocusing.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Subject Recognition] → [ Recognition Target] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Human:
Recognizes humans as subjects.
Animal/Bird:
Recognizes animals and birds as subjects.
Animal:
Recognizes animals as subjects.
Bird:
Recognizes birds as subjects.
Insect:
Recognizes insects as subjects.
Car/Train:
Recognizes cars and trains as subjects.
Airplane:
Recognizes airplanes as subjects.

Detailed settings for each recognition target

By pressing the right side of the control wheel on the [ Recognition Target] screen, you can make detailed settings for
each recognition target. Functions other than [Recognition Priority Set.] can only be set in the still image shooting mode.

Tracking Shift Range *1 *5:

Sets the range for recognizing the subjects. Narrowing the range makes the camera shift the focus to a recognized
subject only when the subject is close to the tracking frame. Widening the range makes the camera shift the focus to a
recognized subject even when the subject is distant from the tracking frame. ([1(Narrow)] to [5(Wide)])
Tracking Persistence Lvl *2 *5:
Sets the sensitivity for whether to continue tracking around the subject or shift the focus to another subject that is closer
in shooting distance when a recognized subject is lost.
When set to [5(Locked On)], even under conditions where a recognized subject is lost, such as when the subject that you
want to shoot is temporarily hidden by another object, the camera continues to track the area around the subject.
When set to [1(Not Locked On)], under conditions where the camera cannot continue to track a recognized subject, such
as when the subject is moving fast, the camera cancels tracking and quickly shifts the focus to another subject that is
closer in shooting distance. ([1(Not Locked On)] to [5(Locked On)])
Recognition Sensitivity *2 *5:
Sets the sensitivity of subject recognition. The lower the setting, the easier it is to prevent false recognition. The higher
the setting, the easier it is to recognize subjects that are normally difficult. ([1(Low)] to [5(High)])
Recognition Priority Set. *3:

146
Sets which to prioritize when animals and birds are recognized at the same time. ([Auto]/[Priority on Animals]/[Priority on
Birds])
Recognition Part *4:
Sets the part to be recognized. ([Eye/Head/Body]/[Eye/Head]/[Eye]/[Follow Individ. Set.] *3)
Recog. Part Sel. Settings *4:
When [Recognition Part Select] is assigned to a custom key, this sets the recognized part that can be switched with the
custom key. ([Eye/Head/Body]/[Eye/Head]/[Eye]/[Follow Individ. Set.] *3)
*1 Available for [Human]/[Animal]/[Bird]/[Insect]/[Car/Train]/[Airplane]
*2 [Animal]/[Bird]/[Insect]/[Car/Train]/[Airplane] only
*3 [Animal/Bird] only
*4 [Animal/Bird]/[Animal]/[Bird] only
*5 When the recognition target is set to [Animal/Bird], these settings can be adjusted from the [Animal: Detailed Setting] or [Bird: Detailed Settings]
screen.

Hint
To recognize animal or bird eyes, compose the shot so that the entire head is within the angle of view. Once you focus on the
animal’s or bird’s head, the eyes will be recognized more easily.

If you register [Recognition Part] in the function menu, you can change the setting while shooting a still image.

Note
When [ Recognition Target] is set to other than [Human], the following functions cannot be used.
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Regist. Face Priority

Some types of subjects cannot be recognized in line with the [ Recognition Target] setting. Also, subjects other than the target
you have set may be recognized as the subject in some cases. If this occurs, set [ Focus Area] to [Zone] or [Spot] and move
the focus frame closer to the subject to make it easier to recognize the subject.

Related Topic
Focusing using subject recognition functions
Subject Recog in AF (still image/movie)

TP1001268986

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

147
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Recog Trgt Select Set (still image/movie)

Sets the types of recognition targets that are available when using the custom key to which [Recog. Target Select] is
assigned.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Subject Recognition] → [ Recog Trgt Select Set] → Add check marks to the
recognition targets that you want to select, and then select [OK].

The types of targets marked with (check mark) will be available as settings.

Hint
Assign [Recog. Target Select] to the desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.].

You can select the types of targets to which you did not add a check mark in [ Recog Trgt Select Set] by selecting MENU →
(Focus) → [Subject Recognition] → [ Recognition Target].

Related Topic
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001268987

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

148
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)

Sets whether to focus on the left or right eye when [ Recognition Target] is set to [Human] or [Animal].

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Subject Recognition] → [ Right/Left Eye Select] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
The camera automatically selects either the left eye or right eye.
Right Eye:
The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is selected.
Left Eye:
The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is selected.

[Switch Right/Left Eye] by custom key

You can also switch between focusing on the right eye and left eye with the custom key.
When [ Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Right Eye] or [Left Eye], you can switch the eye on which the camera will focus
by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
When [ Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], you can temporarily switch the eye to be focused by pressing the
custom key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
The temporary left/right selection is canceled when you perform the following operations, etc. The camera returns to
automatic eye selection.

Pressing the center of the control wheel

Stopping pressing the shutter button halfway down (only during still image shooting)
Stopping pressing the custom key to which [AF On] or [Subject Recognition AF] is assigned (only during still image
shooting)
Pressing the MENU button

Hint
When [ Sbj Recog Frm Disp.] is set to [On], the eye recognition frame appears around the eye you selected using the [
Right/Left Eye Select] menu or using the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function activated by the custom key.

Related Topic
Focusing using subject recognition functions
Subject Recog in AF (still image/movie)
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Sbj Recog Frm Disp. (still image)

TP1001268988

149
5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

150
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Sbj Recog Frm Disp. (still image)

Sets whether to display a subject recognition frame when a subject is recognized.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Subject Recognition] → [ Sbj Recog Frm Disp.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays a recognition frame when a subject is recognized.
Off:
Does not display a recognition frame when a subject is recognized.

Subject recognition frame

When the camera recognizes a subject and determines that the subject is a target for auto-focusing, the white subject-
recognition frame appears.
The recognition frame is automatically prioritized and displayed where a more precise recognition target (such as eyes) is
recognized.
When [Human] is selected:
When the camera recognizes a subject, the white or gray subject-recognition frame appears around the eye, face, or
body.

When [Animal/Bird], [Animal], or [Bird] is selected:

When the camera recognizes a subject, the white subject-recognition frame appears around the eye, head, or body.

151
When [Insect] is selected:
When the camera recognizes a subject, the white subject-recognition frame appears around the head or the entire
subject.
When [Car/Train] or [Airplane] is selected:
When the camera recognizes a subject, the white subject-recognition frame appears around the front part of the train or
the nose of the airplane or around the entire subject.
Note
If the subject is not recognized, the subject recognition frame will not be displayed.

If the subject or the camera is moving too much, the recognition frame may not be displayed correctly over the subject.

Even if [ Sbj Recog Frm Disp.] is set to [Off], a green recognition frame will appear over the subject that is in focus when you
press the shutter button halfway down, etc.

Related Topic
Focusing using subject recognition functions
Subject Recog in AF (still image/movie)
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)
Face Memory (still image/movie)

TP1001268989

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

152
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Sbj Recog Frm Disp. (movie)

Sets whether to display a subject recognition frame when a subject is recognized.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Subject Recognition] → [ Sbj Recog Frm Disp.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays a recognition frame when a subject is recognized.
Off:
Does not display a recognition frame when a subject is recognized.

Subject recognition frame

When the camera recognizes a subject and determines that the subject is a target for auto-focusing, the white subject-
recognition frame appears.
The recognition frame is automatically prioritized and displayed where a more precise recognition target (such as eyes) is
recognized.
When [Human] is selected:
When the camera recognizes a subject, the white or gray subject-recognition frame appears around the eye, face, or
body.

When [Animal/Bird], [Animal], or [Bird] is selected:

When the camera recognizes a subject, the white subject-recognition frame appears around the eye, head, or body.

153
When [Insect] is selected:
When the camera recognizes a subject, the white subject-recognition frame appears around the head or the entire
subject.
When [Car/Train] or [Airplane] is selected:
When the camera recognizes a subject, the white subject-recognition frame appears around the front part of the train or
the nose of the airplane or around the entire subject.
Note
If the subject is not recognized, the subject recognition frame will not be displayed.

If the subject or the camera is moving too much, the recognition frame may not be displayed correctly over the subject.

Even if [ Sbj Recog Frm Disp.] is set to [Off], a green recognition frame will appear over the subject that is in focus when you
press the shutter button halfway down, etc.

Related Topic
Focusing using subject recognition functions
Subject Recog in AF (still image/movie)
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)
Face Memory (still image/movie)

TP1001270892

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

154
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Face Memory (still image/movie)

This function registers and deletes face data and sets whether to identify registered faces. Up to seven faces can be
registered. If you set one of the registered faces as the identification target, the face will be prioritized when focusing.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Subject Recognition] → [ Face Memory].

2 On the [ Face Memory] list screen, select the + icon frame and press the center of the control wheel.

3 Position the face you want to register in the frame in the center of the screen and press the center of the
control wheel.

The registered face will be displayed on the [ Face Memory] list screen.

To choose a face to identify

Select the face you want to identify on the [ Face Memory] list screen and press the center of the control wheel. The
radio button for the face set as the identification target will turn on.
To delete a registered face
Select the face you want to delete on the [ Face Memory] list screen and press the (Delete) button. Then, select
[Delete This Face]. If you select [Delete All Faces], all registered faces will be deleted.

Note
When performing [ Face Memory], do so in a bright place with the subject facing forward. It will be easier to register a face if
you position it inside the frame in the center of the monitor and position the neck and shoulders under the frame. If the face is
hidden by a hat, mask, sunglasses, etc. or the neck or shoulders are hidden, you may not be able to register it correctly.

Even if you perform [Delete This Face], the registered face data will remain in the camera. If you want to delete it from the camera
as well, perform [Delete All Faces].

Related Topic
Regist. Face Priority (still image/movie)

TP1001268942

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

155
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Regist. Face Priority (still image/movie)

Sets whether to focus with higher priority on a selected face using [ Face Memory].

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Subject Recognition] → [ Regist. Face Priority] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Focuses on a face identified in the [ Face Memory] menu with priority.
Off:
Focuses on faces without prioritizing the selected face.

Hint
To use the [ Regist. Face Priority] function, set as follows.
[ Subject Recog in AF] under [Subject Recognition]: [On]
[ Recognition Target] under [Subject Recognition]: [Human]

If you assign [ Regist. Face Priority] to a custom key, you can switch [ Regist. Face Priority] between [On] and [Off] each
time you press the key.

If you assign [Switch Ident. Target] to a custom key, you can switch the face to be identified each time you press the key.

Related Topic
Subject Recog in AF (still image/movie)
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Face Memory (still image/movie)

TP1001268943

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

156
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Selecting a person to track (Select Face to Track)

When the camera recognizes multiple people, you can choose which person to track.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]
→ Assign the [Select Face to Track] function to the desired key.

The [Select Face to Track] screen will appear, and an orange bar will be displayed below the face to be tracked.

2 Select a face to track using the control wheel and press the center.

The orange bar will move to the selected face. Once the selection is confirmed, exit the [Select Face to Track]
screen and start tracking the selected face.

Note
[Select Face to Track] is unavailable in the following situations:
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus] in still image shooting mode
When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom in still image shooting mode

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001268983

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

157
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Focus Standard

If you press the key to which [Focus Standard] is assigned, you can recall useful functions such as moving the focusing
frame quickly, etc. depending on the focus area settings.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]
→ desired key, then assign the [Focus Standard] function to the key.

2 Press the key to which [Focus Standard] is assigned.

What you can do by pressing the key varies depending on the setting for [ Focus Area].

Examples of [Focus Standard] key functions

When [ Focus Area] is set to any of the following parameters, pressing the key enables you to move the focusing
frame using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.
[Zone]
[Spot: S]/[Spot: M]/[Spot: L]
[Expand Spot]
[Tracking: Zone]
[Tracking: Spot S]/[Tracking: Spot M]/[Tracking: Spot L]
[Tracking: Expand Spot]

When [ Focus Area] is set to [Wide], [Center Fix], [Tracking: Wide], or [Tracking: Center Fix], pressing the key in
the autofocus mode makes the camera focus on the center of the screen. If you press the key while recording a
movie with manual focus, you can temporarily switch to autofocus and focus on the center of the screen.

Note
You cannot set the [Focus Standard] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button] of the control wheel.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

TP1001257122

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

158
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical)

(Switch V/H AF Area)

You can set whether to switch the [ Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of
the camera (horizontal/vertical). This function is useful when shooting scenes for which you have to change the camera
position frequently, such as portraits or sports scenes.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [Switch V/H AF Area] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not switch the [ Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera
(horizontal/vertical).
AF Point Only:
Switches the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical). The [
Focus Area] is fixed.
AF Point + AF Area:
Switches both the [ Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera
(horizontal/vertical).

An example when [AF Point + AF Area] is selected

(A) Vertical: [Spot] (Upper left corner)

(B) Horizontal: [Spot] (Upper right corner)
(C) Vertical: [Zone] (Lower left corner)

Three camera orientations are detected: horizontal, vertical with the side of the shutter button facing up, and vertical
with the side of the shutter button facing down.

Note
If the setting for [Switch V/H AF Area] is changed, the focus settings for each camera orientation will not be retained.

The [ Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame will not change even when [Switch V/H AF Area] is set to [AF Point +
AF Area] or [AF Point Only] in the following situations:
During movie shooting
While using the digital zoom function
While the auto-focusing is activated
During continuous shooting
During the countdown for the self-timer
When [Focus Magnifier] is activated

159
 When you shoot images right after the power is turned on and the camera is vertical, the first shot is taken with the horizontal
focus setting or with the last focus setting.

The orientation of the camera cannot be detected when the lens is facing up or down.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

TP1001261619

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

160
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)

You can move the focusing frame to a preassigned position temporarily using a custom key. This function is useful when
shooting scenes in which the subject’s movements are predictable; for example, sports scenes. With this function, you
can switch the focus area quickly according to the situation.

How to register focus area

1. MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [AF Area Registration] → [On].
2. Set the focus area to the desired position and then hold down the Fn (Function) button.

How to call up the registered focus area

1. MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] → desired key, then select [Regist. AF
Area hold].
2. Set the camera to the shooting mode, hold down the key to which [Regist. AF Area hold] has been assigned and then
press the shutter button to shoot images.
Hint
When a focusing frame is registered using [AF Area Registration], the registered focusing frame flashes on the monitor.

If you assign [Regist AF Area tggle] to a custom key, you can use the registered focusing frame without holding down the key.

If [Reg. AF Area+AF On] is assigned to a custom key, auto focusing using the registered focusing frame is performed when the
key is pressed.

Note
A focus area cannot be registered in the following situations:
While [Touch Focus] is being performed
While using the digital zoom function
While [Touch Tracking] is being performed
While focusing
While performing focus lock

You cannot assign [Regist. AF Area hold] to [Left Button], [Right Button], or [Down Button].

You cannot call up the registered focus area in the following situations:
The Still/Movie/S&Q switch is set to either (Movie) or S&Q (S&Q Motion)

When [AF Area Registration] is set to [On], the [Dial / Wheel Lock] setting is locked to [Unlock].

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001261620

161
5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

162
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)

Deletes the focusing frame position that was registered using [AF Area Registration].

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [Del. Regist. AF Area].

Related Topic
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)

TP1001261621

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

163
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Focus Area Limit (still image/movie)

By limiting the types of available focus area settings in advance, you can more quickly select settings for [ Focus
Area].

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ Focus Area Limit] → Add check marks to the focus areas that
you want to use, and then select [OK].

The types of focus areas marked with (check mark) will be available as settings.

Hint
When you assign [Switch Focus Area] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], the focus
area changes every time you press the assigned key. By limiting the types of selectable focus areas with [ Focus Area Limit] in
advance, you can more quickly select the focus area setting you want.

Note
Types of focus areas that do not have a check mark cannot be selected using MENU or the Fn (function) menu. To select one,
add a check mark using [ Focus Area Limit].

If you remove the check mark for a focus area registered with [Switch V/H AF Area] or [AF Area Registration], the registered
settings will change.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001263925

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

164
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Circ. of Focus Point (still image/movie)

Sets whether to allow the focusing frame to jump from one end to the other when you move the focusing frame. This
function is useful when you want to move the focusing frame from one end to the other quickly.
The function can be used when the following settings are selected for [ Focus Area].

[Zone]
[Spot: S]/[Spot: M]/[Spot: L]
[Expand Spot]
[Tracking: Zone]
[Tracking: Spot S]/[Tracking: Spot M]/[Tracking: Spot L]
[Tracking: Expand Spot]

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ Circ. of Focus Point] → desired setting.

When [Circulate] is selected:

Menu item details

Does Not Circulate:
The cursor does not move when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.
Circulate:
The cursor jumps to the opposite end when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

TP1001263907

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

165
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

AF Frame Move Amt (still image/movie)

Sets the distance by which the focusing frame is moved when [ Focus Area] is set to [Spot], etc. You can quickly move
the focusing frame by increasing the distance, such as in situations where the subject is moving a lot.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ AF Frame Move Amt] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard:
The focusing frame moves by the standard distance.
Large:
The focusing frame moves over a greater distance at a time than with [Standard].

Hint
When [Swt. AF Frame Move hold] is assigned to the desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.],
the [ AF Frame Move Amt] setting temporarily switches while the key is pressed.

If any of the following functions is assigned to the dials or control wheel using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial
Set.], you can move the focusing frame by the distance determined for each function, regardless of the setting for [ AF Frame
Move Amt].
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : Std]
[Move AF Frame : Std]

If any of the following functions is assigned to the dials or control wheel using [My Dial Settings], you can move the focusing
frame by the distance determined for each function, regardless of the setting for [ AF Frame Move Amt].
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : Std]
[Move AF Frame : Std]

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001265427

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

166
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Focus Area Color (still image/movie)

You can specify the color of the frame indicating the focusing area. If the frame is difficult to see because of the subject,
make it more visible by changing its color.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ Focus Area Color] → desired color.

Menu item details

White:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in white.
Red:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in red.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

TP1001264516

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

167
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

AF Area Auto Clear

Sets whether the focus area is displayed all the time or disappears automatically shortly after focus is achieved.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [AF Area Auto Clear] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The focus area disappears automatically shortly after focus is achieved.
Off:
The focus area is displayed all the time.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

TP1001257110

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

168
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

AF-C Area Display

You can set whether or not to display the area that is in focus when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] and [
Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone].

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [AF-C Area Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the focus area that is in focus.
Off:
Does not display the focus area that is in focus.

Note
When [ Focus Area] is set to one of the following, the focusing frames in the area that is in focus turn green:
[Center Fix]
[Spot]
[Expand Spot]

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

TP1001248269

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

169
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Phase Detect. Area

Sets whether or not to display the Phase Detection AF area.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [Phase Detect. Area] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the Phase Detection AF area.
Off:
Does not display the Phase Detection AF area.

Note
Phase Detection AF is available only with compatible lenses. If an incompatible lens is attached, you will be unable to use Phase
Detection AF. Phase Detection AF may not operate even with some compatible lens, such as lenses purchased in the past that
have not been updated. For details on compatible lenses, visit the Sony web site in your area, or consult your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility.

When shooting images using a full-frame-size-compatible lens, the Phase Detection AF area will not be displayed even if [Phase
Detect. Area] is set to [On].

When recording movies, the Phase Detection AF area will not be displayed.

TP1001225577

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

170
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

AF Tracking Sensitivity

You can select the AF track sensitivity when the subject goes out of focus in still image mode.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF Tracking Sensitivity] → desired setting.

Menu item details

5(Responsive)/4/3(Standard)/2/1(Locked on):
Select [5(Responsive)] to focus responsively on subjects at different distances.
Select [1(Locked on)] to keep the focus on a specific subject when other things are crossing in front of the subject.

TP1001257124

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

171
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

AF Transition Speed

Sets the focusing speed when the target of the auto focus is switched during movie shooting.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF Transition Speed] → desired setting.

Menu item details

7 (Fast)/6/5/4/3/2/1 (Slow):
Select a faster value to focus on the subject more quickly.
Select a slower value to focus on the subject more smoothly.

Hint
You can use the touch focus function to intentionally transition the AF.

TP1001257151

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

172
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity

Sets the sensitivity with which the focus switches to another subject when the original subject leaves the focus area or an
unfocused subject in the foreground approaches the center of the focus area during movie shooting.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity] → desired setting.

Menu item details

5(Responsive)/4/3/2/1(Locked on):
Select a higher value when you want to shoot a quick-moving subject, or when you want to shoot multiple subjects while
switching the focus continually.
Select a lower value when you want the focus to remain steady, or when you want to keep the focus on a particular target
without being affected by other subjects.

TP1001257100

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

173
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

AF Assist

While shooting a movie with auto focus, you can change the subject in focus by operating the focus ring of the lens.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF Assist] → [On].

2 While shooting a movie with auto focus, turn the focus ring of the lens to focus on the intended subject.

When you stop operating the focus ring, the subject that is in focus with the focus ring becomes the autofocus
target.

Menu item details

On:
Uses the AF assist function.
Off:
Does not use the AF assist function.

Hint
It will be easier to see which region is in focus if you use the [ Peaking Display] or [Focus Map] function along with [AF Assist],
making it easier for you to focus on the intended subject.

Note
Only subjects within the focus area are targeted by auto focus.

The following lenses are not compatible with [AF Assist].

SELP1650 (sold separately)
SEL18200LE (sold separately)

Related Topic
Peaking Display
Focus Map

TP1001268211

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

174
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

AF/MF Selector

You can easily switch the focusing mode from auto to manual and vice versa while shooting without changing your
holding position.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]
→ desired button → [AF/MF Selector Hold] or [AF/MF Selector Toggle].

Menu item details

AF/MF Selector Hold:
Switches the focusing mode while the button is held down.
AF/MF Selector Toggle:
Switches the focusing mode until the button is pressed again.

Note
You cannot set the [AF/MF Selector Hold] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button] of the control wheel.

If the lens is equipped with an AF/MF selector switch, the state of the switch on the lens will take priority.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001224800

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

175
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

AF w/ Shutter

Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select [Off] to adjust the focus
and the exposure separately.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF w/ Shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The auto focus operates when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
The auto focus does not operate even if you press the shutter button halfway down.

Related Topic
AF On

TP1001224806

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

176
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

AF On

You can focus without pressing the shutter button halfway down. The settings for [ Focus Mode] will be applied.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]
→ desired key, then assign the [AF On] function to the key.

2 Press the key to which you have assigned the [AF On] function.

When shooting a movie, you can perform auto-focusing by holding down the custom key to which [AF On] is
assigned even in the manual focusing mode.

Hint
Set [AF w/ Shutter] to [Off] when you do not want to perform auto focusing using the shutter button.

Set [AF w/ Shutter] and [Pre-AF] to [Off] to focus at a specific shooting distance predicting the position of the subject.

Related Topic
AF w/ Shutter
Pre-AF

TP1001224807

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

177
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Focus Hold

Locks the focus while the key to which the Focus Hold function has been assigned is pressed.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]
→ assign the [Focus Hold] function to the desired key.

2 Focus and press the key to which the [Focus Hold] function has been assigned.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001256654

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

178
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Pre-AF

The product automatically adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [Pre-AF] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

Note
[Pre-AF] is available only when an E-mount lens is mounted.

During focusing operations, the screen may shake.

TP1001248267

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

179
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Priority Set in AF-S

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF],
[DMF] or [Automatic AF] and the subject is remaining still.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [Priority Set in AF-S] → desired setting.

Menu item details

AF:
Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release:
Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis:
Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Priority Set in AF-C

TP1001248272

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

180
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Priority Set in AF-C

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the subject
is in motion.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [Priority Set in AF-C] → desired setting.

Menu item details

AF:
Prioritizes focusing.
Release:
Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis:
Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Priority Set in AF-S

TP1001248273

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

181
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Aperture Drive in AF

Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize the auto-focusing tracking performance or to prioritize silence.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [Aperture Drive in AF] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Focus Priority:
Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize auto-focusing performance.
Standard:
Uses the standard aperture drive system.
Silent Priority:
Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize silence so that the sound from the aperture drive is quieter than in
[Standard].

Note
When [Focus Priority] is selected, sound from the aperture drive may be audible, or the aperture effect may not be visible on the
monitor. To avoid these phenomena, change the setting to [Standard].

When [Silent Priority] is selected, the focusing speed may become slower, and it may be more difficult to focus on a subject.

The effect may differ depending on the lens you use and the shooting conditions.

Related Topic
Silent Mode Settings (still image/movie)

TP1001263913

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

182
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

AF in Focus Mag.

You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While
the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than [Spot] under [ Focus Area].

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [AF in Focus Mag.] → [On].

2 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [Focus Magnifier].

3 Magnify the image by pressing the center of the control wheel, and then adjust the position using
top/bottom/right/left of the control wheel.

The magnification scale changes each time you press the center.

4 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

The focus will be achieved at point of (plus mark) in the center of the screen.

5 Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.

The camera exits the magnified display after shooting.

Hint
Use of a tripod is recommended to accurately identify the location you want to magnify.

You can check the auto-focusing result by magnifying the displayed image. If you want to readjust the focus position, adjust the
focus area on the magnified screen and then press the shutter button halfway down.

Note
If you enlarge an area at the edge of the screen, the camera may not be able to focus.

The exposure and white balance cannot be adjusted while the displayed image is being magnified.

[AF in Focus Mag.] is unavailable in the following situations:

During movie shooting
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and the shooting mode is set to other than P/A/S/M.
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting].
When using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately).

While the displayed image is being magnified, the following functions are unavailable:
[Subject Recognition AF]
[Pre-AF]
[ Subject Recog in AF]

183
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier

TP1001257141

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

184
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Auto Magnifier in MF

Enlarges the image on the screen automatically to make manual focusing easier. This works in Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus shooting.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [Auto Magnifier in MF] → [On].

2 Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.

The image is enlarged. You can magnify images further by pressing the center of the control wheel.

Hint
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [ Focus
Magnif. Time].

Note
You cannot use [Auto Magnifier in MF] when shooting movies. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.

[Auto Magnifier in MF] is not available when a Mount Adaptor is attached. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.

Related Topic
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Focus Magnif. Time (still image/movie)

TP1001248266

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

185
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Focus Magnifier

You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.
Unlike with [Auto Magnifier in MF], you can magnify the image without operating the focus ring.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [Focus Magnifier].

2 Press the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select the area you want to enlarge using
top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.

Each time you press the center, the magnification scale will change.
You can set the initial magnification by selecting MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [ Initial
Focus Mag.] or [ Initial Focus Mag.].

3 Confirm the focus.

Press the (Delete) button to bring the magnified position into the center of an image.
When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can adjust the focus while an image is magnified. If [AF in Focus
Mag.] is set to [Off], the [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled when the shutter button is pressed halfway down.
When the shutter button is pressed halfway down while an image is magnified during the auto-focusing, different
functions are performed depending on the [AF in Focus Mag.] setting.
When [AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [On]: Auto-focusing is performed again.
When [AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off]: The [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled.

You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU → (Focus) → [Focus
Assistant] → [ Focus Magnif. Time].

To use the focus magnifier function by touch operation

When [Touch Func. in Shooting] is set to [Touch Focus], you can magnify the image and adjust the focus by touching the
monitor. Set in advance as follows.

[Touch Operation]: [On]

Set [Shooting Screen] to [On].

Set [Touch Func. in Shooting] to [Touch Focus].

When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can perform [Focus Magnifier] by double-tapping the area to focus on.

Hint
While using the focus magnifier function, you can move the magnified area by dragging it on the touch panel.

To exit the focus magnifier function, double-tap the monitor again. When [AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off], the focus magnifier
function is ended by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

You can set whether to exit or continue the magnified display after shooting by pressing the Fn (Function) button while the
magnified image is displayed. This function is available when shooting with the following settings:
[ Focus Mode]: [Single-shot AF], [DMF] or [Manual Focus]
186
 [Drive Mode]: [Single Shooting] or [Cont. Shooting]
[AF in Focus Mag.]: [On]
[ Auto Review]: [Off]

Related Topic
Auto Magnifier in MF
Focus Magnif. Time (still image/movie)
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
Initial Focus Mag. (movie)
AF in Focus Mag.
Touch Operation
Shooting Screen

TP1001224804

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

187
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Focus Magnif. Time (still image/movie)

Set the duration for which an image is to be magnified using the [Auto Magnifier in MF] or [Focus Magnifier] function.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [ Focus Magnif. Time] → desired setting.

Menu item details

2 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 2 seconds.
5 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 5 seconds.
No Limit:
Magnifies the images until you press the shutter button.

Related Topic
Auto Magnifier in MF
Focus Magnifier

TP1001224795

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

188
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Initial Focus Mag. (movie)

Sets the initial magnification scale for [Focus Magnifier] in the movie shooting mode.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] →[ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x4.0:
Displays a 4.0-times enlarged image.

Related Topic
Focus Magnifier

TP1001263916

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

189
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Initial Focus Mag. (still image)

Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Full-frame shooting

x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x5.8:
Displays a 5.8-times enlarged image.

APS-C/Super 35mm size shooting

x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x3.8:
Displays a 3.8-times enlarged image.

Related Topic
Focus Magnifier

TP1001257074

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

190
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Focus Map

When shooting a movie, areas that are in focus and areas that are out of focus are displayed so that you can visually
distinguish them. Areas behind the in-focus region are indicated by dots in a cool color (A) and those in front of the in-
focus region are indicated by dots in a warm color (B). Dots are not displayed in the in-focus range. Dots are not
recorded in the actual movie.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [Focus Map] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the focus map.
Off:
Does not display the focus map.

Hint
The focus map can also be output to an external monitor. To output the focus map to an external monitor, set [HDMI Info. Display]
to [On].

Note
[Focus Map] is unavailable in the following situations:
When [Focus Magnifier] is activated
While using the digital zoom function
While streaming
When using a lens that does not support phase detection AF
When a Mount Adaptor is attached
When the lens is not attached to the camera

Related Topic
HDMI Info. Display

TP1001268212

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

191
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Peaking Display

Sets the peaking function, which enhances the outline of in-focus areas during shooting with Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus. When shooting a movie, you can also use the peaking function with auto focus.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Peaking Display] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.

Menu item details

Peaking Display:
Sets whether to display peaking. ([On] / [Off])
Peaking Level:
Sets the level of enhancement of in-focus areas. ([High] / [Mid] / [Low])
Peaking Color:
Sets the color used to enhance in-focus areas. ([Red] / [Yellow] / [Blue] / [White])

Note
Since the product recognizes sharp areas as in focus, the effect of peaking differs, depending on the subject and lens.

The outline of in-focus ranges is not enhanced on devices connected via HDMI.

Related Topic
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)

TP1001262813

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

192
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Exposure Comp. (still image/movie)

Normally, exposure is set automatically (auto exposure). Based on the exposure value set by auto exposure, you can
make the entire image brighter or darker if you adjust [ Exposure Comp.] to the plus side or minus side, respectively
(exposure compensation).

1 ( Exposure Comp.) on the control wheel → press the left/right side of the control wheel or turn the
control wheel, and select the desired setting.

+ (over) side:
Images become brighter.
- (under) side:
Images become darker.

You can also select MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure Comp.] → [ Exposure Comp.].
When [Touch Operation] is set to [On] and [Footer Icon Touch] is set to [On], you can change the exposure
compensation values using touch operations.
You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -5.0 EV to +5.0 EV.
You can confirm the exposure compensation value that you set on the shooting screen.

Hint
Only a value between -3.0 EV and +3.0 EV with the equivalent image brightness appears on the screen when shooting. If you set
an exposure compensation value outside this range, the image brightness on the screen will not be affected, but the value will be
reflected in the recorded image.

You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -2.0 EV to +2.0 EV for movies.

Note
You cannot perform the exposure compensation in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Scene Selection]

When using [Manual Exposure], you can perform the exposure compensation only when [ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].

If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use the flash, you may not be able to get a satisfactory
effect.

193
Related Topic
Exposure step (still image/movie)
Exp.comp.set
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
Zebra Display

TP1001248274

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

194
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Histogram display

A histogram shows the luminance distribution, displaying how many pixels there are by luminance.
To display the histogram on the shooting screen or playback screen, press the DISP (Display Setting) button repeatedly.

How to read the histogram

The histogram indicates darker values toward the left and brighter values toward the right.
The histogram changes depending on the exposure compensation.
A peak at the right or left end of the histogram indicates that the image has an overexposed or underexposed area,
respectively. You cannot correct such defects using a computer after shooting. Perform exposure compensation before
shooting as necessary.

(A): Pixel count

(B): Brightness

Note
The information in the histogram display does not indicate the final photograph. It is information about image displayed on the
screen. The final result depends on the aperture value, etc.

The histogram display is extremely different between shooting and playback in the following cases:
When the flash is used
When shooting a low luminance subject such as a night scene

Related Topic
DISP (Display Setting) button
Exposure Comp. (still image/movie)

TP1001265428

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

195
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Exposure step (still image/movie)

You can adjust the setting increment for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure Comp.] → [ Exposure step] → desired setting.

Menu item details

0.5EV / 0.3EV

Related Topic
Exposure Comp. (still image/movie)

TP1001224816

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

196
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Exposure Std. Adjust (still image/movie)

Adjusts this camera's standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure Comp.] → [ Exposure Std. Adjust] → desired metering

mode.

2 Select the desired value as the metering standard.

You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

Metering Mode
The set standard value will be applied when you select the corresponding metering mode in MENU →
(Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [ Metering Mode].
Multi/ Center/ Spot/ Entire Screen Average/ Highlight

Note
The exposure compensation will not be affected when [ Exposure Std. Adjust] is changed.

The exposure value will be locked according to the value set for [ Spot] during using spot AEL.

The standard value for M.M (Metered Manual) will be changed according to the value set in [ Exposure Std. Adjust].

The value set in [ Exposure Std. Adjust] is recorded in Exif data separately from the exposure compensation value. The
amount of exposure standard value will not be added to the exposure compensation value.

If you set [ Exposure Std. Adjust] during bracketing shooting, the number of shots for the bracketing will be reset.

Related Topic
Metering Mode (still image/movie)

TP1001257094

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

197
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

D-Range Optimizer (still image/movie)

By dividing the image into small areas, the product analyzes the contrast of light and shadow between the subject and
the background, and creates an image with the optimal brightness and gradation.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ D-Range Optimizer] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not adjust brightness and gradation.
D-Range Optimizer:
If you select [D-Range Optimizer: Auto], the camera will automatically adjust the brightness and gradation. To optimize
the gradation of a recorded image by individual areas, select an optimization level from [D-Range Optimizer: Lv1] (weak)
to [D-Range Optimizer: Lv5] (strong).

Note
In the following situations, [ D-Range Optimizer] is fixed to [Off]:
When [ Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off]
When [Log Shooting] is set to [On (Flexible ISO)].

[ D-Range Optimizer] is fixed to [Off] when the following modes are selected in [Scene Selection].
[Sunset]
[Night Scene]
[Night Portrait]

The setting is fixed to [D-Range Optimizer: Auto] when [Scene Selection] modes other than the above modes are selected.

When shooting with [D-Range Optimizer], the image may be noisy. Select the proper level by checking the recorded image,
especially when you enhance the effect.

TP1001248288

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

198
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Metering Mode (still image/movie)

Selects the metering mode that sets which part of the screen to measure for determining the exposure.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [ Metering Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multi:
Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the
entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-
weighted metering).
Spot:
Measures only inside the metering circle. This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire
screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the
metering circle depends on the setting for [ Spot Metering Point].
Entire Screen Avg.:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position
of the subject changes.
Highlight:
Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the
subject while avoiding overexposure.

Hint
The spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus area by using [Focus Point Link].

When [Multi] is selected and [ Face Priority in Multi Metering] is set to [On], the camera measures brightness based on
detected faces.

When [ Metering Mode] is set to [Highlight] and the [D-Range Optimizer] function is activated, the brightness and the contrast
will be corrected automatically by dividing the image into small areas and analyzing the contrast of light and shadow. Make
settings based on the shooting circumstances.

Note
[ Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi] in the following shooting situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Scene Selection]
When using a zoom function other than the optical zoom

In [Highlight] mode, the subject may be dark if a brighter part exists on the screen.

Related Topic
AE lock

199
Spot Metering Point (still image/movie)
Face Priority in Multi Metering (still image/movie)
D-Range Optimizer (still image/movie)

TP1001224810

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

200
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Face Priority in Multi Metering (still image/movie)

Sets whether the camera measures brightness based on detected faces when [ Metering Mode] is set to [Multi].

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [ Face Priority in Multi Metering] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The camera measures brightness based on detected faces.
Off:
The camera measures brightness using the [Multi] setting, without detecting faces.

Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [ Face Priority in Multi Metering] is locked to [On].

When [ Subject Recog in AF] under [Subject Recognition] is set to [On] and [ Recognition Target] is set to an item other
than [Human], [ Face Priority in Multi Metering] does not work.

Related Topic
Metering Mode (still image/movie)

TP1001262788

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

201
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Spot Metering Point (still image/movie)

Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when [ Focus Area] is set to the following
parameters:

[Spot: S]/[Spot: M]/[Spot: L]

[Expand Spot]
[Tracking: Spot S]/[Tracking: Spot M]/[Tracking: Spot L]
[Tracking: Expand Spot]

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [ Spot Metering Point] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Center:
The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
Focus Point Link:
The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.

Note
Even if the spot metering position is coordinated with the [Tracking] start position, it will not be coordinated with the tracking of the
subject.

When [ Focus Area] is set to the following parameters, the spot metering position is locked to the center.
[Wide]
[Zone]
[Center Fix]
[Tracking: Wide]/[Tracking: Zone]/[Tracking: Center Fix]

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Metering Mode (still image/movie)

TP1001257120

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

202
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

AE lock

When the contrast between the subject and background is high, such as when shooting a backlit subject or a subject
near a window, meter the light at a spot where the subject appears to have the appropriate brightness and lock the
exposure before shooting. To reduce the brightness of the subject, meter the light at a spot brighter than the subject and
lock the exposure of the entire screen. To make the subject brighter, meter the light at a spot darker than the subject and
lock the exposure of the entire screen.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]
→ desired key, then assign [AEL toggle] to the key.

2 Adjust the focus on the spot at which the exposure is adjusted.

3 Press the button to which [AEL toggle] is assigned.

The exposure is locked, and (AE lock) is displayed.

4 Focus on the subject again and press the shutter button.

To cancel the exposure lock, press the button to which the [AEL toggle] function is assigned.

Hint
If you select the [AEL hold] function in [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can lock the exposure as
long as you are holding down the button. You cannot set the [AEL hold] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button].

Note
[ AEL hold] and [ AEL toggle] are not available when using zoom functions other than optical zoom.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001224811

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

203
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

AEL w/ Shutter

Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Select [Off] to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [AEL w/ Shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when [
Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF]. When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF], and the product determines that
the subject is moving, or you shoot burst images, the fixed exposure is canceled.
On:
Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to adjust
focus and exposure separately.
The product keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in [Cont. Shooting] mode.

Note
When [AEL toggle] is assigned to any key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], operation using the key
will be given priority over the [AEL toggle] settings.

TP1001224812

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

204
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Auto Slow Shutter

Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording movies if the subject is dark. This function
cannot be used during slow-motion/quick-motion recording.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [Auto Slow Shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise
in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
Off:
Does not use Auto Slow Shutter. The recorded movie will be darker than when [On] is selected, but you can record
movies with smoother motion and less object blur.

Note
[Auto Slow Shutter] does not function in the following situations:
(Shutter Priority)
(Manual Exposure)
When [ ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO]

TP1001224868

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

205
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Zebra Display

Sets a zebra pattern, which appears over part of an image if the brightness level of that part meets the IRE level that you
have set. Use this zebra pattern as a guide to adjust the brightness.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Zebra Display] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.

Menu item details

Zebra Display:
Sets whether to display the zebra pattern. ([Off] / [On])
Zebra Level:
Adjusts the brightness level of the zebra pattern. ([70] / [75] / [80] / [85] / [90]/ [95] / [100] / [100+])

Hint
You can register values to check the correct exposure or overexposure as well as the brightness level for [ Zebra Level]. The
settings for correct exposure confirmation and overexposure confirmation are registered to [Custom 1] and [Custom 2]
respectively in the default settings.

To check the correct exposure, set a standard value and the range for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear on areas
that fall within the range you set.

To check the overexposure, set a minimum value for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear over areas with a
brightness level equal to or higher than the value you set.

Note
The zebra pattern is not displayed on devices connected via HDMI.

TP1001262787

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

206
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

ISO (still image/movie)

Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended exposure index). The larger the number, the higher
the sensitivity.

1 ISO on the control wheel → select desired setting.

You can also select MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [ ISO].

You can change the value by 1/3 EV steps by turning the control wheel. You can change the value by 1 EV
steps by turning the control dial.

Menu item details

ISO AUTO:
Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.
ISO 40 – ISO 409600:
Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger number increases the ISO sensitivity.

Hint
You can change the range of ISO sensitivity that is set automatically in [ISO AUTO] mode. Select [ISO AUTO] and press the right
side of the control wheel, and set the desired values for [ISO AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum].

The higher the ISO value, the more noise will appear on the images.

The available ISO settings will differ depending on whether you are shooting still images, shooting movies, or shooting slow-
motion/quick-motion movies.

When shooting movies, ISO values between 80 and 409600 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value smaller than 80, the
setting is automatically switched to 80. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.

The available range for ISO sensitivity varies depending on the setting for [Gamma] under [ Picture Profile].

Note
[ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Scene Selection]

When the ISO sensitivity is set to a value lower than ISO 80, the range for recordable subject brightness (dynamic range) may
decrease.

When you select [ISO AUTO] with the shooting mode set to [P], [A], [S] or [M], the ISO sensitivity will be automatically adjusted
within the set range.

If you point the camera at an extremely strong light source while shooting images with a low ISO sensitivity, highlighted areas in
the images may be recorded as black areas.

TP1001248286

207
5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

208
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

ISO Range Limit (still image/movie)

You can limit the range of ISO sensitivity when the ISO sensitivity is set manually.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [ ISO Range Limit] → [Minimum] or [Maximum], and

select the desired values.

To set the range for [ISO AUTO]

If you want to adjust the range of ISO sensitivity that is automatically set in the [ISO AUTO] mode, select MENU →
(Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [ ISO] → [ISO AUTO], and then press the right side of the control wheel to select
[ISO AUTO Maximum]/[ISO AUTO Minimum].

Note
ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified range become unavailable. To select ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified
range, reset [ ISO Range Limit].

Related Topic
ISO (still image/movie)

TP1001263914

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

209
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

ISO AUTO Min. SS

If you select [ISO AUTO] when the shooting mode is P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority), you can set the shutter
speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing.
This function is effective for shooting moving subjects. You can minimize subject blurring while also preventing camera
shake.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [ISO AUTO Min. SS] → desired setting.

Menu item details

SLOWER (Slower)/SLOW (Slow):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than [Standard], so you can shoot images with less
noise.
STD (Standard):
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
FAST (Fast)/FASTER (Faster):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than [Standard], so you can prevent camera shake and
subject blurring.
1/8000 ― 30":
The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.

Hint
The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Slower], [Slow], [Standard], [Fast], and [Faster]
is 1 EV.

Note
If the exposure is insufficient even when the ISO sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO Maximum] in [ISO AUTO], in order to shoot with
an appropriate exposure, the shutter speed will be slower than the speed set in [ISO AUTO Min. SS].

In the following situations, the shutter speed may not function as set:
When using the flash to shoot bright scenes. (The maximum shutter speed is limited to the flash-syncing speed of 1/30
second.)
When using the flash to shoot dark scenes with the [Flash Mode] set to [Fill-flash]. (The minimum shutter speed is limited to the
speed automatically determined by the camera.)

Related Topic
Shoot Mode: Program Auto
Shoot Mode: Aperture Priority
ISO (still image/movie)

TP1001248287

210
5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

211
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

White Balance (still image/movie)

Corrects the tone effect of the ambient light condition to record a neutral white subject in white. Use this function when
the color tones of the image did not come out as you expected, or when you want to change the color tones on purpose
for photographic expression.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [ White Balance] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto / Auto: Ambience / Auto: White / Daylight / Shade / Cloudy / Incandescent
/ Fluor.: Warm White / Fluor.: Cool White / Fluor.: Day White / Fluor.: Daylight / Flash
(only when shooting still images) / Underwater Auto :
When you select a light source that illuminates the subject, the product adjusts the color tones to suit to the selected light
source (preset white balance). When you select [Auto], the product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the
color tones.
C.Temp./Filter:
Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for
photography.
Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3:
Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.

Hint
You can display the fine adjustment screen and perform fine adjustments of the color tones as required by pressing the right side
of the control wheel. When [C.Temp./Filter] is selected, you can change the color temperature by turning the control dial instead of
pressing the right side of the control wheel.

If the color tones do not come out as you expected in the selected settings, perform [WB bracket] shooting.

(Auto: Ambience), (Auto: White) is displayed only when [ Priority Set in AWB] is set to [Ambience] or [White].

If you want to moderate abrupt white balance switching, such as when the recording environment switches during movie
recording, you can change the white balance switching speed with the [Shockless WB] function.

Note
[ White Balance] is fixed to [Auto] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Scene Selection]
When [Cinematic Vlog Set.] is set to [On]

If you use a mercury lamp or a sodium lamp as a light source, the accurate white balance will not be obtained because of the
characteristics of the light. It is recommended to shoot images using a flash or select [Custom 1] to [Custom 3].

Related Topic
Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)
Priority Set in AWB (still image/movie)

212
WB bracket
Shockless WB

TP1001248290

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

213
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)

In a scene where the ambient light consists of multiple types of light sources, it is recommended to use the custom white
balance in order to accurately reproduce the whiteness. You can register 3 settings.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [ White Balance] → Select from among [Custom 1]
to [Custom 3], and then press the right side of the control wheel.

2 Select (custom white balance set), and then press the center of the control wheel.

3 Hold the product so that the white area fully covers the white-balance capture frame, and then press the
center of the control wheel.

After the shutter sound is heard and the message [Captured the custom WB data.] is displayed, the calibrated
values (Color Temperature and Color Filter) are displayed.
You can adjust the position of the white-balance capture frame by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the
control wheel.
After capturing a standard white color, you can display the fine adjustment screen by pressing the right side of
the control wheel. You can finely adjust the color tones as needed.
No shutter sound is produced in the following cases.
In the movie recording mode
When [Silent Mode] is set to [On]

4 Press the center of the control wheel.

The calibrated values will be registered. The monitor returns to the MENU display while retaining the memorized
custom white balance setting.
The registered custom white balance setting will remain memorized until overwritten by the another setting.

Note
The message [Capturing of the custom WB failed.] indicates that the value is in the unexpected range, for example when the
subject is too vivid. You can register the setting at this point, but it is recommended that you set the white balance again. When an
error value is set, the indicator (custom white balance) turns orange on the recording information display. The indicator will
be displayed in white when the set value is in the expected range.

If you use a flash when capturing a basic white color, the custom white balance will be registered with the lighting from the flash.
Be sure to use a flash whenever you shoot with recalled settings that were registered with a flash.

TP1001248291

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

214
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Priority Set in AWB (still image/movie)

Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when [ White
Balance] is set to [Auto].

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [ Priority Set in AWB] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard:
Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
Ambience:
Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
White:
Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.

Related Topic
White Balance (still image/movie)

TP1001257087

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

215
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Shutter AWB Lock

You can set whether or not to lock the white balance while the shutter button is pressed when [ White Balance] is set
to [Auto] or [Underwater Auto].
This function prevents unintentional changes to the white balance during continuous shooting or when shooting with the
shutter button pressed halfway down.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [Shutter AWB Lock] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Shutter Half Press:
Locks the white balance while the shutter button is pressed halfway down, even in the auto white balance mode. The
white balance is also locked during continuous shooting.
Cont. Shooting:
Locks the white balance to the setting in the first shot during continuous shooting, even in the auto white balance mode.
Off:
Operates with the normal auto white balance.

About [AWB Lock Hold] and [AWB Lock Toggle]

You can also lock the white balance in the auto white balance mode by assigning [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle]
to the custom key. If you press the assigned key during shooting, the white balance will be locked.
The [AWB Lock Hold] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment while the
button is pressed.
The [AWB Lock Toggle] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment after the
button is pressed once. When you press the button again, the AWB lock is released.

If you want to lock the white balance while recording a movie in the auto white-balance mode, also assign [AWB Lock
Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle] to the custom key.

Hint
When you shoot with the flash while the automatic white balance is locked, the resulting color tones may be unnatural because
the white balance was locked before the flash was emitted. In this case, set [Shutter AWB Lock] to [Off] or [Cont. Shooting], and
do not use the [AWB Lock Hold] function or [AWB Lock Toggle] function when shooting. Alternatively, set [ White Balance] to
[Flash].

Related Topic
White Balance (still image/movie)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001263915

216
5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

217
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Shockless WB

Sets the speed at which the white balance switches during movie recording, such as when the setting for [ White
Balance] or [ Priority Set in AWB] is changed.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [Shockless WB] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
The white balance will switch immediately if you change the white balance setting during movie recording.
1 (Fast)/2/3 (Slow):
You can select the speed at which the white balance switches during movie shooting in order to make the white balance
of the movie change more smoothly.
The speed settings in the order of fastest to slowest are [1 (Fast)], [2], and [3 (Slow)].

Note
This function does not affect the speed at which the white balance changes when [ White Balance] is set to [Auto] or
[Underwater Auto].

Even if a setting other than [Off] is selected, the following will be immediately applied to the movie regardless of the speed setting.
Fine adjustments to the color tones
Changes to the color temperature using [C.Temp./Filter]

Related Topic
White Balance (still image/movie)

TP1001265429

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

218
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Log shooting

Log shooting has a wider dynamic range than normal movie recording, which makes color grading more flexible, bringing
advantages in terms of picture effects and exposure adjustment for editing.

For details on Log shooting, refer to the following website.

https://helpguide.sony.net/di/pp/v1/en/index.html

TP1001268945

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

219
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Log Shooting Setting

Configures the settings for Log shooting.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [Log Shooting Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Log Shooting:
Sets whether to perform Log shooting. With [On (Flexible ISO)], you can record S-Log material with the exposure set by
adjusting the ISO according to the shooting scene. (Off/On (Flexible ISO))
Color Gamut:
Sets the color gamut. ( / )
Embed LUT File:
Sets whether to embed LUT files in recorded data. (On / Off)

Note
[Embed LUT File] is locked to [Off] when using SD cards or SDHC cards.

When [Log Shooting] is set to [On (Flexible ISO)], this may cause an error in the white balance custom setup. In such a case,
temporarily set [Log Shooting] to [Off], perform the custom setup, and then reset [Log Shooting] to [On (Flexible ISO)].

Related Topic
Select LUT
Picture Profile (still image/movie)
HDMI Output Settings (movie)

TP1001268946

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

220
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Select LUT

Selects which LUT to apply to movies. You can choose the LUT from among three presets and 16 LUTs that you can
register.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [Select LUT] → desired setting.

Menu item details

S-Log3:
Emphasizes the expression of gradations from shadow to mid-tone. The tone of the images is similar to the
characteristics of images that have been scanned from film for shooting.
s709:
Selects the s709 LUT for color tones similar to the film color preferred in movie and drama productions.
709(800%):
Selects the R709 LUT for contrast in color tones with true-to-life color reproduction.
User1–User16:
Selects registered LUTs. LUTs can be edited and registered by selecting User1–User16, and pressing the right side of
the control wheel to open the setting detail screen.

Related Topic
Log Shooting Setting
Manage User LUTs
Display LUT

TP1001268947

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

221
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Manage User LUTs

You can register LUTs as User1–User16 on the camera. Also, you can change the settings for the registered LUT files.

Registering a LUT
1. Save the LUT file you want to register on a memory card.

Save the file to the following path.

/Private/Sony/PRO/LUT

File format: CUBE file (.cube) for a 17-point or 33-point

File name: 63 alphanumeric characters (single-byte code) or less including “.cube”

2. MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [Manage User LUTs] → [Import/Edit].

3. Select the user LUT area (User1–User16) in which to register the data.

4. Select the memory card on which the LUT file is stored.

5. Select the file you want to register and select [OK].

Editing a LUT
The following edits can be made to a user LUT area.
Input: Selects either [ ] or [ ].
AE Level Offset: Sets the compensation value for the AE tracking level when using this LUT. (0EV, 1/3EV, 2/3EV, 1EV,
4/3EV, 5/3EV, 2EV).
Import: Registers a LUT file to the selected User number.
Delete: Deletes the LUT file registered to the selected User number.

To delete LUTs in bulk

1. MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [Manage User LUTs] → [Delete All].

All of the LUTs registered to User1–User16 are deleted.

Note
When using SD cards or SDHC cards, filenames for registering LUT files are displayed in the 8.3 format.

Related Topic
Select LUT
Display LUT

TP1001268948

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

222
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Display LUT

The monitor can display images with the LUT reflected during movie shooting and playback for a preview of the image
after color grading.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [ Display LUT] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays images with the LUT reflected during movie shooting and playback.
Off:
Does not display images with the LUT reflected during movie shooting and playback.

Hint
If you assign [Display LUT Switch] to [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can switch [ Display LUT] on and off simply by pressing
a button.

Related Topic
Select LUT
Manage User LUTs

TP1001268952

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

223
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Creative Look (still image/movie)

“Look” is a term referring to the looks and impressions of images generated by various factors, such as color, sharpness,
brightness, etc. With [ Creative Look], you can choose the finish of an image by selecting a preferred look from among
preinstalled looks. In addition, you can fine-tune the contrast, highlights, shadows, fade, saturation, sharpness,
sharpness range, and clarity for each “Look.”

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Creative Look].

2 Select the desired “Look” or [Custom Look] using the top/bottom of the control wheel.

3 To adjust (Contrast), (Highlights), (Shadows), (Fade), (Saturation), (Sharpness),

(Sharpness Range) and (Clarity), move to the right using the right side of the control wheel. Select the
desired item using the right/left sides, and then select the value using the top/bottom sides.

4 When selecting [Custom Look], move to the right using the right side of the control wheel, and then select
the desired “Look.”

Using [Custom Look], you can recall the same “Look” presets with slightly different settings.

Menu item details

ST:
Standard finish for a wide range of subjects and scenes.
PT:
For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.

224
 NT:
The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing
image material to be modified with a computer.
VV:
The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers,
spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
VV2:
Creates an image with bright and vivid colors with rich clarity.
FL:
Creates an image with moody finish by applying sharp contrast to the calm coloring as well as the impressive sky and
colors of the greens.
IN:
Creates an image with matte textures by suppressing the contrast and saturation.
SH:
Creates an image with bright, transparent, soft, and vivid mood.
BW:
For shooting images in black and white monotone.
SE:
For shooting images in sepia monotone.
Registering preferred settings (Custom Look):
Select the six custom look (the boxes with numbers on the left side) to register preferred settings. Then select the desired
settings using the right button.
You can recall the same “Look” presets with slightly different settings.

To adjust in greater detail

Based on each “Look,” items such as contrast can be adjusted to your liking. You can adjust not only the preset “Looks,”
but also each [Custom Look], a function that allows you to register your favorite settings.
Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left sides of the control wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom sides
of the control wheel.
When a setting value is changed from the default value, (asterisk) is added next to the “Look” icon displayed on the
shooting screen.

Contrast:
The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on
the image. (-9 to +9)
Highlights:
Adjusts the brightness of the bright areas. When a higher value is selected, the image becomes brighter. (-9 to +9)
Shadows:
Adjusts the darkness of the dark areas. When a higher value is selected, the image becomes brighter. (-9 to +9)
Fade:
Adjusts the degree of fade. A larger value makes the effect greater. (0 to 9)
Saturation:
The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is
restrained and subdued. (-9 to +9)
Sharpness:
Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value
selected, the more the contours are softened. (0 to 9)
Sharpness Range:
Adjust the range where the sharpness effect is applied. A larger value makes the sharpness effect apply to finer outlines.
(1 to 5)
Clarity:
Adjusts the degree of clarity. A larger value makes the effect greater. (0 to 9)

225
To reset adjusted values for each “Look”
Adjusted values such as contrast that you have changed as desired can be collectively reset for each “Look.” Press the
(delete) button on the adjustment screen for the “Look” that you want to reset. All adjusted values that have been
changed will return to their default values.
Hint
For [Sharpness], [Sharpness Range], and [Clarity], take a test shot and either enlarge and play it on the camera monitor, or output
it to a playback device to check the effect. Then, readjust the setting if needed.

Note
[ Creative Look] is fixed to [-] in the following situations:
[ Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].
[Log Shooting] is set to [On (Flexible ISO)].

When this function is set to [BW] or [SE], [Saturation] cannot be adjusted.

In the movie mode, [Sharpness Range] cannot be adjusted.

TP1001248293

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

226
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Picture Profile (still image/movie)

Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc.
For details on “Picture Profile,” refer to
https://helpguide.sony.net/di/pp/v1/en/index.html
Although [ Picture Profile] can be used for both still images and movies, the function is designed mainly for movies.

Customizing the picture profile

You can customize the picture quality by adjusting picture profile items such as [Gamma] and [Detail]. When setting these
parameters, connect the camera to a TV or monitor, and adjust them while observing the picture on the screen.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Picture Profile] → the profile you want to change.

2 Move to the item index screen by pressing the right side of the control wheel.

3 Select the item to change using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

4 Select the desired value using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel and press in the center.

Using the preset of the picture profile

The default settings [PP1] through [PP11] for movies have been set in advance in the camera based on various shooting
conditions.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Picture Profile] → desired setting.

PP1:
Example setting using [Movie] gamma.
PP2:
Example setting using [Still] gamma.
PP3:
Example setting of natural color tone using the [ITU709] gamma.
PP4:
Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard.
PP5:
Example setting using [Cine1] gamma.
PP6:
Example setting using [Cine2] gamma.
PP10:
Example setting for recording HDR movies using [HLG2] gamma.
PP11:
Example setting using [S-Cinetone] gamma.
PPLUT1–PPLUT4 (only when shooting movies):
Shoots and records movies with the user LUT applied.

227
To register user LUTs (PPLUT1–PPLUT4)
You can apply the LUT of your choice to the recorded images by assigning user LUTs registered using [Manage User
LUTs] to PPLUT1–PPLUT4.
Setting procedure:

1. Select PPLUT1–PPLUT4 on the selection screen for [ Picture Profile], and then press the right side of the control
wheel.
2. Select [Basic Look] and press the center.
3. Select a LUT to use as [Basic Look] from the listed user LUTs.

HDR movie recording

The camera can record HDR movies when a gamma from [HLG], [HLG1] to [HLG3] is selected in the picture profile.
Picture profile preset [PP10] provides an example setting for HDR recording. Movies recorded using [PP10] can be
viewed with a wider range of brightness than usual when played back on a TV supporting Hybrid Log-Gamma (HLG).
This way, even scenes with a wide range of brightness can be recorded and displayed faithfully, without looking under or
over-exposed. HLG is used in HDR TV program production, as defined in the international standard Recommendation
ITU-R BT.2100.

Items of the picture profile

Black Level
Sets the black level. (–15 to +15)

Gamma
Selects a gamma curve.
Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies
Still: Standard gamma curve for still images
S-Cinetone: Gamma curve designed to achieve cinematic gradations and color expressions. This setting enables
shooting with softer color reproduction ideal for portrait shooting.
Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a relaxed color movie.
(equivalent to HG4609G33)
Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent to HG4600G30)
Cine3: Intensifies the contrast in light and shade more than [Cine1] and strengthens gradation in black.
Cine4: Strengthens the contrast in dark parts more than [Cine3].
ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU709.
S-Log3: Gamma curve for [S-Log3] with more similar features to film. This setting is based on the assumption that the
picture will be processed after shooting.
HLG: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Equivalent to the HDR standard Hybrid Log-Gamma, ITU-R BT.2100.
HLG1: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Emphasizes noise reduction. However, shooting is restricted to a narrower
dynamic range than with [HLG2] or [HLG3].
HLG2: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Provides a balance of dynamic range and noise reduction.
HLG3: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Wider dynamic range than [HLG2]. However, noise may increase.
[HLG1], [HLG2], and [HLG3] all apply a gamma curve with the same characteristics, but each offers a different
balance between dynamic range and noise reduction. Each has a different maximum video output level, as follows:
[HLG1]: approx. 87%, [HLG2]: approx. 95%, [HLG3]: approx. 100%.

Black Gamma
Corrects gamma in low intensity areas.
[Black Gamma] is fixed at “0” and cannot be adjusted when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)

228
Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7 (maximum black stretch))

Knee
Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high intensity
areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.
When [Gamma] is set to the following, and [Mode] is set to [Auto], [Knee] is unavailable. [Knee] can be used when
[Mode] is set to [Manual].
[Still]
[Cine1]
[Cine2]
[Cine3]
[Cine4]
[S-Log3]
[HLG]
[HLG1]
[HLG2]
[HLG3]

Mode: Selects auto/manual settings.

Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.
Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.

Auto Set: Settings when [Auto] is selected for [Mode ].

Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)
Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High / Mid / Low)

Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected for [Mode].

Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)
Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (steep))

Color Mode
Sets type and level of colors.
In [Color Mode], only [BT.2020] and [709] are available when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie].
Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still].
S-Cinetone: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [S-Cinetone].
Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1] or [Cine2].
Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras (when combined with ITU709
gamma)
ITU709 Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU709 standard (when combined with ITU709 gamma)
Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.
S-Gamut3.Cine: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when
[Gamma] is set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a color space that can easily be converted for digital
cinema.
S-Gamut3: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is
set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a wide color space.
BT.2020: Standard color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
709: Color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3] and movies are recorded with HDTV color
(BT.709).

Saturation
Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)

Color Phase

229
Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)

Color Depth
Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic colors and less effective for
achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting value towards the positive side, and lighter as you
decrease the value towards the negative side. This function is effective even if you set [Color Mode] to [Black & White].
[R] -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)
[G] -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)
[B] -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)
[C] -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)
[M] -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)
[Y] -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)

Detail
Sets items for [Detail].
Level: Sets the [Detail] level. (-7 to +7)
Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.
Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details are set manually.))
V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to
the horizontal (H) side))
B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W). (Type1 (off to the lower
DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side))
Limit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit level: unlikely to be limited))
Crispening: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening level))
Hi-Light Detail: Sets the [Detail] level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)

To copy the settings to another picture profile number

You can copy the settings of the picture profile to another picture profile number.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Picture Profile] → desired setting → [Copy].

To reset the picture profile to the default setting

You can reset the picture profile to the default setting. You cannot reset all picture profile settings at once.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Picture Profile] → desired setting → [Reset].

Note
If you want to select different settings for movies and still images, add a check mark to [Picture Profile] under [Different Set for
Still/Mv].

If you develop RAW images with shooting settings, the following settings are not reflected:
Black Level
Black Gamma
Knee
Color Depth

If you change [Gamma], the available ISO value range changes.

There may be more noise in dark parts depending on the gamma settings. It may improve by setting the lens compensation to
[Off].

When using the S-Log3 gamma, noise becomes more noticeable compared to when using other gammas. If the noise is still
considerable even after processing the images, it may be improved by shooting with a brighter setting. However, the dynamic
range becomes narrower accordingly when you shoot with a brighter setting. We recommend checking the picture in advance by
test shooting when using S-Log3.

Setting [S-Log3] may cause an error in the white balance custom setup. In this case, perform custom setup with a gamma other
than [S-Log3] first, and then reselect the [S-Log3] gamma.

Setting PPLUT1–PPLUT4 may cause an error in the white balance custom setup. In this case, first perform the custom setup with
a setting other than PPLUT1–PPLUT4, and then reselect PPLUT1–PPLUT4.

230
 If you set [Slope] to +5 in [Manual Set] under [Knee], [Knee] will be disabled.

S-Gamut3.Cine and S-Gamut3 are color spaces exclusive to Sony. However, this camera's S-Gamut setting does not support the
whole S-Gamut color space; it is a setting to achieve a color reproduction equivalent to S-Gamut.

[ Picture Profile] is fixed to [Off] in the following situation:

[Log Shooting] is set to [On (Flexible ISO)]

Related Topic
Gamma Display Assist
Different Set for Still/Mv

TP1001257092

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

231
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Soft Skin Effect (still image/movie)

Sets the effect used for shooting the skin smoothly when a face is recognized.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Soft Skin Effect] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not use the [ Soft Skin Effect] function.
On:
Uses the [ Soft Skin Effect]. You can set the effect level by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel. ([On:
High]/[On: Mid]/[On: Low])

Note
[ Soft Skin Effect] is not available when [ File Format] is set to [RAW].

[ Soft Skin Effect] is not available for RAW images when [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG]/[RAW & HEIF].

[ Soft Skin Effect] is not available when you use the digital zoom function in the still image shooting mode.

TP1001268213

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

232
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Drive Mode

Select the appropriate mode for the subject, such as single shooting, continuous shooting or bracketing shooting.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel → desired setting.

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

Menu item details

Single Shooting:
Normal shooting mode.
Cont. Shooting:
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Self-timer(Single) :
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was
pressed.
Self-timer(Cont):
Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since
the shutter button was pressed.
Cont. Bracket:
Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of exposure.
Single Bracket:
Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degrees of exposure.
Focus Bracket:
Shoots multiple images while shifting the focus position.
WB bracket:
Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color
temperature and color filter.
DRO Bracket:
Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.

Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and [Sports Action] is selected, [Single Shooting] cannot be performed.

Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Self-timer(Single)
Self-timer(Cont)
Cont. Bracket

233
Single Bracket
Focus Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket

TP1001248277

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

234
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Cont. Shooting

Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Cont. Shooting].

You can also set the continuous shooting by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive
Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

Menu item details

Continuous Shooting: Hi+ / Continuous Shooting: Hi / Continuous Shooting: Mid/
Continuous Shooting: Lo

Number of still images recordable with continuous shooting

The following table shows estimated numbers of recordable still images with [Drive Mode] set to [Continuous Shooting:
Hi+]. The numbers may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the memory card.

Image Size:[L: 12M]

Number of images when JPEG Number of images when HEIF

File Format
is selected is selected

JPEG/HEIF (Fine) Approx. 1 000 images or more Approx. 1 000 images or more

RAW (Compressed RAW) Approx. 1 000 images or more Approx. 1 000 images or more

RAW & JPEG/RAW & HEIF (Compressed

Approx. 416 images or more Approx. 1 000 images or more
RAW)*

RAW (Uncompressed RAW) Approx. 85 images or more Approx. 85 images or more

RAW & JPEG/RAW & HEIF (Uncompressed

Approx. 57 images or more Approx. 63 images or more
RAW)*

RAW (Lossless compression RAW) Approx. 1 000 images or more Approx. 1 000 images or more

RAW & JPEG/RAW & HEIF (Lossless

Approx. 92 images Approx. 120 images
compression RAW)*

* When [JPEG Quality]/[HEIF Quality] is set to [Fine].

Hint
To continuously adjust the focus and exposure during continuous shooting, set as follows:
[ Focus Mode]: [Continuous AF]

235
 [AEL w/ Shutter]: [Off] or [Auto]

Note
When the F-value is greater than F11 in [Continuous Shooting: Hi+], [Continuous Shooting: Hi] or [Continuous Shooting: Mid]
mode, the focus is locked to the setting in the first shot.

The subject is not displayed in real time on the monitor during continuous shooting in the [Continuous Shooting: Hi+] mode.

Continuous shooting is unavailable in the following situations:

The shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and a scene other than [Sports Action] is selected.

The speed of continuous shooting decreases when shooting in uncompressed RAW or lossless compressed RAW.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
AEL w/ Shutter

TP1001248278

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

236
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Self-timer(Single)

Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was
pressed. Use the 5-second/10-second self-timer when you are going to be in the picture, and use the 2-second self-timer
to reduce camera-shake caused by pressing the shutter button.

1 Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Self-timer(Single)].

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

The self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and a picture is taken after the designated number of seconds have
elapsed.

Menu item details

The mode determines the number of seconds until a picture is taken after the shutter button is pressed.

Self-timer(Single): 10 sec
Self-timer(Single): 5 sec
Self-timer(Single): 2 sec

Hint
Press the shutter button again or press / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel to stop the count of the self-timer.

Press / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel and select (Single Shooting) to cancel the self-timer.

Set [Audio signals] to [Off] to turn off the beeping sound during the self-timer countdown.

To use the self-timer in bracket mode, select bracket mode under drive mode, then select MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive
Mode] → [Bracket Settings] → [Selftimer during Bracket].

Note
The self-timer is unavailable in the following situations:
[Sports Action] under [Scene Selection]

Related Topic
Audio signals

TP1001224821

237
5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

238
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Self-timer(Cont)

Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since
the shutter button was pressed. You can choose the best from multiple shots.

1 Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Self-timer(Cont)].

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

The self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and pictures are taken after the designated number of seconds has
elapsed. The designated number of pictures are taken continuously.

Menu item details

For example, three images are shot when 10 seconds have elapsed after the shutter button is pressed when [Self-
timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.] is selected.

Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.

Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 5 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 5 Sec. 3 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 5 Sec. 5 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 2 Sec. 3 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 2 Sec. 5 Img.

Hint
Press the shutter button again or press / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel to stop the count of the self-timer.

Press / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel and select (Single Shooting) to cancel the self-timer.

TP1001224822

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

239
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Cont. Bracket

Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and then to lighter. You can select
an image that suits your purpose after recording.

1 Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Cont. Bracket].

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

Keep pressing and holding the shutter button until bracket shooting is finished.

Menu item details

For example, the camera shoots a total of three images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 0.3
EV when [Cont. Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image] is selected.

Hint
The last shot is shown on the auto review.

Note
When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other
than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.

When the exposure is compensated, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.

Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]
[Scene Selection]
When [ Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off]

When the flash is used, the product performs flash bracket shooting, which shifts the amount of flash light even if [Cont. Bracket]
is selected. Press the shutter button for each image.

Related Topic
Bracket Settings
Indicator during bracket shooting

TP1001224823

240
5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

241
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Single Bracket

Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and then to lighter. You can select
the image that suits your purpose after recording.
Since a single picture is taken each time you press the shutter button, you can adjust the focus or the composition for
each shot.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Single Bracket].

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

Press the shutter button for each image.

Menu item details

For example, when [Single Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image] is selected, three images are shot one at a time with the exposure
value shifted up and down in increments of 0.3 EV.

Note
When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other
than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.

When the exposure is compensated, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.

Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]
[Scene Selection]
When [ Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off]

Related Topic
Bracket Settings
Indicator during bracket shooting

TP1001248250

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

242
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Indicator during bracket shooting

On the [Display All Info.] or [Histogram] screen, you can use the bracket indicator to confirm the bracket shooting
settings.

Ambient light* bracketing

3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps
Exposure compensation ±0.0 EV

Flash bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.7 EV steps
Flash compensation -1.0 EV

* Ambient light: A generic term for non-flash light including natural light, electric bulb and fluorescent lighting. Whereas the flash light blinks for a
moment, ambient light is constant, so this kind of light is called "ambient light."

Hint
During bracket shooting, guides equal to the number of images to be shot are displayed over/under the bracket indicator.

When you start single bracket shooting, the guides will disappear one by one as the camera records images.

TP1001248285

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

243
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Focus Bracket

Performs continuous shooting automatically while shifting the focus position. This function can be used to shoot images
for depth-of-field composite images that are in focus at all points (focus stacking), or to select the optimum focus position
from among multiple images.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel → [Focus Bracket].

You can also set the focus bracket by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode].

2 Press the right side of the control wheel and set [Step Width] and [Number of Shots].

Step Width: Selects the degree to which the focus is shifted within the range of 1 to 10. The higher the number,
the more the focus will shift.
Number of Shots: Sets the number of shots taken with one release within the range of 2 to 299 for each
position.

3 Point the cursor at the ones place of the number of shots and press the right side of the control wheel to
open [Focus Bracket Settings]. Then select [Focus Bracket Order].

[0→+]: Shifts the focus from the current focus position toward infinity. When the focus reaches infinity, shooting
ends even if the set number of shots has not been reached.
[0→-→+]: Takes three images in the order of the current focus position, front focus, and rear focus. At this time,
the number of shots set in Step 2 becomes invalid.
You can also set [Focus Bracket Order] from [Drive Mode] → [Bracket Settings] → [Focus Bracket Settings] →
[Focus Bracket Order].

4 Press down the shutter button to shoot.

Hint
The [Step Width] value is a relative value, and the focus interval varies depending on shooting conditions such as the aperture of
the lens and the initial focus position. It is recommended that you take a test shot to find the appropriate focus width.

[Shooting Interval], [Exposure Smoothing], and [Focus Brckt Saving Dest] for the focus bracket can be set from [Bracket Settings].

Note
If the camera or lens moves while shooting with the focus bracket, focus stacking may not be successful. Use a tripod when
shooting for focus stacking.

Related Topic
Bracket Settings

TP1001268981

244
5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

245
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

WB bracket

Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color
temperature and color filter.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [WB bracket].

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

Menu item details

White Balance Bracket: Lo:
Records a series of three images with small changes in the white balance (within the range of 10MK-1*).
White Balance Bracket: Hi:
Records a series of three images with large changes in the white balance (within the range of 20MK-1*).
*MK-1 is the unit that indicates the capability of color temperature conversion filters and indicates the same value as
"mired."

Hint
The last shot is shown on the auto review.

Related Topic
Bracket Settings

TP1001248280

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

246
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

DRO Bracket

You can record a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer value.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [DRO Bracket].

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

Menu item details

DRO Bracket: Lo:
Records a series of three images with small changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv 2, and Lv 3).
DRO Bracket: Hi:
Records a series of three images with large changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv 3, and Lv 5).

Hint
The last shot is shown on the auto review.

Related Topic
Bracket Settings

TP1001224825

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

247
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Bracket Settings

Sets self-timer shooting, the shooting order for the exposure bracket / white balance bracket, and the shooting method
for the focus bracket in the bracket shooting mode.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Bracket Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Selftimer during Bracket:
Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if
using the self-timer.
(Off/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order:
Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
(0→-→+/-→0→+)
Focus Bracket Order:
Sets the shooting order for the focus bracket. ([0→+]/[0→-→+])
Exposure Smoothing:
Sets whether to automatically adjust the exposure while shooting with the focus bracket. ([On]/[Off])
Shooting Interval:
Sets the shooting interval when shooting with the focus bracket. ([Shortest]/[1 Sec]/[2 Sec]/[3 Sec]/[5 Sec]/[10 Sec]/[15
sec]/[30 Sec])
Focus Brckt Saving Dest:
Sets the save destination folder for still images taken with the focus bracket. ([Current Folder]/[New Folder])

Note
When [0→-→+] is selected for [Focus Bracket Order], the number of shots taken with the focus bracket is fixed at three.

Related Topic
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
Focus Bracket

TP1001248717

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

248
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Self-timer (movie)

You can start shooting with the self-timer when recording a movie.

1 Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel.

The [ Self-timer] setting screen will be displayed.

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Option] → [ Self-
timer].

2 Select [On] using the control wheel and set the desired countdown time.

Rec Start delay: Sets the count time until the start of movie recording. (3 s/5 s/10 s)

Repetition: Sets whether to repeat the movie self-timer. (Repeat/Only Once)

If you select [Repeat], the movie self-timer will be activated repeatedly even after movie recording is completed.
If you select [Only Once], the movie self-timer will be canceled after movie recording is completed, and the
camera will return to the normal movie recording standby mode.

3 Adjust the focus and press the MOVIE (movie) button.

When the countdown appears on the recording standby screen, the self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and
recording starts after the designated number of seconds has elapsed.
Press the MOVIE button again to end recording.

Menu item details

On:
Uses the movie self-timer function.
Off:
Does not use the movie self-timer function.

Hint
To stop the self-timer countdown, press the MOVIE button again or press the button to which the [ Self-timer] function is
assigned.

Note
If you press the MOVIE button in the still image shooting mode to start movie recording, [ Self-timer] will not work.

TP1001268935

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

249
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Interval Shoot Func.

You can automatically shoot a series of still images with the shooting interval and number of shots that you set in
advance (Interval shooting). You can then create a time-lapse movie from the still images produced by interval shooting
using the computer software Imaging Edge Desktop (Viewer).

For details on time-lapse movies, refer to the support page for Imaging Edge Desktop.
https://www.sony.net/disoft/help/

For details on time-lapse movies recorded with this camera, refer to “ Shoot Mode (still image)/Shoot Mode
(movie)/Shoot Mode (S&Q/time-lapse) ” and “ Time-lapse Settings .”

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval Shooting] → [On].

2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Interval Shoot Func.] → Select an item to set, and then select
the desired setting.

3 Press the shutter button.

When the time set for [Shooting Start Time] has elapsed, shooting will start.

When the number of shots set for [Number of Shots] is completed, the camera will return to the standby screen
for interval shooting.

Menu item details

Interval Shooting:
Sets whether to perform interval shooting. ([Off]/[On])
Shooting Start Time:
Sets the time from when you press the shutter button to when interval shooting starts. (1 second to 99 minutes 59
seconds)
Shooting Interval:
Sets the shooting interval (time from when one exposure starts to when the exposure for the next shot starts). (1 second
to 60 seconds)
Number of Shots:
Sets the number of shots for interval shooting. (1 shot to 9 999 shots)
AE Tracking Sensitivity:
Sets the tracking sensitivity of the auto exposure against the change in luminance during interval shooting. If you select
[Low], exposure changes during interval shooting will be smoother. ([High]/[Mid]/[Low])
Shoot Interval Priority:
Sets whether or not to prioritize the shooting interval when the exposure mode is [Program Auto] or [Aperture Priority]
and the shutter speed becomes longer than the time set for [Shooting Interval]. ([Off]/[On])

Hint

250
 If you press the shutter button during interval shooting, interval shooting will end and the camera will return to the standby screen
for interval shooting.

To return to the normal shooting mode, set [Interval Shooting] to [Off].

If you press a key to which one of the following functions has been assigned at the moment when shooting starts, the function will
remain active during interval shooting even without you holding down the button.
[AEL hold]
[ AEL hold]
[AF/MF Selector Hold]
[Regist. AF Area hold]
[AWB Lock Hold]
[FEL Lock hold]
[FEL Lock/AEL hold]

If you set [Display as Group] to [On], still images shot with the interval shooting function will be displayed in groups.

Still images shot with interval shooting can be played back continuously on the camera. If you intend to create a movie using the
still images, you can preview the result.

Note
You may not be able to record the set number of images depending on the remaining battery level and the amount of free space
on the recording medium. Supply power via USB while shooting, and use a memory card with sufficient space.

When the shooting interval is short, the camera may get hot easily. Depending on the ambient temperature, you may not be able
to record the set number of images because the camera may stop recording to protect the equipment.

During interval shooting (including the time between pressing the shutter button and the start of shooting), you cannot operate the
dedicated shooting setting screen or MENU screen. However, you can adjust some settings such as the shutter speed with using
the customized dial or control wheel.

During interval shooting, auto review is not displayed.

Interval shooting is unavailable in the following situations:

The shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto]

Related Topic
Cont. Play for Interval
Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)

TP1001263924

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

251
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

File Format (still image)

Sets the file format for still images.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ File Format] → desired setting.

Menu item details

RAW:
Digital processing is not performed on this file format. Select this format to process images on a computer for
professional purposes.
RAW & JPEG/RAW & HEIF:
A RAW image and a JPEG or HEIF image are created at the same time. This is suitable when you need two image files,
a JPEG or HEIF for viewing, and a RAW for editing.
JPEG/HEIF:
The image is recorded in the JPEG or HEIF format.

About RAW images

To open a RAW image file recorded with this camera, the software Imaging Edge Desktop is needed. With Imaging
Edge Desktop, you can open a RAW image file, then convert it into a popular image format such as JPEG or TIFF, or
readjust the white balance, saturation or contrast of the image.
RAW images recorded with this camera have a resolution of 14 bits per pixel.
You can set the compression format for RAW images using [RAW File Type].

Note
If you do not intend to edit the images on your computer, we recommend that you record in JPEG or HEIF format.

An environment supporting the HEIF format is required to play back HEIF images.

Related Topic
RAW File Type
JPEG/HEIF Switch
JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality
JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size
Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)

TP1001262847

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

252
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

RAW File Type

Selects the file type for RAW images.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [RAW File Type] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Uncompressed:
Records images in uncompressed RAW format. When [Uncompressed] is selected for [RAW File Type], the file size of
the image will be larger than if it were recorded in [Lossless Comp] or [Compressed].
Lossless Comp:
Records images in lossless compression format with high compression ratio without deterioration of image quality. The
file size of the image will be smaller than if it were recorded in [Uncompressed].
Compressed:
Records images in compressed RAW format. The file size of the image will be approximately half of that with
[Uncompressed].

Hint
Icons for RAW file type are displayed as follows:
Uncompressed:
Lossless Comp:
Compressed:

The aspect ratio for RAW images will always be 3:2. When recording a RAW image and a JPEG or HEIF image at the same time,
the JPEG or HEIF image will be recorded with the value set in [Aspect Ratio].

The image size for RAW images corresponds to the “L” size for JPEG images.

Related Topic
File Format (still image)
JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size

TP1001257103

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

253
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

JPEG/HEIF Switch

Switches the file format (JPEG / HEIF) of the still image to be recorded.
The JPEG format has general compatibility. You can view and edit JPEG files in various environments. The HEIF format
has high compression efficiency. The camera can record with high image quality and small file sizes in the HEIF format.
Depending on the computer or software, you may not be able to view or edit HEIF files. In addition, a HEIF-compatible
environment is required to play back still images in the HEIF format. You can enjoy high-quality still images by connecting
the camera and the TV via HDMI.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [JPEG/HEIF Switch] → desired setting.

Menu item details

JPEG:
Performs digital processing on the RAW file and records it in the JPEG format. This setting gives priority to compatibility.
HEIF(4:2:0):
Performs digital processing on the RAW file and records it in the HEIF (4:2:0) format. This setting gives priority to image
quality and compression efficiency.
HEIF(4:2:2):
Performs digital processing on the RAW file and records it in the HEIF (4:2:2) format. This setting gives priority to image
quality.

Hint
Depending on the setting for [JPEG/HEIF Switch], items related to the file format ([ File Format], etc.) will switch to JPEG or
HEIF.

Note
HEIF image files recorded with this camera cannot be displayed on other cameras that do not support the HEIF file format. Be
careful not to accidentally erase HEIF image files by formatting the memory card or deleting the files.

When recording in the HEIF format with [HLG Still Image] set to [Off], the color space is recorded in sRGB. When [HLG Still
Image] is set to [On], it is recorded in the BT.2100 color space (BT.2020 color gamut).

Related Topic
File Format (still image)

TP1001265430

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

254
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality

Selects the image quality when recording JPEG or HEIF images.

1 MENU→ (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [JPEG Quality]/[HEIF Quality] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Extra fine/Fine/Standard:
Since the compression rate increases from [Extra fine] to [Fine] to [Standard], the file size decreases in the same order.
This allows more files to be recorded on one memory card, but the image quality is lower.

Related Topic
File Format (still image)

TP1001262789

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

255
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size

The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The
smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF Image Size] → desired setting.

Menu item details

When [Aspect Ratio] is set to 3:2

Setting values Pixel number (horizontal×vertical)

L: 12M 4240×2832 pixels

M: 5.1M 2768×1848 pixels

S: 3.0M 2128×1416 pixels

When [Aspect Ratio] is set to 4:3

Setting values Pixel number (horizontal×vertical)

L: 11M 3776×2832 pixels

M: 4.6M 2464×1848 pixels

S: 2.7M 1888×1416 pixels

When [Aspect Ratio] is set to 16:9

Setting values Pixel number (horizontal×vertical)

L: 10M 4240×2384 pixels

M: 4.3M 2768×1560 pixels

S: 2.6M 2128×1200 pixels

When [Aspect Ratio] is set to 1:1

256
 Setting values Pixel number (horizontal×vertical)

L: 8.0M 2832×2832 pixels

M: 3.4M 1840×1840 pixels

S: 2.0M 1408×1408 pixels

Note
The image size for RAW images corresponds to “L.”

Related Topic
File Format (still image)
Aspect Ratio

TP1001262846

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

257
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Aspect Ratio

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [Aspect Ratio] → desired setting.

Menu item details

3:2:
Same aspect ratio as 35 mm film
4:3:
The aspect ratio is 4:3.
16:9:
The aspect ratio is 16:9.
1:1:
The aspect ratio is 1:1.

TP1001248260

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

258
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

HLG Still Image

By using gamma characteristics equivalent to HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma: standard for HDR images), you can shoot still
images with a wide dynamic range and a wide color gamut compatible with BT.2020.
[HLG Still Image] can only be set when shooting in the HEIF format. Set [JPEG/HEIF Switch] to [HEIF(4:2:0)] or
[HEIF(4:2:2)], and [ File Format] to [HEIF] beforehand.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [HLG Still Image] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Shoots HLG still images.
Off:
Shoots normal still images.

Hint
You can reproduce a wider range of brightness by playing back HLG still images on an HLG-compatible TV or monitor.

You can display HLG still images on the camera’s monitor in almost the same quality as when they are displayed on an HLG-
(BT.2020-) compatible monitor by setting as follows.
[Gamma Display Assist]: [On]
[Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.]: [Auto] or [HLG(BT.2020)]

Note
In the following situations, [HLG Still Image] is fixed to [Off]:
[JPEG/HEIF Switch] is set to [JPEG]
[ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & HEIF]
When a shooting mode other than P / A / S / M is set during still image shooting

When [HLG Still Image] is set to [On], the following functions are not available.
[D-Range Optimizer]
[ Creative Look]
[DRO Bracket] under [Drive Mode]
[ Picture Profile]

When [HLG Still Image] is set to [On], the available ISO range changes.

Related Topic
JPEG/HEIF Switch
Gamma Display Assist

TP1001265432

259
5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

260
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Color Space

The way colors are represented using combinations of numbers or the range of color reproduction is called “color space.”
You can change the color space depending on the purpose of the image.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [Color Space] → desired setting.

Menu item details

sRGB:
This is the standard color space of the digital camera. Use [sRGB] in normal shooting, such as when you intend to print
out the images without any modification.
AdobeRGB:
This color space has a wide range of color reproduction. When a large part of the subject is vivid green or red, Adobe
RGB is effective. The file name of the recorded image starts with “_.”

Note
The [Color Space] setting is invalid when shooting images in the HEIF format. If [HLG Still Image] is set to [Off], images will be
recorded with the sRGB color space. When [HLG Still Image] is set to [On], it is recorded in the BT.2100 color space (BT.2020
color gamut).

[AdobeRGB] is for applications or printers that support color management and DCF2.0 option color space. Images may not be
printed or viewed in the correct colors if you use applications or printers that do not support Adobe RGB.

When displaying images that were recorded with [AdobeRGB] on non-Adobe RGB-compliant devices, the images will be
displayed with low saturation.

Related Topic
JPEG/HEIF Switch
HLG Still Image

TP1001224865

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

261
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

File Format (movie)

Selects the movie file format.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ File Format] → desired setting.

Menu item details

File
Characteristics
Format

Records 4K movies in the XAVC HS format.

The XAVC HS format uses the HEVC codec, which has high compression efficiency. The camera can
XAVC HS
record movies with higher image quality than XAVC S movies but the same data volume. Long GOP
4K
compression is used for movies.

XAVC S
Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160). Long GOP compression is used for movies.
4K

XAVC S
Records movies in HD resolution (1920×1080). Long GOP compression is used for movies.
HD

Records movies in the XAVC S-I format.

XAVC S-I The XAVC S-I format uses Intra compression for movies. This format is more suitable for editing than
4K Long GOP compression.

Records movies in the XAVC S-I format.

XAVC S-I The XAVC S-I format uses Intra compression for movies. This format is more suitable for editing than
HD Long GOP compression.

Intra/Long GOP is a movie compression format. Intra compresses the movie by frame, and Long GOP compresses
multiple frames. Intra compression has better response and flexibility when editing, but Long GOP compression has
better compression efficiency.

Note
To play back XAVC HS 4K movies on a smartphone or computer, you need a device or software with high processing capability
that supports the HEVC codec.

When recording 4K movies, [ Shooting] becomes disabled and locked to [Off].

If an APS-C size dedicated lens is attached, the edges of the screen may appear dark. When recording 4K movies with this
camera, we recommend using a lens compatible with the 35 mm full-frame format.

262
Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used

TP1001248295

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

263
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Movie Settings (movie)

Sets the frame rate, bit rate, color information, etc.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ Movie Settings] → [Rec Frame Rate] → desired
setting.

2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ Movie Settings] → [Record Setting] → desired

setting.

Example of setting values

(A): Bit rate

(B): Color sampling
(C): Bit depth

The higher the bit rate, the higher the image quality.
Color sampling (4:2:2, 4:2:0) is the recording ratio of color information. The more uniform this ratio is, the better
the color reproducibility, and it is possible to remove colors neatly even when compositing using a green screen.
Bit depth represents the gradation of luminance information. When the bit depth is 8 bits, 256 levels of gradation
can be obtained. When the bit depth is 10 bits, 1024 levels of gradation can be obtained. A larger value enables
smoother expression from dark to bright areas.
[4:2:2 10 bit] is a setting that assumes that the recorded movie will be edited on a computer. The playback
environment for [4:2:2 10 bit] is limited.

Menu item details

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC HS 4K]

Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format

60p/50p 200M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

60p/50p 150M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

60p/50p 100M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

60p/50p 75M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

60p/50p 45M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

24p* 100M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

24p* 100M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

264
 Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format

24p* 50M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

24p* 50M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

24p* 30M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]

Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format

60p/50p 200M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

60p/50p 150M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

30p/25p 140M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

30p/25p 100M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

30p/25p 60M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

24p* 100M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

24p* 100M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

24p* 60M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]

Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format

60p/50p 50M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

60p/50p 50M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

60p/50p 25M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

30p/25p 50M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

30p/25p 50M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

30p/25p 16M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

24p* 50M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

24p* 50M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

120p/100p 100M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

120p/100p 60M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.

265
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K]

Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format

60p/50p 600M 4:2:2 10bit/500M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Intra

30p/25p 300M 4:2:2 10bit/250M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Intra

24p* 240M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Intra

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S-I HD]

Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format

60p/50p 222M 4:2:2 10bit/185M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Intra

30p/25p 111M 4:2:2 10bit/93M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Intra

24p* 89M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Intra

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.

Note
Recording frame rates are indicated as the closest integer values. The actual corresponding frame rates are as follows:
24p: 23.98 fps, 30p: 29.97 fps, 60p: 59.94 fps, and 120p: 119.88 fps.

Related Topic
File Format (movie)

TP1001248296

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

266
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

S&Q Settings

You can record a moment that cannot be captured by the naked eye (slow-motion recording), or record a long-term
phenomenon into a compressed movie (quick-motion recording). For example, you can record an intense sports scene,
the moment when a bird starts to fly, a blooming flower, and a changing view of clouds or a starry sky. Sound will not be
recorded.

1 Set the Still/Movie/S&Q switch to S&Q (S&Q Motion).

2 Select [S&Q Motion] on the [ Shoot Mode] screen, and then use the left/right side of the control
wheel to select the desired shooting mode (Intelligent Auto, Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter
Priority, or Manual Exposure).

The [ Shoot Mode] screen is not displayed when [Shoot Mode Sel. Screen] is set to [Not Displayed].
Select MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode], and then select the desired
shooting mode for [S&Q Motion].

3 Select MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ S&Q Settings] → Select an item to set, and
then select the desired setting.

4 Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.

Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

Menu item details

Frame Rate Settings:
Selects the frame rate of the movie and the shooting frame rate.
Record Setting:
Selects the bit rate, color sampling, and bit depth of the movie.

The format of the recorded movie will be the same as the [ File Format] setting.

Playback speed
The playback speed will vary as below depending on the value set for [ Frame Rate Settings].

When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

Frame Rec Frame Rec Frame Rate: Rec Frame Rec Frame Rate:
Rate Rate: 24p 30p*1 Rate: 60p 120p *2

120fps *3 5 times slower 4 times slower 2 times slower Normal playback speed

267
 Frame Rec Frame Rec Frame Rate: Rec Frame Rec Frame Rate:
Rate Rate: 24p 30p*1 Rate: 60p 120p *2

Normal playback
60fps 2.5 times slower 2 times slower 2 times quick
speed

30fps 1.25 times slower Normal playback speed 2 times quick 4 times quick

15fps 1.6 times quick 2 times quick 4 times quick 8 times quick

8fps 3 times quick 3.75 times quick 7.5 times quick 15 times quick

4fps 6 times quick 7.5 times quick 15 times quick 30 times quick

2fps 12 times quick 15 times quick 30 times quick 60 times quick

1fps 24 times quick 30 times quick 60 times quick 120 times quick

When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL

Frame Rate Rec Frame Rate: 25p *1 Rec Frame Rate: 50p Rec Frame Rate: 100p *2

100fps *3 4 times slower 2 times slower Normal playback speed

50fps 2 times slower Normal playback speed 2 times quick

25fps Normal playback speed 2 times quick 4 times quick

12fps 2.08 times quick 4.16 times quick 8.33 times quick

6fps 4.16 times quick 8.33 times quick 16.66 times quick

3fps 8.33 times quick 16.66 times quick 33.33 times quick

2fps 12.5 times quick 25 times quick 50 times quick

1fps 25 times quick 50 times quick 100 times quick

*1 [30p]/[25p] cannot be selected when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC HS 4K].

*2 [120p]/[100p] cannot be selected when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K] or [XAVC S-I HD].
*3 [120fps]/[100fps] cannot be selected when [ File Format] is set to following items:

XAVC HS 4K
XAVC S 4K
XAVC S-I 4K

Hint
For an estimation of recordable time, refer to “Recordable movie times.”

Note
In slow-motion/quick-motion recording, the actual shooting time differs from the time recorded in the movie. The recordable time
displayed toward the top of the monitor shows the remaining recording time for the movie, not the remaining recording time on the
memory card.

In slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this
happens, decrease the aperture value or set the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

268
 During slow-motion/quick-motion recording, the following functions are not available.
[Time Code Run] under [TC/UB]
[Time Code Output] under [ HDMI Output Settings]

Related Topic
Recordable movie times
Memory cards that can be used

TP1001257061

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

269
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Time-lapse Settings

You can record movies by condensing changes over a period of time of up to several dozen minutes. Unlike quick-motion
movie recording, you can set a shooting interval longer than 1 second. This enables you to record movies with a larger
time compression ratio. Sound will not be recorded. When creating longer time-lapse movies, use the “ Interval Shoot
Func. .”

Configure settings such as the recording frame rate and shooting interval in [ Time-lapse Settings].
When shooting a time-lapse movie, set the Still/Movie/S&Q switch to S&Q, and select the shooting mode for time-lapse
shooting from MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode].

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ Time-lapse Settings] → Select an item to set, and
then select the desired setting.

Menu item details

Frame Rate Settings:
Sets the recording frame rate and shooting interval.
Rec Frame Rate: Sets the recording frame rate for a time-lapse movie. (60p/50p/30p*/25p*/24p)
* [30p]/[25p] cannot be selected when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC HS 4K].
Interval Time: Sets the shooting interval for a time-lapse movie. (1 to 60 seconds)

For the first 10 seconds, the interval can be set in units of 1 second. For the 10th to 60th second, the interval can be
set in units of 10 seconds.
When the file format is set to 4K, you cannot select a value of 6 seconds or longer.
The interval time is the interval from the start of exposure to the start of the next exposure, regardless of shutter
speed.

Record Setting:
Selects the bit rate, color sampling, and bit depth of the movie.

Video Light Setting:

When a video light (sold separately) is attached, you can turn the video light on before each frame for the time-lapse
movie is recorded. Sets how many seconds before the light turns on. (Off/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)

About the recordable time

Approximate times for continuous shooting in the time-lapse shooting mode are as follows. (When [Auto Power OFF
Temp.] is set to [High] and the ambient temperature is 25°C (77°F))

When [ File Format] is set to HD：approx. 60 minutes

When [ File Format] is set to 4K：approx. 30 minutes
HD: XAVC S HD (60p 50M/50p 50M 4:2:0 8bit, when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi; when the monitor is open)
4K: XAVC S 4K (60p 150M/50p 150M 4:2:0 8bit, when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi; when the monitor is open)

Using a video light

270
When a video light is attached in the time-lapse shooting mode, the video light will turn on before recording starts in order
to control the light correctly from the first frame.
After recording starts, the video light will turn on/off repeatedly in conjunction with shooting/standby for each frame.

(A) Start of recording

(B) End of recording
(C) Video light on (At the start of recording, the video light turns on earlier than the number of seconds set in [ Video
Light Setting])
(D) Video light off (The video light remains dimly lit when [Video Light Mode] is set to [REC Link&STBY])

In the following cases, however, the video light will remain lit even during shooting standby:

When [ Video Light Setting] is set to [Off].

When the time from the end of the frame shooting to the start of the next lighting is 5 seconds or less according to the
settings for [ Interval Time] and [ Video Light Setting].

(A) Start of recording

(B) End of recording
(C) Video light on
Hint
When [Video Light Mode] is set to [Power Link], the video light turns on/off in conjunction with the power, regardless of the [
Video Light Setting] setting.

To enable interval operation with [ Video Light Setting], set [Video Light Mode] to [REC Link] or [REC Link&STBY].

When you shoot a long time-lapse movie, it is recommended that you use an external power supply for the camera.

When [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High], the camera can continue movie recording even when the temperature of the
camera becomes high.

At the end of the time-lapse movie, a normal-speed movie may be recorded for about 1 second.

Related Topic
Interval Shoot Func.
Shoot Mode (still image)/Shoot Mode (movie)/Shoot Mode (S&Q/time-lapse)
Video Light Mode

TP1001271271

271
5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

272
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Proxy Settings

You can simultaneously record a low-bit-rate proxy movie while recording a movie, slow-motion/quick-motion movie, or
time-lapse movie.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ Proxy Settings] → Select an item to set, and then
select the desired setting.

Menu item details

Proxy Recording:
Selects whether to simultaneously record proxy movies. ([On] / [Off])
Proxy File Format:
Selects the recording format of the proxy movie. ([XAVC HS HD] / [XAVC S HD])
Proxy Rec. Settings:
Selects the bit rate, color sampling and bit depth of the proxy movie. ([16M 4:2:0 10bit] / [9M 4:2:0 10bit] / [6M 4:2:0 8bit])

Selectable proxy recording settings

Proxy File Recording Recording frame Proxy Rec.

Compression codec
Format size rate Settings

16Mbps 4:2:0 10bit

MPEG-H
XAVC HS HD 1920×1080 Max. 60p/Max. 50p 9Mbps 4:2:0 10bit
HEVC/H.265

XAVC S HD 1280×720 Max. 60p/Max. 50p 6Mbps 4:2:0 8bit MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

Hint
Proxy movies are not displayed on the playback screen (single-image playback screen or image index screen). (proxy) is
displayed over movies for which a proxy movie was simultaneously recorded.

Note
Proxy movies cannot be played back on this camera.

Proxy recording is not available in the following situations.

Normal movie recording

[Rec Frame Rate] is set to [120p]/[100p]

Slow-motion recording/quick-motion recording

The recording frame rate is set to [120p]/[100p]

The frame rate is set to [120fps]/[100fps]

273
 Deleting/protecting movies that have proxy movies removes/protects both the original and proxy movies. You cannot
delete/protect only original movies or proxy movies.

Movies cannot be edited on this camera.

Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used

TP1001262536

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

274
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

APS-C S35 (Super 35mm) Shooting (still image/movie)

Sets whether or not to record with the angle of view of APS-C for still images and with an angle of view equivalent to
Super 35mm for movies. If you select [On] or [Auto], you can use an APS-C size dedicated lens on this product.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ Shooting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Records in either APS-C-equivalent size or Super 35mm-equivalent size.
When [On] is selected, the angle of view becomes approximately 1.5 times the focal length indicated on the lens.
Auto:
Automatically sets the capture range according to the lens.
Off:
Always captures 35mm full-frame image sensor pictures.

Note
When you attach an APS-C-compatible lens and set [ Shooting] to [Off], you may not achieve optimal shooting results.
For example, the edges of the image may become darker.

When [ Shooting] is set to [On], the angle of view is the same as when shooting with an APS-C-size image sensor.

When recording 4K movies, [ Shooting] becomes disabled and locked to [Off].

Related Topic
Angle of view

TP1001224874

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

275
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Angle of view

The angle of view switches to the equivalent of full frame or APS-C/Super 35mm, depending on the setting for [
Shooting] and the attached lens. The angle of view is also different for still image shooting and movie shooting.

Angle of view equivalent to full frame

(A) When shooting still images

(B) When recording movies

The camera shoots with an angle of view equivalent to full frame when [ Shooting] is set to [Off].

Angle of view equivalent to APS-C size/Super 35mm

(A) When shooting still images

(B) When recording movies (Full-HD)

The camera shoots with an angle of view equivalent to APS-C size or Super 35mm when [ Shooting] is set to
[On]. The angle of view is approximately 1.5 times the focal length indicated on the lens for both still images and movies.
However, 4K movies cannot be recorded when [ Shooting] is set to [On].

Related Topic
File Format (movie)
Movie Settings (movie)
APS-C S35 (Super 35mm) Shooting (still image/movie)

276
 TP1001262843

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

277
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Touch Operation

Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Operation] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Activates touch operations.
Off:
Deactivates touch operations.

Related Topic
Touch panel
Shooting Screen
Playback Screen
Menu Screen

TP1001257143

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

278
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Shooting Screen

Configures touch operations on the shooting screen.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Shooting Screen] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Shooting Screen:
Sets whether to enable touch operations on the shooting screen. ([On]/[Off])
Footer Icon Touch:
Sets whether to enable touch operations for the footer icons at the bottom of the shooting standby screen. ([On]/[Off])
Swipe Right:
Sets the operation when swiping right on the shooting standby screen. ([Icon Display: Left]/[Icon Display: L&R]/[Off])
Swipe Left:
Sets the operation when swiping left on the shooting standby screen. ([Icon Display: Right]/[Icon Display: L&R]/[Off])
Swipe Up:
Sets the operation when swiping up on the shooting standby screen. ([Open the Fn Menu]/[Off])
Touch Func. in Shooting:
Sets the operation activated by touching the screen during shooting.
[Touch Focus]: Specifies the position to focus.
[Touch Tracking]: Selects a subject to start tracking.
[Touch Shutter]: Focuses on the touched subject and shoots images (only during still image shooting).
[Touch AE]: Specifies the position to adjust the brightness.
[Off]: Disables touch operations.

Icon When Monitor Flipped:

Sets whether to flip the positions of the touch function icons on the left and right in accordance with the monitor when the
monitor is flipped. ([Flip]/[Do Not Flip])

Hint
You can select whether to simultaneously perform [Touch AE] by pressing the left/right sides of the control wheel when [Touch
Func. in Shooting] is set to [Touch Focus]/[Touch Tracking]/[Touch Shutter]. When you perform [Touch AE], you can fine-tune the
brightness by sliding the brightness adjustment bar that appears after touching.

Note
You cannot fine-tune the brightness using the brightness adjustment bar when [Touch Func. in Shooting] is set to [Touch
Shutter+AE].

Related Topic
Touch panel
Touch function icons
Touch Operation

279
Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)
Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)
Shooting with touch operations (Touch Shutter)
Adjusting the exposure with touch operations (Touch AE)
Fn (function) button

TP1001271270

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

280
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Playback Screen

Configures touch operations on the playback screen.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Playback Screen] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Enables touch operations on the playback screen.
Off:
Disables touch operations on the playback screen.

Related Topic
Touch panel
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

TP1001271269

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

281
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Menu Screen

Configures touch operations on the menu screen.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Menu Screen] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Enables touch operations on the menu screen.
Off:
Disables touch operations on the menu screen.

Related Topic
MENU button
Main menu (shooting setting list)

TP1001271282

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

282
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)

[Touch Focus] allows you to specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations.
Configure the settings as follows from MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] in advance:

[Touch Operation]: [On]

[Shooting Screen] → [Shooting Screen]: [On]
This function is available when [ Focus Area] is set to one of following parameters. However, the function may not be
available depending on the setting for [ Focus Area Limit].

[Wide]
[Zone]
[Center Fix]
[Tracking: Wide]
[Tracking: Zone]
[Tracking: Center Fix]

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Shooting Screen] → [Touch Func. in Shooting] → [Touch
Focus].

Specifying the position where you want to focus in the still image mode
When performing auto-focusing, you can specify the position where you want to focus using touch operations. After
touching the monitor and specifying a position, press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

1. Touch the monitor.

Touch the subject to focus.
To cancel focusing with touch operations, touch (Touch focus release) icon or press the center of the control
wheel.

2. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.

Specifying the position where you want to focus in the movie recording mode
The camera will focus on the touched subject.

1. Touch the subject on which you want to focus before or during recording.
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the focus mode temporarily switches to manual focus, and the
focus can be adjusted using the focus ring (spot focus).
To cancel spot focus, touch (Touch focus release) icon or press the center of the control wheel.
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus], the focus mode temporarily switches to [Continuous AF]. When
the touched area is in focus, the focus mode returns to manual focus.

Hint
If you set [Touch Func. in Shooting] to [Touch Focus+AE], the brightness will be set according to the subject you touched. This will
also allow you to fine-tune the brightness by sliding the brightness adjustment bar that appears after touching.

In addition to the touch focus function, touch operations such as the following are also available.
The focusing frame for [Spot] and [Expand Spot] can be moved by dragging.

283
 When shooting still images in the manual focusing mode, the focus magnifier can be used by double-tapping the monitor.

Note
The touch focus function is not available in the following situations:
When shooting still images in the manual focusing mode
When using the digital zoom in the still image shooting mode
When using the LA-EA4

Related Topic
Touch Operation
Shooting Screen
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

TP1001257144

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

284
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)

You can use touch operations to select a subject you want to track in the still image shooting mode and movie recording
mode.
Configure the settings as follows from MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] in advance:

[Touch Operation]: [On]

[Shooting Screen] → [Shooting Screen]: [On]

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Shooting Screen] → [Touch Func. in Shooting] → [Touch
Tracking].

2 Touch the subject that you want to track on the monitor.

Tracking will start.

Hint
To cancel tracking, touch (Tracking release) icon or press the center of the control wheel.

If you set [Touch Func. in Shooting] to [TouchTracking+AE], the brightness will be set according to the subject you touched. This
will also allow you to fine-tune the brightness by sliding the brightness adjustment bar that appears after touching.

Note
[Touch Tracking] is unavailable in the following situations:
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus] in still image shooting mode.
When using Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom, or Digital Zoom in the still image shooting mode

If the focus mode is switched to [Manual Focus] while [Touch Func. in Shooting] is set to [Touch Tracking] in still image shooting
mode, the setting value for [Touch Func. in Shooting] will be changed to [Touch Focus].

Related Topic
Touch Operation
Shooting Screen

TP1001263936

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

285
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Shooting with touch operations (Touch Shutter)

The camera automatically focuses on the point you touch and shoots a still image.
Configure the settings as follows from MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] in advance:

[Touch Operation]: [On]

[Shooting Screen] → [Shooting Screen]: [On]

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Shooting Screen] → [Touch Func. in Shooting] → [Touch
Shutter].

2 Touch the subject on which you would like to focus.

The camera focuses on the subject you touched, and a still image is recorded.

Hint
If you set [Touch Func. in Shooting] to [Touch Shutter+AE], the brightness will be set according to the subject you touched.

You can operate the shooting functions below by touching the monitor:
Shooting burst images using the touch shutter
When [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting], you can record burst images while touching the monitor.
Shooting continuous bracket images using the touch shutter
The product shoots three images while automatically shifting the exposure from base, to darker, and then to lighter. When
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Bracket], keep touching the monitor until the shooting ends. After the recording you can select the
image you prefer.

Note
The [Touch Shutter] function is unavailable in the following situations:
When shooting movies
When shooting slow-motion/quick-motion movies
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus]
When [ Focus Area] is set to [Spot] / [Expand Spot] / [Tracking: Spot S] / [Tracking: Spot M] / [Tracking: Spot L] / [Tracking:
Expand Spot]
While using the digital zoom function
While using the Clear Image Zoom
While using the smart zoom function
When a Mount Adaptor is attached

When using Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom while [Touch Func. in Shooting] is set to [Touch Shutter], the setting value
temporarily changes from [Touch Shutter] to [Off].

If the focus mode is switched to [Manual Focus] while [Touch Func. in Shooting] is set to [Touch Shutter], the setting value for
[Touch Func. in Shooting] will change to [Touch Focus].

Related Topic
Touch Operation
Shooting Screen

286
 TP1001268214

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

287
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Adjusting the exposure with touch operations (Touch AE)

You can automatically set the exposure based on the brightness of a point you touch.
Configure the settings as follows from MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] in advance:

[Touch Operation]: [On]

[Shooting Screen] → [Shooting Screen]: [On]

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Shooting Screen] → [Touch Func. in Shooting] → select
[Touch AE].

2 Touch the point that you want to set as the basis for the exposure.

The camera will set the exposure based on the brightness of the point you touched.

You can fine-tune the brightness with sliding the brightness adjustment bar that appears after touching.

Hint
The adjustment using the brightness adjustment bar is reflected in the exposure compensation value.

When [Touch Func. in Shooting] is set to [Touch Focus]/[Touch Tracking]/[Touch Shutter], you can select whether or not to
perform [Touch AE] at the same time by pressing the left or right side of the control wheel.

Note
[Touch AE] is not available in the following situations:
When using digital zoom function

If the subject is extremely bright or dark, the adjustment bar may not be sufficiently effective.

Related Topic
Touch Operation
Shooting Screen

TP1001271190

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

288
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Silent Mode Settings (still image/movie)

You can configure settings related to the silent mode, which allows you to shoot without shutter sounds or electronic
sounds. You can also set whether or not to change the settings for other functions that emit sounds from the camera
when the camera is set to the silent mode.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [ Silent Mode Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Silent Mode:
Sets whether or not to shoot without shutter sounds or electronic sounds. ([On]/[Off])
When set to [On], [Audio signals] becomes locked to [Off].
Target Function Settings:
Sets whether or not to simultaneously change the settings for other functions that emit sounds from the camera when the
camera is set to the silent mode. ([Aperture Drive in AF])
If you select [Not Target], the setting values for each function will be retained even in the silent mode.

Note
Use the [Silent Mode] function on your own responsibility, while taking sufficient consideration to the privacy and portrait rights of
the subject.

Even if [Silent Mode] is set to [On], it will not be completely silent.

Even if [Silent Mode] is set to [On], the operating sound of the aperture and focus will sound.

When [Silent Mode] is set to [On], the following functions are not available:
Flash shooting

Related Topic
Interval Shoot Func.
Aperture Drive in AF

TP1001257105

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

289
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Release w/o Lens (still image/movie)

Sets whether or not the shutter can be released when no lens is attached.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [ Release w/o Lens] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Enable:
Releases the shutter when no lens is attached. Select [Enable] when attaching the product to an astronomical telescope,
etc.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when a lens is not attached.

Note
Correct metering cannot be achieved when you use lenses that do not provide a lens contact, such as the lens of an astronomical
telescope. In such cases, adjust the exposure manually by checking it on the recorded image.

TP1001224899

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

290
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Release w/o Card

Sets whether the shutter can be released when no memory card has been inserted.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [Release w/o Card] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Enable:
Releases the shutter even if no memory card has been inserted.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when no memory card has been inserted.

Note
When no memory card has been inserted, the images shot will not be saved.

The default setting is [Enable]. It is recommended that you select [Disable] prior to actual shooting.

TP1001248308

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

291
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Anti-flicker Set.

To reduce the impact of flickering from artificial light sources (such as fluorescent or LED light), you can set the shutter
speed more finely than usual.
This function reduces differences in exposure and color tone between the upper and lower area of an image during
continuous shooting under artificial light sources.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [Anti-flicker Set.] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Var. Shutter:
Reduces the appearance of band-like light and dark shading on the image by finely adjusting the shutter speed according
to the flickering frequency. ([On]/[Off])
[ Var. Shutter] can only be selected when the camera is in an exposure mode that allows you to manually adjust the
shutter speed (both still images and movies).
Var. Shutter Set.:
Sets the shutter speed when [ Var. Shutter] is set to [On].
Select a shutter speed that reduces the impact of flickering while checking the monitor. Press the center of the control
wheel to automatically set the shutter speed so that the impact of flickering is reduced. The faster you set the shutter
speed, the more likely there is to be a difference between the monitor display before shooting and the recorded image.
Make sure that the impact of flickering is reduced in the recorded image.

Hint
When [ Var. Shutter Select] is assigned to a custom key, you can switch the [ Var. Shutter] function on and off by pressing
the key.

When [Anti-flicker Tv Scan] is assigned to a custom key, you can make the camera automatically set the shutter speed to reduce
the impact of flickering by pressing the key while shooting.

When [ Var. Shutter] is set to [On], the shutter-speed denominator is displayed in the decimal format (high-resolution shutter
speed).
For example, if the normal shutter speed is set to 1/250 second, the value will be displayed as 250.6. (The numbers may differ
from the actual ones.)

When [ Var. Shutter] is set to [On], the high-resolution shutter speed can be finely adjusted on the shooting standby screen. If
you want to change the high-resolution shutter speed to an integral multiple value even on the shooting standby screen, assign
[Shutter Speed(step)] to a custom key or the “My Dial” setting.

When you change the [ Var. Shutter] setting from [On] to [Off], the high-resolution shutter speed switches to the closest value
among normal shutter speeds.

Note
You cannot use [ Var. Shutter] and [Anti-flicker Tv Scan] when using a flash with [Flash Mode] set to an item other than [Flash
Off].

When [ Var. Shutter] is set to [On], the release time lag may be longer.

Even when [ Var. Shutter] is set to [On], depending on the frequency of the light source, you may be unable to set the
appropriate shutter speed and eliminate the impact of flickering. In that case, try the following.
Setting a slower shutter speed

292
 When you press the shutter button halfway down, flickering may appear temporarily.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

TP1001266985

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

293
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

The zoom features available with this product

The zoom feature of the product provides a higher magnification zoom by combining various zoom features. The icon
displayed on the screen changes, according to the selected zoom feature.

When a power zoom lens is mounted:

When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted:

Optical zoom:
Zoom images in the zoom range of a lens.
When a power zoom lens is mounted, the focal length of the optical zoom is displayed.

Smart Zoom ( ):
Zoom images without causing the original quality to deteriorate by partially cropping an image (only when [JPEG
Image Size]/[HEIF Image Size] is set to [M] or [S]).

Clear Image Zoom ( ):

Zoom images using an image process with less deterioration. When you set [ Zoom Range] to [Clear Image
Zoom] or [Digital Zoom], you can use this zoom function.

Digital Zoom ( ):
You can magnify images using an image process. When you set [ Zoom Range] to [Digital Zoom], you can use
this zoom function.

Hint
The default setting for the [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF Image Size] is [L]. To use the smart zoom, change [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF
Image Size] to [M] or [S].

Note
The Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom functions are not available when shooting in the following situations:
[ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG]/[RAW & HEIF].
[Rec Frame Rate] is set to [120p]/[100p].
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with the frame rate set to [120fps]/[100fps]

You cannot use the Smart Zoom function with movies.

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom in the still image shooting mode, the [ Focus Area] setting is
disabled and the AF operates with priority on and around the center area.

When you use the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom function, [ Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi].

When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom function in the still image shooting mode, the following functions
are not available:

294
 Subject Recognition AF
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Tracking function

Related Topic
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom
Zoom Range (still image/movie)
About zoom scale

TP1001248156

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

295
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, you can exceed the zoom range of the optical zoom.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Zoom Range] → Select [Clear Image Zoom] or [Digital
Zoom].

2 Zoom using the W/T (zoom) lever.

If you assign [Zoom Operation (T)] or [Zoom Operation (W)] to the desired key in advance by selecting MENU
→ (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can
zoom in and out simply by pressing that key.

To zoom using the zoom icon displayed on the screen

1. MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Shooting Screen] → [On].
2. Swipe in from the left or right edge of the screen to display the touch icons.
3. Touch (Zoom) icon (A), and then select the magnification scale (B). Alternatively, touch and hold the W or T
icon (C).

(A): (Zoom) icon

(B): Magnification scale
(C): W/T icon

Hint
When a power zoom lens is attached, you can use the zoom lever or zoom ring to magnify the image. If you exceed the optical
zoom magnification, you can switch to a zoom function other than the optical zoom with the same operation.

When using step zoom, a zoom function set in [ Zoom Range] (Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom, or Digital Zoom) may be used
even within the optical zoom range.

Related Topic
Zoom Range (still image/movie)
296
The zoom features available with this product
About zoom scale
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001257093

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

297
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Zoom Range (still image/movie)

You can select the zoom setting of the product.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Zoom Range] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Optical zoom only:
Limits the zoom range to the optical zoom. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF
Image Size] to [M] or [S].
Clear Image Zoom :
Select this setting to use Clear Image Zoom. The product magnifies images using an image process with less
deterioration.
Digital Zoom :
The product magnifies images to the largest scale. However, the image quality will deteriorate.

Note
Set [Optical zoom only] if you want to magnify images within the range in which image quality does not deteriorate.

Related Topic
The zoom features available with this product
About zoom scale

TP1001224587

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

298
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Zoom Lever Speed (still image/movie)

Sets the zoom speed with the W/T (zoom) lever of the camera. This can be set separately for shooting standby and
movie recording.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Zoom Lever Speed] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Zoom Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during shooting standby. ([1 (Slow)] to [8 (Fast)])
Zoom Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during movie recording. ([1 (Slow)] to [8 (Fast)])

Hint
If a high speed is set for shooting standby and a slow speed is set for movie recording, the angle of view can be changed quickly
during shooting standby and slowly during movie recording.

Note
The zoom speed does not change when you operate the zoom ring of the lens or the zoom lever of the power zoom lens.

If you increase the zoom speed, the sound of zoom operations may be recorded.

Related Topic
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom

TP1001271179

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

299
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Custom Key Z. Speed (still image/movie)

Sets the zoom speed when using the custom key to which [Zoom Operation (T)] / [Zoom Operation (W)] is assigned. This
can be set separately for shooting standby and movie recording.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Custom Key Z. Speed] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during shooting standby. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during movie recording. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))

Hint
If a high speed is set for [Fixed Speed ] and a slow speed is set for [Fixed Speed ], the angle of view can be changed
quickly during shooting standby and slowly during movie recording.

Note
The zoom speed does not change when you operate the zoom ring of the lens or the zoom lever of the power zoom lens.

If you increase the zoom speed, the sound of zoom operations may be recorded.

Related Topic
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom

TP1001245158

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

300
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Remote Zoom Speed (still image/movie)

Sets the zoom speed when performing zoom operations using the remote commander (sold separately) or the remote
shooting function via a smartphone. This can be set separately for shooting standby and movie recording.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Remote Zoom Speed] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Speed Type:
Sets whether or not to lock the zoom speed. ([Variable]/[Fix])
Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during shooting standby when [ Speed Type] is set to [Fix]. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during movie recording when [ Speed Type] is set to [Fix]. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))

Hint
When [ Speed Type] is set to [Variable], pressing the zoom lever on the remote commander will increase the zoom speed
(some remote commanders do not support variable zoom).

If [ Speed Type] is set to [Fix], a high speed is set for [ Fixed Speed ], and a slow speed is set for [ Fixed Speed
], the angle of view can be changed quickly during shooting standby and slowly during movie recording.

Note
If you increase the zoom speed, the sound of zoom operations may be recorded.

TP1001265405

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

301
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Step Zoom Magnif. (still image/movie)

Set the zoom magnification that can be selected with the touch button on the shooting screen or with the key to which the
[Step Zoom] function is assigned.

1 Select MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Step Zoom Magnif.].

2 Add checkmarks to the magnification values that you want to use and select [OK].

The magnifications with (check mark) can be selected in the following cases:
When you touch the ZOOM (Zoom) button on the shooting screen
When you press the custom key to which [Step Zoom] is assigned

Menu item details

Add check marks to the magnification values that you want to use.
x1.0/x1.5/x2.0/x4.0

Hint
To select the zoom magnification with the custom key, assign [Step Zoom] to the key of your choice with [ Custom Key/Dial
Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] in advance. In the default settings, [Step Zoom] is assigned to the C2 button.

Note
When recording movies, the maximum magnification for the step zoom function may vary depending on the setting for [ File
Format] or [ Zoom Range].
when [ File Format] is set to HD:
Clear Image Zoom: up to [x2.0]
Digital Zoom: up to [x4.0]

when [ File Format] is set to 4K:

Clear Image Zoom: up to [x1.5]
Digital Zoom: up to [x4.0]

When you use the step zoom at the same time as the optical zoom of a power zoom lens, zooming with the zooming lever may
not reach the wide-angle end. In this case, set the step zoom to [x1.0].

Related Topic
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom
Zoom Range (still image/movie)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001268960

302
5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

303
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

About zoom scale

The zoom scale that is used in combination with the zoom of the lens changes according to the selected image size.

When [Aspect Ratio] is [3:2]

Full frame

JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size Optical zoom only (smart zoom) Clear Image Zoom Digital Zoom

L: 12M - Approx. 2× Approx. 4×

M: 5.1M Approx. 1.5× Approx. 3.1× Approx. 6.1×

S: 3.0M Approx. 2× Approx. 4× Approx. 8×

APS-C size

JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size Optical zoom only (smart zoom) Clear Image Zoom Digital Zoom

M: 5.1M - Approx. 2× Approx. 4×

S: 3.0M Approx. 1.3× Approx. 2.6× Approx. 5.2×

Related Topic
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom
The zoom features available with this product
Zoom Range (still image/movie)

TP1001248220

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

304
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Zoom Ring Rotate

Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses
that support this function.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [Zoom Ring Rotate] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Left(W)/Right(T):
Assigns zoom out (W) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-in (T) function to right-handed rotation.
Right(W)/Left(T):
Assigns zoom in (T) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-out (W) function to right-handed rotation.

TP1001257150

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

305
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Using flash (sold separately)

In dark environments, use the flash to light up the subject while shooting. Also use the flash to prevent camera-shake.

For details on the flash, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.

1 Attach the flash (sold separately) to the product.

2 Shoot after you have turned on the flash and it is fully charged.

(Charging flash icon) blinking: Charging is in progress

(Charging flash icon) lit up: Charging is finished
The available flash modes depend on the shooting mode and function.

Note
The light of the flash may be blocked if the lens hood is attached and the lower part of a recorded image may be shaded. Remove
the lens hood.

You cannot use the flash when recording movies. (You can use an LED light when using a flash (sold separately) with an LED
light.)

You cannot use the flash when the shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and [Sports Action] is selected.

Before attaching/removing an accessory such as a flash to/from the Multi Interface Shoe, turn off the product first. When attaching
an accessory, make sure that the accessory is fixed securely to the product.

Do not use the Multi Interface Shoe with a commercially available flash that applies voltage of 250 V or more or has the reverse
polarity of the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

When shooting with the flash and the zoom is set to W, the shadow of the lens may appear on the screen, depending on the
shooting conditions. If this happens, shoot away from the subject or set the zoom to T and shoot with the flash again.

The corners of a recorded image may be shaded, depending on the lens.

High-speed sync (HSS) photography is not available on this camera.

When an external flash is attached to the camera and [Flash Mode] is set to an item other than [Flash Off], [Cont. Shooting] and
[Self-timer(Cont)] are not available.

When an external flash is attached to the camera and [Flash Mode] is set to an item other than [Flash Off], [ Var. Shutter] and
[Anti-flicker Tv Scan] are not available.

306
 For details on compatible accessories for the Multi Interface Shoe, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility.

Related Topic
Flash Mode
Wireless Flash

TP1001248252

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

307
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Flash Mode

You can set the flash mode.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Flash Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Flash Off:
The flash does not operate.
Autoflash:
The flash works in dark environments.
Fill-flash:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.
Slow Sync.:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow sync shooting allows you to shoot a clear image of both the
subject and the background by slowing the shutter speed.
Rear Sync.:
The flash works right before the exposure is completed every time you trigger the shutter. Rear sync shooting allows you
to shoot a natural image of the trail of a moving subject such as a moving car or a walking person.

Note
The default setting depends on the shooting mode.

Some [Flash Mode] settings are not available, depending on the shooting mode.

Related Topic
Using flash (sold separately)

TP1001248253

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

308
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Flash Comp.

Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV. Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light
only. Exposure compensation changes the amount of flash light along with the change of the shutter speed and aperture.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Flash Comp.] → desired setting.

Selecting higher values (+ side) makes the flash level higher, and lower values (- side) makes the flash level
lower.

Note
[Flash Comp.] does not work when the shooting mode is set to the following modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Scene Selection]

The higher flash effect (+ side) may not be visible due to the limited amount of flash light available, if the subject is outside the
maximum range of the flash. If the subject is very close, the lower flash effect (- side) may not be visible.

If you attach an ND filter to the lens or attach a diffuser or a color filter to the flash, the appropriate exposure may not be achieved
and images may turn out dark. In this case, adjust [Flash Comp.] to the desired value.

Related Topic
Using flash (sold separately)

TP1001248254

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

309
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Exp.comp.set

Sets whether to apply the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light, or just ambient light.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Exp.comp.set] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Ambient&flash:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light.
Ambient only:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control ambient light only.

Related Topic
Flash Comp.

TP1001224813

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

310
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Wireless Flash

There are two methods for wireless flash shooting: light-signal flash shooting that uses the light of the flash attached to
the camera as a signal light, and radio-signal flash shooting that uses wireless communication. To perform radio-signal
flash shooting, use a compatible flash or the Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately). For details on how to set
each method, refer to the instruction manual of the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Wireless Flash] → [On].

2 Remove the shoe cap from the camera, and then attach the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.

When performing light-signal wireless flash shooting, set the attached flash as the controller.
When performing radio-signal wireless flash shooting with a flash attached to the camera, set the attached flash
as the commander.

3 Set up an off-camera flash that is set to wireless mode, or that is attached to the Wireless Radio Receiver
(sold separately).

You can perform a test flashing by assigning the [Wireless Test Flash] function to a custom key using [
Custom Key/Dial Set.], and then pressing that key.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not use the wireless flash function.
On:
Uses the wireless flash function to make an external flash or flashes emit light at a distance from the camera.

Note
The off-camera flash may emit light after receiving a light signal from a flash used as the controller of another camera. If this
occurs, change the channel of your flash. For details on how to change the channel, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.

For the flash that is compatible with wireless flash shooting, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized
Sony service facility.

Related Topic
External Flash Set.

TP1001257067

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

311
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Red Eye Reduction

When using the flash, it is fired two or more times before shooting to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Red Eye Reduction] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The flash is always fired to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.
Off:
Does not use Red Eye Reduction.

Note
Red Eye Reduction may not produce the desired effects. It depends on individual differences and conditions, such as distance to
the subject, or whether the subject looks at the pre-strobe or not.

TP1001224859

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

312
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

FEL lock

The flash level is automatically adjusted so that the subject gets the optimum exposure during normal flash shooting. You
can also set the flash level in advance.
FEL: Flash Exposure Level

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] → desired button, then assign
the [FEL Lock toggle] function to the button.

2 Center the subject on which FEL is to be locked, and adjust the focus.

3 Press the button to which [FEL Lock toggle] is registered, and set the flash amount.

A pre-flash flashes.
The (FEL lock) lights up.

4 Adjust the composition and shoot the image.

When you want to release the FEL lock, press the button to which the [FEL Lock toggle] is registered again.

Hint
By setting [FEL Lock hold], you can hold the setting while the button is pressed down. Also, by setting [FEL Lock/AEL hold] and
[FEL Lock/AEL tggle.], you can shoot images with the AE locked in the following situations.
When [Flash Mode] is set to [Flash Off] or [Autoflash].
When the flash cannot go off.

313
 When using an external flash that is set to manual flash mode.

Note
The FEL lock cannot be set when a flash is not attached.

If a flash that does not support the FEL lock is attached, an error message is displayed.

When both AE and FEL lock are fixed, (AE Lock/FEL Lock) icon lights up.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001257127

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

314
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

External Flash Set.

You can configure the settings of a flash (sold separately) attached to the camera using the monitor and control wheel of
the camera.
Update the software of your flash to the latest version before using this function.
For details on flash functions, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.

1 Attach the flash (sold separately) to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera, and then turn on the camera
and the flash.

2 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [External Flash Set.] → desired setting item.

3 Configure the setting using the control wheel of the camera.

Menu item details

Ext. Flash Firing Set.:
Allows you to configure settings related to the firing of the flash, such as the flash mode, flash level, etc.
Ext. Flash Cust. Set.:
Allows you to configure other flash settings, wireless settings, and flash unit settings.

Hint
If you assign [Ext. Flash Firing Set.] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can open the [Ext. Flash Firing Set.]
screen simply by pressing that key.

You can adjust settings by operating the flash even while you are using [External Flash Set.].

You can also configure the settings for a Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately) attached to the camera.

Note
You can only use [External Flash Set.] to configure the settings of a flash (sold separately) or Wireless Radio Commander (sold
separately) manufactured by Sony and attached to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera.

You can only use [External Flash Set.] when the flash is attached directly to the camera. You cannot use this function when
shooting with an off-camera flash that is connected using a cable.

Only some of the functions of the attached flash are configurable using [External Flash Set.]. You cannot perform pairing with
other flashes, reset the flash, initialize the flash, etc. via [External Flash Set.].

[External Flash Set.] is unavailable under the following conditions:

When the flash is not attached to the camera
When a flash that does not support [External Flash Set.] is attached
When the Still/Movie/S&Q switch is set to (Movie) or S&Q (S&Q Motion), or during movie shooting

Also, [External Flash Set.] may be unavailable depending on the state of the flash.

For details on flashes and Wireless Radio Commanders that are compatible with this function, refer to the following support page.
https://www.sony.net/dics/e1/

315
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001265404

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

316
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

SteadyShot (still image)

Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [ SteadyShot] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Uses [ SteadyShot].
Off:
Does not use [ SteadyShot].

Hint
When using a tripod, etc., make sure to turn off the SteadyShot function because this can cause any malfunction when shooting.

If you assign [ SteadyShot Select] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can switch the [ SteadyShot]
function on or off by pressing the key.

When shooting in a dark place, the (SteadyShot) icon may blink. We recommend that you set a faster shutter speed by
decreasing the aperture value or adjusting the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

With some lenses, the camera body and the lens work together to perform image stabilization, making it possible to correct larger
blurs than usual. Refer to the following URL for compatible lenses.
https://www.sony.net/dics/fnc1002/

Note
If a lens equipped with a SteadyShot switch is attached, the settings can only be changed using that switch on the lens. You
cannot switch the settings using the camera.

Related Topic
SteadyShot (movie)
SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001224861

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

317
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

SteadyShot (movie)

Sets [ SteadyShot] effect when shooting movies.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [ SteadyShot] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Dynamic active:
Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect than [Active].
Active:
Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect.
Standard:
Reduces camera shake under stable movie shooting conditions.
Off:
Does not use [ SteadyShot].

Hint
When [Active] is selected, with some lenses, the camera body and the lens work together to perform image stabilization, making it
possible to correct larger blurs than usual. Refer to the following URL for compatible lenses.
https://www.sony.net/dics/fnc1002/

Note
When using a tripod, etc., make sure to turn off the SteadyShot function because this can cause any malfunction when shooting.

If you change the setting for [ SteadyShot], the angle of view will change. When [ SteadyShot] is set to [Active], the angle
of view becomes narrower. [Dynamic active] performs cropping and pixel enlargement for a SteadyShot effect with less of an
impact on the image quality. Therefore, the angle of view becomes even narrower than with [Active].

In the following situations, [Active] or [Dynamic active] cannot be selected:

For normal movies: when [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [120p]/[100p]
For slow-motion/quick-motion shooting: when [ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps]

When you set [ SteadyShot] to [Dynamic active], Clear Image Zoom becomes unavailable.

Related Topic
SteadyShot (still image)
SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)

TP1001234831

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

318
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)

You can shoot with an appropriate SteadyShot setting for the attached lens.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [ SteadyShot Adjust.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.
Manual:
Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal-length set using [ Focal Length]. (8mm-1000mm)

Note
The SteadyShot function may not work optimally when the power has just been turned on, right after you point the camera
towards a subject, or when the shutter button has been pressed all the way down without stopping halfway.

When the camera cannot obtain focal length information from the lens, the SteadyShot function does not work correctly. Set [
SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set [ Focal Length] to match the lens you are using. The currently set SteadyShot
focal length will be displayed along with the (SteadyShot) icon.

When using an SEL16F28 lens (sold separately) with a teleconverter, etc., set [ SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set the
focal length.

Related Topic
SteadyShot focal length (still image/movie)

TP1001257116

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

319
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

SteadyShot focal length (still image/movie)

Sets the focal length information to be used for the built-in SteadyShot function when [ SteadyShot Adjust.] is set to
[Manual].

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [ Focal Length] → desired setting.

Menu item details

8mm - 1000mm:
The SteadyShot function uses the focal length that you set.
Check the focal-length index on the lens and set the focal-length.

Related Topic
SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)

TP1001265431

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

320
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Framing Stabilizer

The camera automatically corrects the composition so that the subject being tracked is kept at the same position in the
composition, allowing you to record movies with the position of the subject stable.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [Framing Stabilizer] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
[Framing Stabilizer] is enabled.
Selects [On: Center], which locks the composition so that the subject being tracked is in the center, or [On: Manual],
which requires you to manually set the position to which the subject being tracked is locked.

When [On: Manual] is selected, you can lock/unlock the position of the subject by touching (composition lock
icon) on the screen or pressing the center of the control wheel.

Off:
[Framing Stabilizer] is disabled.

Hint
When the subject is moving, keeping the camera aimed at the subject while shooting will make it easier to correct the
composition.

With [Framing Stabilizer], the angle of view becomes narrower because cropping is performed using images in 4K resolution.

To avoid deterioration of the image quality, it is recommended that you set [ File Format] to HD image quality when using
[Framing Stabilizer].

Note
The camera may focus on a subject outside the area cropped with [Framing Stabilizer].

It may not be possible to correct the composition depending on the movement of the subject.

TP1001271268

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

321
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Lens Compensation (still image/movie)

Compensates for shading in the corners of the screen or distortion of the screen, or reduces color deviation at the
corners of the screen caused by certain lens characteristics.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ Lens Compensation] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Shading Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically compensate for darkness in the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Auto: Low]/[Off])
Chromatic Aberration Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically reduce color deviation at the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Distortion Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically compensate for distortion of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Breathing Comp. (only when shooting movies):
Sets whether to automatically compensate for the phenomenon in which the angle of view changes according to the
focusing distance during movie recording. ([On]/[Off])

Note
This function is only available when using an automatic compensation compliant lens.

Depending on the lens type, darkness in the corners of the screen may not be corrected with [Shading Comp.], or there may be
no difference in the correction effect between [Auto] and [Auto: Low].

Depending on the attached lens, [Distortion Comp.] is fixed to [Auto], and you cannot select [Off].

If [ SteadyShot] is set to [Active] or [Dynamic active] in the movie recording mode, [Distortion Comp.] will become locked to
[Auto].

When [Breathing Comp.] is set to [On], the angle of view and the image quality change slightly.

Depending on the lens, changes in the angle of view may not be fully compensated for even when [Breathing Comp.] is set to
[On].

TP1001262836

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

322
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

High ISO NR

When shooting with high ISO sensitivity, the product reduces noise that becomes more noticeable when the product
sensitivity is high.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [High ISO NR] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Normal:
Activates high ISO noise reduction normally.
Low:
Activates high ISO noise reduction moderately.
Off:
Does not activate high ISO noise reduction.

Note
[High ISO NR] is fixed to [Normal] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Scene Selection]

Since this camera is not equipped with a long-exposure noise reduction function, noise may be noticeable when taking long-
exposure shots with high-sensitivity.

TP1001248305

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

323
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Shoot Mode Sel. Screen

Set whether to display the shooting mode selection screen in the following situations:

Selecting [S&Q Motion] or [ Time-lapse] when the shooting mode is set to the S&Q (slow-motion/quick-motion)
mode.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [Shoot Mode Sel. Screen] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Display:
Displays the shooting mode selection screen.
Not Displayed:
Does not display the shooting mode selection screen.

Related Topic
Still/Movie/S&Q switch

TP1001271266

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

324
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Auto Review (still image)

You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting. You can also set the display time for Auto
Review.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [ Auto Review] → desired setting.

Menu item details

10 Sec/5 Sec/2 Sec:
Displays the recorded image on the screen right after shooting for the selected duration of time. If you perform a
magnifying operation during Auto Review, you can check that image using the magnified scale.
Off:
Does not display the Auto Review.

Note
When you use a function that performs image processing, the image before processing may be displayed temporarily, followed by
the image after processing.

Auto Review is displayed in the mode that you have set using DISP (Display Setting) for playback.

Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

TP1001224867

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

325
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Grid Line Display (still image/movie)

Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not during shooting. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of
images.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Display] → [ Grid Line Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the grid line.
Off:
Does not display the grid line.

Hint
If you assign [Grid Line Display Select] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can
show or hide the grid lines by pressing the assigned key.

Related Topic
Grid Line Type (still image/movie)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001248306

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

326
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Grid Line Type (still image/movie)

Sets the displayed type of grid line. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Display] → [ Grid Line Type] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Rule of 3rds Grid:
Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
Golden Ratio Grid *:
Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image in the golden ratio for a well-balanced
composition.
Square Grid:
Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is useful for assessing the
composition when shooting landscapes, closeups, or when performing camera scanning.
Diag. + Square Grid:
Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
* When the camera’s system software (firmware) version is Ver.2.00 or later

Hint
If you assign [ Grid Line Type] to the desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can set
the type of grid line by pressing the assigned key.

Related Topic
Grid Line Display (still image/movie)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001265433

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

327
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Live View Display Set.

Sets whether or not to show images altered with effects of the exposure compensation, white balance, [ Creative
Look], etc. on the screen.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Display] → [Live View Display Set.] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Live View Display:
Sets whether to reflect all the shooting settings on the monitor and display the Live View in conditions close to what your
picture will look like once the settings are applied, or to display the Live View without reflecting the settings. ([Setting
Effect ON] / [Setting Effect OFF])
If you select [Setting Effect OFF], you can easily check the composition even when shooting with the image composition
on the Live View display.
Exposure Effect:
Sets whether or not to display the Live View with automatic correction by reflecting the exposure from the flash when
[Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect ON]. ([Exposure Set. & flash] / [Exposure Setting Only])
When using the flash for shooting a portrait, select [Exposure Setting Only] to manually set the exposure based on the
ambient lighting.

Hint
When you use a third-party flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some shutter speed settings. When
[Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], Live View Display will be displayed brightly, so that you can easily check the
composition.

If you select [Setting Effect OFF], Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in [Manual Exposure] mode.

When [Setting Effect OFF] is selected, the (VIEW) icon is displayed on the Live View screen.

Note
[Exposure Effect] is effective only when using a flash manufactured by Sony.

[Live View Display] cannot be set to [Setting Effect OFF] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Scene Selection]

If you shoot movies in the still image shooting mode, the shooting settings will be reflected in Live View even when [Live View
Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF].

When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], the brightness of the shot image will not be the same as that of the
displayed Live View.

TP1001224869

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

328
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Aperture Preview

While you press and hold the key to which you assigned the [Aperture Preview] function, the aperture is stepped down to
the set aperture value and you can check the blurriness prior to shooting.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] → set the [Aperture Preview]
function to the desired key.

2 When shooting still images, confirm the images by pressing the key to which [Aperture Preview] is
assigned.

Hint
Although you can change the aperture value during the preview, the subject may be defocused if you select a brighter aperture.
We recommend that you adjust the focus again.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Shot. Result Preview

TP1001224880

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

329
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Shot. Result Preview

While pressing down the key to which [Shot. Result Preview] is assigned, you can check the image preview with the
DRO, shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings applied. Check the shooting result preview before shooting.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] → set the [Shot. Result
Preview] function to the desired key.

2 When shooting still images, confirm the images by pressing the key to which [Shot. Result Preview] is
assigned.

Hint
The DRO settings, shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings you have set are reflected on the image for [Shot. Result
Preview], but some effects cannot be previewed depending on the shooting settings. Even in that case, the settings you have
selected will be applied to the images you shoot.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Aperture Preview

TP1001224881

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

330
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Bright Monitoring

Allows you to adjust the composition when shooting in dark environments. By extending the exposure time, you can
check the composition on the monitor even in dark locations such as under the night sky.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] → assign the [Bright
Monitoring] function to the desired key.

2 In a still image shooting mode, press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function, and
then shoot an image.

The brightness due to [Bright Monitoring] will continue after shooting.

To return the monitor brightness to normal, press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function
once again.

Note
During [Bright Monitoring], [Live View Display] will automatically switch to [Setting Effect OFF], and setting values such as
exposure compensation will not be reflected in the live view display. It is recommended that you use [Bright Monitoring] only in
dark locations.

[Bright Monitoring] will be automatically canceled in the following situations.

When the camera is turned off.
When the shooting mode is changed from P/A/S/M to a mode that is not P/A/S/M.
When the focus mode is set to other than manual focus.

While the following functions are being executed, you cannot turn [Bright Monitoring] on/off by pressing the custom key to which
you have assigned [Bright Monitoring].
[Auto Magnifier in MF]
[Focus Magnifier]

When using [Bright Monitoring] in dark locations, the shutter speed may be slower than during normal shooting, and the updating
speed of the monitor display may be slower. Also, because the measured brightness range is expanded, the exposure may
change.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Live View Display Set.

TP1001248307

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

331
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Emphasized REC Display

Sets whether or not to display a red frame around the edges of the camera’s monitor while recording a movie. You can
easily check whether the camera is in standby or recording, even when you are looking at the camera monitor from an
angle or at a distance.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Display] → [Emphasized REC Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays a red frame to indicate that recording is in progress.
Off:
Does not display a frame to indicate that recording is in progress.

Hint
The frame displayed by this function can also be output to an external monitor connected via HDMI. Set [HDMI Info. Display] to
[On].

Related Topic
HDMI Info. Display

TP1001265436

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

332
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Marker Display (still image)

Displays a marker for the specified aspect ratio on the shooting screen when shooting still images.
If you intend to crop the image to the specified aspect ratio after shooting, the aspect marker will allow you to shoot
images along with checking the angle of view after trimming.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Marker Display] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.

Menu item details

Aspect Marker:
Sets whether or not to display the aspect marker. ([On]/[Off])
Aspect Marker Type:
Sets the aspect ratio of the displayed aspect marker. ([1:1]/[5:4]/[4:3]/[16:9]/[1.91:1]/[2.35:1])
Aspect Marker Level:
Sets the color density for the displayed aspect marker. (0 to 15)

Hint
The aspect marker can be displayed simultaneously with grid lines. In this case, the grid lines are displayed according to the
angle of view of the aspect marker.

The aspect marker that was displayed during shooting can be displayed over the played-back image by setting [ Aspect
Marker Disp.] to [On].

With [Crop], you can also trim images according to the aspect marker that was displayed at the time of shooting.

If you want to display the aspect marker vertically, hold the camera vertically when shooting.

Note
The aspect marker can be displayed when shooting still images with an aspect ratio of [3:2].

When the aspect ratio for [ Aspect Marker] is set to [1:1]/[5:4]/[4:3], the position of the aspect marker will be different from that
of [ Aspect Marker] for movie recording even if the same aspect ratio is selected.

The aspect marker is not displayed on devices connected via HDMI.

Related Topic
Aspect Marker Disp. (still image)
Grid Line Display (still image/movie)
Crop

TP1001804768

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

333
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Marker Display (movie)

While shooting movies, you can set whether or not to display markers on the monitor, and select the types of marker.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Marker Display] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.

Menu item details

Marker Display:
Sets whether or not to display markers. ([On] / [Off])
Center Marker:
Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the middle of the shooting screen. ([Off] / [On])
Aspect Marker:
Sets the aspect marker display. ([Off] / [9:16] / [4:5] / [1:1] / [4:3] / [13:9] / [14:9] / [15:9] / [17:9] / [1.66:1] / [1.85:1] /
[1.91:1] / [2:1] / [2.35:1] / [2.39:1])
Safety Zone:
Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. ([Off] /
[80%] / [90%])
Guideframe:
Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
([Off] / [On])

Hint
You can display several markers at the same time.

Position the subject at the cross point of [Guideframe] to ensure a balanced composition.

Note
The markers are displayed when the Still/Movie/S&Q switch is set to (Movie) or S&Q (S&Q Motion), or when shooting
movies.

You cannot display markers when using [Focus Magnifier].

The markers are displayed on the monitor. (You cannot output the markers.)

Related Topic
Aspect Marker Disp. (still image)

TP1001248298

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

334
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Gamma Display Assist

Movies with S-Log3 gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic
range. Images with the HLG gamma are assumed to be displayed on HDR-compatible monitors. They are therefore
displayed in low contrast during shooting, and may be difficult to monitor. However, you can use the [Gamma Display
Assist] function to reproduce contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma. In addition, [Gamma Display Assist] can also
be applied when playing back movies on the camera's monitor.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [Gamma Display Assist] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Uses the gamma display assist function.
Off:
Does not use the gamma display assist function.

Hint
If you assign [Gamma Disp. Assist Sel.] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], or [
Custom Key Setting], you can turn the gamma display assist function on or off by pressing the assigned key.

Note
[Gamma Display Assist] is not applied to movies when displayed on a TV or monitor connected to the camera.

[Gamma Display Assist] is locked to [Off] in the following situations:

When [Log Shooting] is set to [On (Flexible ISO)]

Related Topic
Picture Profile (still image/movie)
Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.
HLG Still Image

TP1001257128

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

335
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.

Selects the conversion type for [Gamma Display Assist].

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Displays images with effects as follows according to the gamma or color mode set in [ Picture Profile].

When the gamma is set to [S-Log3]: [S-Log3→709(800%)]

When the gamma is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3], and the color mode is set to [BT.2020]:
[HLG(BT.2020)]
When the gamma is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3], and the color mode is set to [709]: [HLG(709)]

Displays images with an [HLG(BT.2020)] effect when shooting HLG still images with [HLG Still Image] set to [On].

S-Log3→709(800%):
Displays images with an S-Log3 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).
HLG(BT.2020):
Displays images after adjusting the image quality of the monitor to a quality that is almost the same as when images are
displayed on an [HLG(BT.2020)] compatible monitor.
HLG(709):
Displays images after adjusting the image quality of the monitor to a quality that is almost the same as when images are
displayed on an [HLG(709)] compatible monitor.

Hint
If you assign [Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can
switch the [Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.] setting.

Note
When [Gamma Display Assist] is set to [Auto] during playback, an effect is applied to the image as follows:
When playing back a movie recorded with [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3]: Displays the image with an [HLG(BT.2020)] or
[HLG(709)] effect depending on the color mode.
When playing back an HLG still image shot with [HLG Still Image] set to [On]: Displays the image with an [HLG(BT.2020)]
effect.

In other situations, movies are displayed according to the gamma setting and color mode setting in [ Picture Profile].

Related Topic
Gamma Display Assist
Picture Profile (still image/movie)
HDMI Output Settings (movie)

336
 TP1001265437

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

337
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Audio Recording

Sets whether to record sounds when shooting movies. Select [Off] to avoid recording the sounds of the lens and the
camera operating. This function cannot be used during slow-motion/quick-motion recording and time-lapse movie
recording.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Audio Recording] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Records sound.
Off:
Does not record sound.

Related Topic
Audio Rec Level

TP1001224837

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

338
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Audio Rec Level

You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter. This function cannot be used during slow-
motion/quick-motion recording and time-lapse movie recording.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Audio Rec Level].

2 Select the desired level using the right/left sides of the control wheel.

Menu item details

+:
Turns up the audio recording level.
-:
Turns down the audio recording level.

Hint
When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record
more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a greater sound level to make
the sound easier to hear. Check that the volume is at the appropriate level by monitoring the audio recording volume with the
connected headphones or the volume level meter on the camera.

To reset the audio recording level to the default setting, press the (Delete) button.

Note
Regardless of the [Audio Rec Level] settings, the limiter always operates.

[Audio Rec Level] is available only when the shooting mode is set to movie mode.

The [Audio Rec Level] settings are applied for both the internal microphone and the (microphone) terminal input.

TP1001224838

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

339
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Audio Out Timing

You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio. This
function cannot be used during slow-motion/quick-motion recording and time-lapse movie recording.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Audio Out Timing] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Live:
Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when audio deviation is a problem during audio monitoring.
Lip Sync:
Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.

Note
Using an external microphone may result in a slight delay. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the
microphone.

Audio is output with the setting for [Lip Sync] during HDMI output.

TP1001224839

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

340
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Wind Noise Reduct.

Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise by cutting the low-range sound of the input audio from the built-in microphone.
This function cannot be used during slow-motion/quick-motion recording and time-lapse movie recording.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Wind Noise Reduct.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
The camera automatically detects and reduces wind noise.
On:
Always reduces wind noise.
Off:
Does not reduce wind noise.

Note
The sound quality may vary from the normal recording settings when [Wind Noise Reduct.] is set to [On].

When an external microphone (sold separately) is used, [Wind Noise Reduct.] does not function.

When [Wind Noise Reduct.] is set to [Auto] while [Audio Out Timing] is set to [Live], the wind noise reduction effect cannot be
confirmed by audio monitoring during recording. Audio with reduced wind noise is recorded in the movie. Also, when live-
streaming audio using the streaming function, audio with reduced wind noise is streamed.

If you change the [Wind Noise Reduct.] setting while recording a movie, noise may be produced when the setting is changed and
become recorded in the movie.

Related Topic
Audio Out Timing

TP1001224840

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

341
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Microphone Directivity

Sets the direction of sound pickup when using the built-in microphone. This function cannot be used during slow-
motion/quick-motion recording or time-lapse shooting.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Microphone Directivity] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Automatically switches the direction of sound pickup (front or all directions) according to the recognized subject and
tracking status.
Front:
Picks up sound in front of the camera.
All Directions:
Picks up sound from all directions around the camera.
Rear:
Picks up sound behind the camera.

Note
[Microphone Directivity] is disabled when an external microphone is connected.

TP1001271265

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

342
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Mic Direct Select Setting

Configures the setting values to be selected when changing the directivity of the built-in microphone using the key to
which [Mic Directivity Select] is assigned in [ Custom Key/Dial Set.].

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Mic Direct Select Setting].

2 Add a (check) mark to the value that you want to enable.

The setting values marked with (check) will be available when performing [Mic Directivity Select] with the
custom key.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Microphone Directivity

TP1001271264

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

343
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Shoe Audio Set.

Sets the digital audio transmitted from a microphone (sold separately) attached to the multi-interface shoe of the camera.
Use a microphone that supports the digital audio interface. You can set the sampling frequency, the number of
quantization bits, and the number of channels. This function cannot be used during slow-motion/quick-motion recording
and time-lapse movie recording.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [ Shoe Audio Set.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

:
Sets the sampling frequency of audio input to 48 kHz, the number of quantization bits to 24 bits, and the number of
channels to 4.
:
Sets the sampling frequency of audio input to 48 kHz, the number of quantization bits to 24 bits, and the number of
channels to 2.
:
Sets the sampling frequency of audio input to 48 kHz, the number of quantization bits to 16 bits, and the number of
channels to 2.

Hint
The audio level display on the monitor is for 4 channels during 4-channel audio recording.

Note
When an external microphone (sold separately) is connected to the (microphone) terminal of the camera, the audio is
recorded from the external microphone attached to the (microphone) terminal. You cannot set [ Shoe Audio Set.].

If the attached microphone is set to analog transmission, you cannot set [ Shoe Audio Set.].

When the attached microphone does not support 4-channel audio recording, you cannot select [ ] (48khz/24bit
4ch).

When the attached microphone does not support 24-bit audio recording, [ Shoe Audio Set.] becomes locked to [
] (48khz/16bit 2ch).

Audio cannot be recorded correctly in the following situations during movie recording:
When you attach or remove the microphone
When digital transmission is switched to analog transmission or vice versa on the microphone side

Related Topic
4ch Audio Monitoring (movie)

TP1001265438

344
5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

345
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Automatic creation of still images from Shot Marks

If you add Shot Marks using a custom key while recording a movie, you can automatically create still images from the
movie frames with Shot Marks after recording. Shot Marks can also be added using the shutter button or touch function
icon.
If you want to create still images while checking the images with Shot Marks after recording a movie, use [ Create Still
Image].
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Option] → [ AutoCreateStillImage] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Creates still images from frames with Shot Marks after recording a movie. A message appears while still image creation
is in progress, and you cannot shoot new images during this time.
Off:
Does not create still images from frames with Shot Marks after recording a movie.

About the still images created

You can select either the JPEG or HEIF format for the still images to be created. You can switch the format by
selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [JPEG/HEIF Switch].
The size of the still images created will be the same size as the movie being recorded, according to the [ File
Format] setting.

Related Topic
Adding Shot Marks with the shutter button (movies)
Touch function icons
Creating still images from Shot Marks
JPEG/HEIF Switch
File Format (movie)

TP1001804769

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

346
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Shot Marks after still image creation (shooting)

Sets whether to automatically delete Shot Marks after automatically creating still images while recording a movie using
the [ AutoCreateStillImage] function.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Option]→[ after still img crt] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto Delete:
Deletes Shot Marks automatically after creating still images.
Maintain:
Does not delete Shot Marks automatically after creating still images.

Related Topic
Automatic creation of still images from Shot Marks

TP1001804770

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

347
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

TC/UB

The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.

Menu item details

Time Code Preset:
Sets the time code.
User Bit Preset:
Sets the user bit.
Time Code Format:
Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
Time Code Run:
Sets the count up format for the time code.
Time Code Make:
Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
User Bit Time Rec:
Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.

How to set the time code (Time Code Preset)

1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Preset].

2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
The time code can be set between the following range.
When [60p] is selected: 00:00:00.00 to 23:59:59.29
* When [24p] is selected, you can select the last two digits of the time code in multiples of four from 00 to 23 frames.
When [50p] is selected: 00:00:00.00 to 23:59:59.24

3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.
How to reset the time code

1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Preset].

2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the time code (00:00:00.00).

How to set the user bit (User Bit Preset)

1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [User Bit Preset].

2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.

How to reset the user bit

348
1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [User Bit Preset].
2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the user bit (00 00 00 00).

How to select the recording method for the time code (Time Code Format *1)

1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Format].

DF:
Records the time code in Drop Frame*2 format.
NDF:
Records the time code in Non-Drop Frame format.
*1 Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*2 The time code is based on 30 frames per second. However, a gap between the actual time and the time code will occur during extended periods
of recording as the frame frequency of the NTSC image signal is approximately 29.97 frames per second. Drop frame corrects this gap to make
the time code and actual time equal. In drop frame, the first 2 frame numbers are removed every minute except for every tenth minute. The time
code without this correction is called non-drop frame.

The setting is fixed to [-] when recording in 24p.

How to select the count up format for the time code (Time Code Run)

1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Run].

Rec Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance only while recording. The time code is recorded sequentially from
the last time code of the previous recording.
Free Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance anytime, regardless of the camera operation.
The time code may not be recorded sequentially in the following situations even when the time code advances in
[Rec Run] mode.

When the recording format is changed.

When the recording medium is removed.

How to select how the time code is recorded (Time Code Make)

1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Make].

Preset:
Records the newly set time code on the recording medium.
Regenerate:
Reads the last time code for the previous recording from the recording medium and records the new time code
consecutively from the last time code. The time code advances in [Rec Run] mode regardless of the [Time Code Run]
setting.
Note
Updating the camera's system software will reset the time code. Set the time code again.

Related Topic
TC/UB Disp. Setting

TP1001257096

349
5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

350
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

TC/UB Disp. Setting

Sets the display of the recording time counter, time code (TC), and user bit (UB) for movies.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [TC/UB Disp. Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Counter:
Displays the time counter of movie recording.
TC:
Displays the time code.
U-Bit:
Displays the user bit.

Related Topic
TC/UB

TP1001257113

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

351
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Network Streaming (movie)

You can connect the camera to a network, via either a wired or wireless connection, and livestream video and audio from
the camera.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

1 Connect the camera and smartphone via Bluetooth.

2 Register information such as the connection destination server and stream key for the distribution service
to be used in Creators' App.

3 On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Streaming] → [ Network Streaming] → Set [Streaming]
to [On].

[Streaming:Standby] will appear on the camera screen. Then, the camera will switch to the streaming standby state.

You can also select image quality settings, etc. from Creators' App.

4 Press the center of the control wheel to start streaming.

[Streaming:Output] will appear on the camera screen.

You can also start streaming from Creators' App.
Press the center again to exit streaming.

Menu item details

Streaming:
Sets whether to perform network streaming. ([On]/[Off])
Stream Connect Error Display:
Displays error information when the camera is unable to connect to the network or distribution server for network
streaming.
Output Img. Quality Set:
Sets the image quality of video output for network streaming. ([Quality]/[Resolution]/[Frame Rate]/[Bit Rate])
Output Information Display:
Displays information for network streaming.
Movie Rec During Streaming:
Sets whether to enable recording to recording media during network streaming. ([Enable]/[Disable])
Emphasized Output Display:
Sets whether to display a blue frame around the entire monitor during network streaming. ([On]/[Off])
Root Certificate Error:
Sets whether to connect when a root certificate error occurs while connecting to RTMPS. ([Does Not Connect]/[Connect])

Output image quality settings

352
To configure detailed settings for streaming image quality, set [Quality] to [Custom], and set [Resolution], [Frame Rate],
and [Bit Rate], respectively.
The setting range of [Bit Rate] varies depending on the combination of [Resolution] and [Frame Rate].

Resolution Frame Rate Bit rate setting range Bit rate default setting

4K (2160p) 30p/25p 38Mbps - 13Mbps 34Mbps

2K (1440p) 30p/25p 38Mbps - 6Mbps 13Mbps

60p/50p 27Mbps - 4.5Mbps 9Mbps

HD (1080p)
30p/25p 18Mbps - 3Mbps 6Mbps

60p/50p 13.5Mbps - 2.3Mbps 6Mbps

HD (720p)
30p/25p 9Mbps - 1.5Mbps 4Mbps

Hint
If you assign the zoom, network streaming, etc. to the dial or control wheel or register them to the function menu, you can adjust
these values even during network streaming.

The format of the streaming data is as follows.

Video format: MPEG-H HEVC/H.265 or MPEG-4 AVC/H.264*

Audio format: 48 kHz, 16 bit, 2ch

* While streaming using RTMP/RTMPS, the video format is MPEG-4 AVC/H.264.

When using an external microphone, you can minimize deviations between your voice and the movements of your mouth by
connecting the microphone to the (microphone) terminal of the camera.

Note
While network streaming is in progress, the camera is always set to the movie recording mode regardless of the shooting mode
before the start of streaming.

You cannot do the following during network streaming.

Transition to the menu screen
Transition to the playback screen
Remote shooting
Cloud Connection
Smartphone transfer

The following functions are disabled while network streaming is running.

Cinematic Vlog Set.
Power Save Start Time
Auto Monitor OFF

When recording to recording media during network streaming, the following restrictions apply to the movie file format and
recording frame rate.
If [Resolution] is set to [4K (2160p)] or [2K (1440p)], [ File Format] cannot be set to [XAVC HS 4K].
[Rec Frame Rate] is the same as [Frame Rate] for the movie when outputting.

You cannot change the [Movie Rec During Streaming] setting during network streaming.

Depending on the temperature environment, output image quality setting for streaming, setting for movie recording during
streaming, Wi-Fi connection environment, and usage conditions before the start of streaming, the internal temperature of the
camera may rise, and the time available for streaming may become shorter.

Depending on your network environment, the distributed video/audio may be disrupted. In that case, switch to a faster and more
stable network or lower the setting for [Bit Rate].

Depending on your internet connection or network conditions, streaming may be interrupted. In this case, restart streaming.

353
Related Topic
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)

TP1001271263

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

354
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

USB Streaming (movie)

You can connect a computer, etc. to the camera and use the camera video and audio for livestreaming or web-
conferencing services. Select MENU → (Setup) → [USB] → [USB Connection Mode] → [Sel. When Connect] or
[USB Streaming] beforehand.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Streaming] → [ USB Streaming] → Set [Output Res/Frame Rate] and [Movie
Rec During Streaming].

2 Connect the camera to a computer or other device with a USB cable (commercially available).

[Streaming:Standby] will appear on the camera screen, and the camera will switch to the streaming standby state.

If [USB Connection Mode] is set to [Sel. When Connect], select [Live Stream(USB Streaming)] on the selection
screen for the USB connection mode.
Use a cable or adapter that matches the terminal on the device to be connected.

3 Start streaming from your livestreaming/web-conferencing service.

[Streaming:Output] will appear on the camera screen.

To exit USB Streaming, turn off the power of the camera or disconnect the USB cable.

Menu item details

Output Res/Frame Rate:
Sets the resolution and the frame rate of the video. ([4K(2160p) 30p]/[4K(2160p) 25p]/[4K(2160p)
15p]/[4K(2160p)12.5p]/[HD(1080p) 60p]/[HD(1080p) 50p]/[HD(1080p) 30p]/[HD(1080p) 25p]/[HD(720p) 30p]/[HD(720p)
25p])
Movie Rec During Streaming:
Sets whether or not to enable recording of the video to the recording media during streaming. ([Enable]/[Disable])

Hint
If you assign the shutter speed, ISO sensitivity, etc. to the dial or control wheel or register them to the function menu, you can
adjust these values even during USB streaming.

The format of the streaming data is as follows.

Video format: MJPEG* or YUV420

* When the resolution is set to HD (720p), only MJPEG is available.

Audio format: PCM, 48 kHz, 16 bit, 2 ch

During USB streaming, power is supplied to the camera from the computer. If you want to consume as little computer power as
possible, set [USB Power Supply] to [Off].

When using an external microphone, you can minimize deviations between your voice and the movements of your mouth by
connecting the microphone to the (microphone) terminal of the camera.

355
 Note
While USB streaming is in progress, the camera is always set to the movie recording mode regardless of the position of the
Still/Movie/S&Q switch.

You cannot do the following while USB Streaming is running.

Transition to the playback screen
Network functions (Remote Shooting, remote operation from a smartphone, Bluetooth function, etc.)

The following functions are disabled while USB Streaming is running.

Picture Profile
Power Save Start Time
Auto Monitor OFF

When performing USB streaming with a resolution of 4K (2160p) or HD (1080p), use a computer that is compatible with
SuperSpeed USB 5 Gbps (USB 3.2) and a commercially available USB cable.
Even if the resolution is set to 4K (2160p) or HD (1080p), the actual output resolution will be HD (720p) when connected via the
USB 2.0 standard.

If you change the settings for the following items during USB streaming, the streaming screen may pause temporarily. You may
also need to resume streaming from an application depending on the livestreaming service.
[Output Res/Frame Rate] or [Movie Rec During Streaming] under [ USB Streaming]
[ File Format]
[Auto Framing Settings]

Depending on the temperature environment, output image quality setting for streaming, setting for movie recording during
streaming, Wi-Fi connection environment, and usage conditions before the start of streaming, the internal temperature of the
camera may rise, and the time available for streaming may become shorter.

Related Topic
USB Connection Mode

TP1001268964

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

356
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Contents of this chapter

The following table of contents lists the features described in this chapter (“Customizing the camera”). From each item
name, you can jump to the page describing the respective functions.

Customization features of the camera

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

Registering and recalling camera settings

Camera Set. Memory
Recalling registered shooting settings (Cam.Set)

Registering frequently used functions to the function menu

Fn Menu Settings

Registering frequently used functions to My Menu

Add Item
Sort Item
Delete Item
Delete Page
Delete All
Display From My Menu

Separately adjusting the camera settings for still images and movies
Different Set for Still/Mv

Customizing the functions of the ring/dial

Av/Tv Rotate
Function Ring(Lens)
Dial / Wheel Lock

Using the shutter button when shooting movies

REC w/ Shutter (movie)
Adding Shot Marks with the shutter button (movies)

Monitor settings
Monitor Flip Direction
Vertical Display
DISP (Screen Disp) Set

TP1001271172

357
5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

358
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Customization features of the camera

The camera has various customization features such as registration of functions and shooting settings to custom keys.
You can combine your preferred settings to customize the camera for easier operation.
For details on how to configure the settings and use them, refer to the page for each function.

To assign frequently used functions to buttons ( Custom Key/Dial Set., Custom Key/Dial Set.,
and Custom Key Setting)
You can change the functions of the buttons including the Custom Button (C1) according to your preferences. It is
recommended that you assign frequently used functions to easily operable buttons so that you can call up the assigned
functions simply by pressing the corresponding button.

To register frequently used functions to the Fn button (Function menu)

If you register functions frequently used in the shooting mode to the Function menu, you can display the registered
functions on the screen simply by pressing the Fn (Function) button. On the Function menu screen, you can recall the
function you want to use by selecting the icons.

To combine frequently used functions on the menu screen ( My Menu)

If you combine the frequently used items from menus such as the shooting and network menu on the “My Menu” screen,
you can quickly access the desired menu items.

359
To assign different functions to the dial and switch the function of the dial ( My Dial Settings )
You can assign the desired functions to the control dial and the control wheel, and register up to three combinations of
settings to the camera as the “My Dial 1 - 3” settings.

Example: [My Dial Settings] screen for models with a control dial

To change the shooting settings quickly according to the scene ( Camera Set. Memory)
You can register the appropriate shooting settings* for scene to the camera or a memory card, and call up the settings
easily by using the function menu, etc.
* You cannot register custom key settings.

To save the customized camera settings to a memory card (Save/Load Settings)

You can save camera settings* to a memory card using [Save/Load Settings]. This function is useful when you want to
back up the settings, or to import the settings to another camera of the same model, etc.
* Some settings cannot be saved on a memory card.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Fn (function) button
Add Item
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
Camera Set. Memory
Save/Load Settings

TP1001264540

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

360
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

You can use the custom key function to assign the functions you use most frequently to easily operable buttons and dials.
This lets you skip the process of selecting items from MENU, so you can recall the functions more quickly.

You can separately assign functions to custom keys for the still image shooting mode, movie shooting mode, and
playback mode.

Assignable functions vary depending on the buttons or dials.

You can assign functions to the following buttons and dials.

1. MOVIE Button
2. Custom Button 1
3. Control Dial
4. Custom Button 2
5. Fn/ Button
6. Control Wheel/Left Button/Right Button/Down Button
7. Button

The following is the procedure for assigning the [Subject Recognition AF] function to the center button.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.].

If you want to assign a function to recall while shooting movies, select [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]. If you want to
assign a function to recall while playing back images, select [ Custom Key Setting].
You can also select [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] and [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] from MENU → (Setup) →
[Dial Customize].

2 Move to the [Rear] screen using the top/bottom side of the control wheel. Then, select [Center Button] and
press the center of the control wheel.

3 Select [Subject Recognition AF] using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, and then press the
center.

361
 If you press the center button while shooting and eyes are detected, [Subject Recognition AF] will activate and
the camera will focus on the eyes. Shoot images while holding down the center button.

To use different functions for the dials/wheel depending on the shooting mode
If you add a check mark to [Separate M mode and other modes.] when assigning functions to the dials/wheel, you can
assign different functions for [Manual Exposure] and the other exposure modes ([Intelligent Auto]/[Program
Auto]/[Aperture Priority]/[Shutter Priority]).

Hint
By pressing a button to which a function can be assigned on the custom key setting screen, you can go to the setting screen for
the pressed button (except for some buttons). (when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later)

You can also assign shooting functions to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold
button.

Related Topic
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

TP1001262826

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

362
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

You can assign the desired functions to the control dial and the control wheel, and register up to three combinations of
settings as “My Dial” settings. You can quickly recall or switch registered “My Dial” settings by pressing the custom key
you assigned in advance.

Registering functions to “My Dial”

Register the functions that you want to assign to the control dial and the control wheel as [My Dial 1] through [My Dial 3].

1. MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [My Dial Settings].

2. Select a dial or wheel for (My Dial 1), and press the center of the control wheel.
3. Select the desired function to assign using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center of the control wheel.

Select “--” (Not set) for a dial or wheel to which you do not want to assign any function.

4. After you select functions for all of the dials and the wheel in (My Dial 1) by repeating Steps 2 and 3, select [OK].
The settings for (My Dial 1) will be registered.

If you want to register (My Dial 2) and (My Dial 3) as well, follow the same procedure as described above.

Assigning a key to recall “My Dial”

Assign a custom key to recall the registered “My Dial” settings.

1. MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] →
Select the key that you want to use to recall “My Dial.”
2. Select the number of the “My Dial” setting that you want to recall or the pattern for switching “My Dial.”

Menu item details

My Dial 1 during Hold /My Dial 2 during Hold/My Dial 3 during Hold:
While you hold down the key, the functions that you registered in [My Dial Settings] are assigned to the dial/wheel.
My Dial 1→2→3 :
Each time you press the key, the function changes in the following sequence: “Normal function → Function of My Dial 1
→ Function of My Dial 2 → Function of My Dial 3 → Normal function.”
Toggle My Dial 1 /Toggle My Dial 2/Toggle My Dial 3:
The function registered using [My Dial Settings] is maintained even if you do not hold down the key. Press the key again
to return to the normal function.

Shooting while switching “My Dial”

During shooting, you can recall “My Dial” using the custom key, and shoot as you change the shooting setting by turning
the control dial/control wheel.

363
In the following example, the functions listed below are registered to "My Dial," and [My Dial 1→2→3] is assigned to the
C1 (Custom 1) button.

My Dial 1 My Dial 2 My Dial 3

Control wheel ISO Shutter Speed Creative Look

Control dial Aperture White Balance Not set

1. Press the C1 (Custom1) button.

The functions registered to [My Dial 1] will be assigned to the control wheel/control dial.

The icons for the functions registered to [My Dial 1] are displayed in the lower part of the screen.

2. Turn the control wheel to set the ISO value, and turn the control dial to set the aperture value.
3. Press the C1 button again. The functions registered to [My Dial 2] will be assigned to the control wheel/control dial.
4. Turn the control wheel to set the shutter speed, and turn the control dial to set [ White Balance].
5. Press the C1 button again, and change the setting values for the functions registered to [My Dial 3].
Note
“My Dial” settings in which every dial/wheel is set to [Not set] are not recalled when you press the custom key. They are also
skipped in [My Dial 1→2→3].

Even if a dial/wheel has been locked using the [Dial / Wheel Lock] function, it will be unlocked temporarily when “My Dial” is
recalled.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001263919

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

364
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Camera Set. Memory

Allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings per shooting mode (Still/Movie/S&Q Motion/time-
lapse movie) to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings during shooting.

1 Set the product to the setting you want to register.

2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Camera Set. Memory] → desired number.

3 Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.

Items that can be registered

You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu
of the camera.
Aperture (F number)
Shutter speed

To change registered settings

Change the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the same mode number.

Note
M1 through M4 can be selected only when a memory card is inserted into the product.

Program Shift cannot be registered.

Related Topic
Recalling registered shooting settings (Cam.Set)

TP1001224843

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

365
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Recalling registered shooting settings (Cam.Set)

Allows you to shoot an image after recalling your preferred shooting settings registered with [ Camera Set. Memory].

1 Set the camera to the desired shooting mode using the Still/Movie/S&Q switch.

2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot

Mode] → [ Cam.Set] → desired number.

Hint
Settings registered to a memory card using another camera of the same model name can be recalled with this camera.

Note
If you perform [ Cam.Set] after completing the shooting settings, the registered settings will be given priority and the original
settings may become invalid. Check the indicators on the screen before shooting.

Related Topic
Camera Set. Memory

TP1001224771

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

366
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Fn Menu Settings

The Function menu is a menu of 12 functions that is displayed at the bottom of the screen when you press the Fn
(Function) button in the shooting mode.
You can register 12 functions to the Function menus for still image shooting and movie shooting, respectively.

The following is the procedure for changing [ Creative Look] in the still image function menu to [ Grid Line Display].

To change the movie function menu, select a movie function menu item in Step 2.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → select [Fn Menu Settings].

2 Select ( Creative Look) from among the 12 still image function menu items using the
top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, and then press the center.

3 Move to the screen showing [ Grid Line Display] using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.
Then, select [ Grid Line Display] and press the center of the control wheel.

( Grid Line Display) will be displayed in the former location of ( Creative Look) in the
Function menu.

Hint
When [Touch Operation] is set to [On] and [Shooting Screen] is set to [On], you can also open [Fn Menu Settings] by holding
down the icon in the function menu.

Related Topic
Fn (function) button

TP1001265440

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

367
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Add Item

You can register the desired menu items to (My Menu) under MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Add Item].

2 Select an item that you want to add to (My Menu) using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control
wheel.

3 Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

To add menu items from the menu screen

You can add the menu item currently selected on the menu screen to (My Menu). This function can be used when
the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

1. Press the (Delete) button while the cursor is over the menu item that you want to add to (My Menu).
The context menu will appear.
When [Touch Operation] is set to [On], you can display the context menu by touching and holding the menu item.

2. Select [Add to My Menu].

3. Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

Hint
You can add up to 42 items to (My Menu).

Note
You cannot add the following items to (My Menu).
Any item under MENU → (Playback)

Related Topic
Sort Item
Delete Item
MENU button

TP1001261633

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

368
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Sort Item

You can rearrange the menu items added to (My Menu) under MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Sort Item].

2 Select an item that you want to move using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

3 Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

Related Topic
Add Item

TP1001261634

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

369
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Delete Item

You can delete menu items added to (My Menu) of MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete Item].

2 Select an item that you want to delete using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then
press the center to delete the selected item.

Hint
To delete all the items on a page, select MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete Page].

You can delete all the items added to (My Menu) by selecting MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete All].

Related Topic
Delete Page
Delete All
Add Item

TP1001261635

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

370
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Delete Page

You can delete all the menu items added to a page under (My Menu) in MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete Page].

2 Select a page that you want to delete using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center of the control wheel to delete the items.

Related Topic
Delete All
Add Item

TP1001261636

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

371
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Delete All

You can delete all the menu items added to (My Menu) in MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete All].

2 Select [OK].

Related Topic
Delete Page
Add Item

TP1001261637

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

372
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Display From My Menu

You can set My Menu to appear first when you press the MENU button.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Display From My Menu] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
My Menu appears first when you press the MENU button.
Off:
The most recently displayed menu appears when you press the MENU button.

Related Topic
Add Item
MENU button

TP1001264521

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

373
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Different Set for Still/Mv

For each item in still image shooting and movie recording, you can select whether to use a common setting or separate
settings.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → Select [Different Set for Still/Mv].

The operation guide screen will appear. Select [OK] to display the setting screen.

2 Add check marks to the items that you want to set separately for still image shooting and movie recording,
and then select [OK].

You can set the following items separately for still image shooting and movie recording.
Aperture
Shutter Speed
ISO
Exposure Comp.
Metering Mode
White Balance
Picture Profile
Focus Mode

Hint
When you switch from a common setting to separate settings with [Different Set for Still/Mv], the current settings are applied to
both still image shooting and movie recording. However, the custom white balance setting is only applied to still image shooting.

When you switch from separate settings to a common setting with [Different Set for Still/Mv], the setting values of items return to
their initial values. As an exception, the setting values for still image shooting are applied to the aperture value, shutter speed, and
custom white balance settings.

TP1001265441

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

374
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Av/Tv Rotate

Sets the direction of rotation for the control dial or control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter speed.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [Av/Tv Rotate] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Normal:
Does not change the direction of rotation for the control dial or control wheel.
Reverse:
Reverses the direction of rotation for the control dial or control wheel.

TP1001262827

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

375
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Function Ring(Lens)

You can choose which of the following functions to assign to the function ring on the lens: power-assisted focusing
(power focus), or switching the angle of view between full frame and APS-C/Super 35 mm (available only with lenses
equipped with a function ring).

For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the lens.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [Function Ring(Lens)]→ desired setting.

Menu item details

Power Focus:
The focusing position moves toward infinity when you turn the function ring to the right. The focusing position moves to
the closer range when you turn the function ring to the left.
/Full Frame:
The angle of view switches between full frame and APS-C/Super 35 mm when the function ring is turned.
The angle of view switches regardless of the direction in which you turn the function ring.

Related Topic
APS-C S35 (Super 35mm) Shooting (still image/movie)

TP1001263920

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

376
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Dial / Wheel Lock

You can set whether the dials and wheel can be locked by holding down the Fn (Function) button.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [Dial / Wheel Lock] → desired setting.

To lock the dials and wheel, hold down the Fn (Function) button until the message “Locked.” appears on the
monitor.

Menu item details

Lock:
Locks the control dial and control wheel.
Unlock:
Does not lock the control dial and control wheel even if you hold down the Fn (Function) button.

Hint
You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

You can lock all buttons, dials, and wheels except the shutter button by pressing and holding the MENU button and the Fn
(Function) button simultaneously for 5 seconds. Press and hold the MENU button and the Fn button simultaneously for 5 seconds
again to release the lock.

Note
If you set [AF Area Registration] to [On], [Dial / Wheel Lock] will be fixed to [Unlock].

Related Topic
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)

TP1001271262

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

377
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

REC w/ Shutter (movie)

You can start or stop recording movies by pressing the shutter button instead of the MOVIE (Movie) button.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ REC w/ Shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Enables movie recording using the shutter button when the shooting mode is set to [Movie], [S&Q Motion], or [ Time-
lapse].
Off:
Disables movie recording using the shutter button.

Hint
When [ REC w/ Shutter] is set to [On], you can use the shutter button to start or stop recording movies on an external
recording/playback device using [REC Control].

Note
When [ REC w/ Shutter] is set to [On], you cannot focus by pressing the shutter button halfway down during movie recording.

Related Topic
Shooting movies (Intelligent Auto)

TP1001261626

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

378
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Adding Shot Marks with the shutter button (movies)

By pressing the shutter button deeply down while recording a movie, you can add a Shot Mark to the movie frame at the
time the shutter button was pressed. The Shot Mark can be used to automatically create a still image from a scene in a
movie.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ with Shutter Button] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Add Shot Mark1:
While recording a movie, press the shutter button to add Shot Mark 1 to the movie frame.
Add Shot Mark2:
While recording a movie, press the shutter button to add Shot Mark 2 to the movie frame.
Do not add:
Does not add a Shot Mark by pressing the shutter button.

Note
If [ with Shutter Button] is set to add Shot Marks by pressing the shutter button, focusing will not be performed by
pressing the shutter button halfway down.

When [ REC w/ Shutter] is set to [On], [ with Shutter Button] becomes locked to [Do not add].

Related Topic
Automatic creation of still images from Shot Marks
REC w/ Shutter (movie)

TP1001804771

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

379
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Monitor Flip Direction

The direction of image and menu screen displays can be inverted according to the camera orientation* and the monitor
angle/orientation.
* When the camera’s system software (firmware) version is Ver.2.00 or later

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Monitor] → [Monitor Flip Direction].

2 Adjust the camera orientation and the monitor angle/orientation to the desired position.

3 Select the desired setting while checking the monitor.

Menu item details

Auto:
Inverts the direction of the monitor display by detecting the camera orientation and the monitor angle/orientation.
Mirror Flip:
Flips the monitor display around the shorter edge.
180 Degree Flip:
Rotates the monitor display 180 degrees.
No Flip:
Does not invert the display of the monitor.

Hint
By repeatedly pressing the key to which the [Switch Monitor Flip Disp] function is assigned, you can switch the setting in the order
of [Mirror Flip] → [180 Degree Flip] → [No Flip] → [Mirror Flip]. When [Monitor Flip Direction] is set to [Auto], the display method is
temporarily switched while the setting value remains [Auto].

Note
Even if [Monitor Flip Direction] is set to [Mirror Flip], the direction of the monitor display during playback will not be inverted.

TP1001804776

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

380
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Vertical Display

Sets whether or not to automatically rotate the information display when you hold the camera vertically.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Monitor] → [Vertical Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Rotates the information display according to the camera orientation.
Off:
Does not rotate the information display regardless of the camera orientation.

About the vertical information display

During vertical display, the same information is provided as on the horizontal shooting screen, and it is arranged to match
the orientation of the monitor.

About the controls during vertical display

During vertical display, the direction of the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel and the touch operations are also
rotated to match the orientation of the monitor so that intuitive operation is possible.
The functions assigned to the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [
Custom Key/Dial Set.] will not rotate during vertical display.

Hint
You can set the information to be displayed on the screen by selecting MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [DISP
(Screen Disp) Set], and the display mode can be switched by pressing the DISP (Display Setting) button.

During vertical display in the movie recording modes, information other than the movie recording status and recording time will be
hidden after a certain period of time if the screen display mode is set to [No Disp. Info.] and [Exposure: TimeOut] is selected.

During vertical display, the touch function icons displayed on the left and right sides of the screen will also be arranged to match
the screen orientation.

Note

381
 The orientation of the camera cannot be detected when the lens is facing up or down.

Related Topic
DISP (Screen Disp) Set
DISP (Display Setting) button

TP1001804775

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

382
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

DISP (Screen Disp) Set

Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected using DISP (Display Setting) in shooting mode.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [DISP (Screen Disp) Set] → desired setting → [Enter].

The items marked with (check) are available.

Menu item details

Display All Info. :
Shows recording information.
No Disp. Info. :
Does not show recording information. You can set whether to always display exposure information or to hide the
exposure information after a certain period of time has elapsed from operation of the shutter button, etc. when shooting
images. ([Exposure: On]/[Exposure: TimeOut])
During vertical display in the movie recording modes, information other than the movie recording status and recording
time will be hidden after a certain period of time if the screen display mode is set to [No Disp. Info.] and [Exposure:
TimeOut] is selected (when the camera's system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later).

Histogram :
Displays the luminance distribution graphically.
Level :
Indicates whether the product is level in both the front-back (A) and horizontal (B) directions. When the product is level in
either direction, the indicator turns to green.

Note
If you tilt the product forward or backward by a large degree, the level error will be great.

The product may have a margin of error of almost ±1° even when the inclination is corrected by the level.

Related Topic

383
DISP (Display Setting) button

TP1001248257

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

384
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Contents of this chapter

The following table of contents lists the features described in this chapter (“Viewing”). From each item name, you can
jump to the page describing the respective functions.

Viewing images
Playing back still images
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position
Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)
Playing back movies
Volume Settings
4ch Audio Monitoring (movie)
Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)
Cont. Play for Interval
Play Speed for Interval

Changing how images are displayed

Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)
Playback Filter Condition
Image Order
Display as Group
Focus Frame Display (playback)
Aspect Marker Disp. (still image)
Disp Specified Time Img.

Setting how to jump between images

Select Image Jump Dial
Image Jump Method

Protecting recorded images (Protect)

Adding information to images

Rating
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Rotating an image (Rotate)

Crop

Extracting still images from a movie

Photo Capture
Creating still images from Shot Marks
Shot Marks after still image creation (playback)
JPEG/HEIF Switch (Photo Capture / Creating still images from Shot Marks)

Deleting images
385
 Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)
Delete pressing twice
Delete confirm.

Viewing images on a TV
Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable

TP1001271169

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

386
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Playing back still images

Plays back the recorded images.

1 Press the (Playback) button to switch to the playback mode.

You can touch (Playback) on the screen to switch to the playback mode.
If the touch function icons are not displayed, swipe left or right on the monitor to display them.
For details, refer to “Touch function icons.”

2 Select the image with the control wheel.

When [Display as Group] is set to [On], images shot with continuous shooting or interval shooting are displayed
as one group. To play back the images in the group, press the center of the control wheel.

Hint
The product creates an image database file on a memory card to record and play back images. An image that is not registered in
the image database file may not be played back correctly. To play back images shot using other devices, register those images to
the image database file using MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Recover Image DB].

If you play back the images right after continuous shooting, the monitor may display an icon indicating that data is being
written/the number of images left to write. During writing, some functions are not available.

When [ Focus Frame Display] is set to [On], the focus frame at the time of shooting is displayed over played-back images.
The focus frame that the camera used to focus during shooting is displayed in green. Even if multiple focus frames are displayed
during shooting, only the one on which the camera actually tried to focus will be displayed during playback.

Related Topic
Recover Image DB (still image/movie)
Display as Group
Focus Frame Display (playback)
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Touch function icons

TP1001224882

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

387
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

Enlarges the still image being played back. Use this function to check the focus of the image, etc.

1 Display the image you want to enlarge, and slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the T side.

Slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the W side to adjust the zoom scale.
By rotating the control dial, you can switch to the previous or next image while keeping the same zoom scale.
The view will zoom in on the part of the image where the camera focused during shooting. If the focus location
information cannot be obtained, the camera will zoom in on the center of the image.

2 Select the portion you want to enlarge by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel.

3 Press the MENU button or the center of the control wheel to exit the playback zoom.

Hint
You can also enlarge an image being played back using MENU.

You can change the initial magnification and initial position of enlarged images by selecting MENU → (Playback) →
[Magnification] → [ Enlarge Initial Mag.] or [ Enlarge Initial Position].

You can also enlarge the image by touching the monitor. Drag the monitor to move the enlarged position. Set [Touch Operation] to
[On] and [Playback Screen] to [On] beforehand.

Related Topic
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position
Touch Operation
Playback Screen
Touch panel

TP1001248341

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

388
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Enlarge Initial Mag.

Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Magnification] → [ Enlarge Initial Mag.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard. Mag.:
Displays an image with the standard magnification.
Previous Mag.:
Displays an image with the previous magnification. The previous magnification is stored even after the enlarged display
screen is closed.

Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Position

TP1001257073

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

389
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Enlarge Initial Position

Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Magnification] → [ Enlarge Initial Position] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Focused Position:
Enlarges the image from the point of focus during shooting.
Center:
Enlarges the image from the center of the screen.

Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Mag.

TP1001257062

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

390
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)

Selects the orientation when playing back recorded images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Display Rotation] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
When you rotate the camera, the camera detects the vertical and horizontal directions, and displays the image being
played back according to the orientation.
Manual:
Images shot vertically are displayed vertically. If you have set the image orientation using the [Rotate] function, the image
will be displayed accordingly.
Off:
Images are always displayed horizontally.

Note
Movies shot vertically are played back horizontally during movie playback.

Related Topic
Rotating an image (Rotate)

TP1001224892

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

391
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Playing back movies

Plays back the recorded movies.

1 Press the (playback) button to switch to playback mode.

2 Select the movie to be played back using the control wheel and press the center of the control wheel to
start playback.

Available operations during movie playback

You can perform slow playback and sound volume adjustment, etc. by pressing the down side of the control wheel.

: Playback
: Pause
: Fast-forward
: Fast-rewind
: Forward slow playback
: Reverse slow playback
: Next movie file
: Previous movie file
: Displays the next frame
: Displays the previous frame
: Photo Capture
: Sound volume adjustment
: Closes the operation panel

Hint
The product creates an image database file on a memory card to record and play back images. An image that is not registered in
the image database file may not be played back correctly. To play back images shot using other devices, register those images to
the image database file using MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Recover Image DB].

“Forward slow playback,” “Reverse slow playback,” “Displays the next frame” and “Displays the previous frame” are available
during pause.

Movie files recorded using other products may not be playable on this camera.

For movies with Shot Marks, the positions of the Shot Marks are displayed on the playback bar during movie playback. In
addition, the Shot Mark icon is displayed on the screen when a scene to which a Shot Mark was added is played back.

You can jump to the positions of Shot Marks by turning the control dial while paused.

Note
Even if you shoot the movie vertically, the movie will be displayed horizontally on the screen of the camera.

Related Topic
Recover Image DB (still image/movie)

392
 TP1001248342

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

393
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Volume Settings

Sets the sound volume for movie playback.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Sound Option] → [Volume Settings] → desired setting.

Adjusting the volume during playback

Press the bottom side of the control wheel while playing back movies to display the operation panel, then adjust the
volume. You can adjust the volume while listening to the actual sound.

TP1001224902

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

394
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

4ch Audio Monitoring (movie)

Sets the audio to be monitored by the device connected to the (headphone) terminal of the camera when you record
movie audio in 4 channels or when playing back a movie recorded in 4 channels.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Sound Option] → [ 4ch Audio Monitoring] → desired setting.

Menu item details

CH1/CH2:
Outputs audio from channel 1 to the L (left) side and from channel 2 to the R (right) side.
CH3/CH4:
Outputs audio from channel 3 to the L (left) side and from channel 4 to the R (right) side.
CH1+3/CH2+4:
Outputs the mixed audio of channel 1 and channel 3 to the L (left) side and the mixed audio of channel 2 and channel 4
to the R (right) side.
CH1/CH1:
Outputs audio from channel 1 to the L (left) side and R (right) side.
CH2/CH2:
Outputs audio from channel 2 to the L (left) side and R (right) side.

Note
The [ 4ch Audio Monitoring] settings are enabled when an accessory for 4-channel audio recording is attached to the Multi
Interface Shoe of the camera during movie recording.

The camera cannot output audio in 4 channels to the device connected to the (headphone) terminal of the camera.

When outputting audio through the speakers of the camera, the channels will also change depending on the [ 4ch Audio
Monitoring] setting.

Related Topic
Shoe Audio Set.

TP1001265443

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

395
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)

Automatically plays back images continuously.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Viewing] → [Slide Show] → desired setting.

2 Select [Enter].

Menu item details

Repeat:
Select [On], in which images are played back in a continuous loop, or [Off], in which the product exits the slideshow when
all the images are played back once.
Interval:
Select the display interval for images from among [1 Sec], [3 Sec], [5 Sec], [10 Sec] or [30 Sec].
To quit the slideshow in the middle of playback
Press the MENU button to quit the slideshow. You cannot pause the slideshow.

Hint
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel.

TP1001224893

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

396
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Cont. Play for Interval

Continuously plays back images shot using interval shooting.

You can create movies from still images produced by interval shooting using the computer software Imaging Edge
Desktop(Viewer). You cannot create movies from the still images on the camera.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Viewing] → [Cont. Play for Interval].

2 Select the image group that you want to play back, and then press the center of the control wheel.

Hint
On the playback screen, you can start continuous playback by pressing the down button while displaying an image in the group.

You can resume play or pause by pressing the down button during playback.

You can change the playback speed by turning the control dial or the control wheel during playback. You can also change the
playback speed by selecting MENU → (Playback) → [Viewing] → [Play Speed for Interval].

You can continuously play back images shot with continuous shooting as well.

Related Topic
Interval Shoot Func.
Play Speed for Interval
Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)

TP1001263917

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

397
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Play Speed for Interval

Sets the playback speed for still images during [Cont. Play for Interval].

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Viewing] → [Play Speed for Interval] → desired setting.

Hint
You can also change the playback speed by turning the control dial or the control wheel during [Cont. PB for Interval].

Related Topic
Cont. Play for Interval

TP1001263918

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

398
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)

You can display multiple images at the same time in playback mode.

1 Slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the W side while the image is being played back.

2 Select the image by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel or turning the control
wheel.

To change the number of images to be displayed

MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Image Index] → desired setting.

Menu item details

9 Images/30 Images

To return to single-image playback

Select the desired image and press the center of the control wheel.

To display a desired image quickly

Select the bar on the left of the image index screen using the control wheel, then press the top/bottom sides of the
control wheel. While the bar is being selected, you can display the calendar screen or folder selection screen by pressing
the center.

TP1001224884

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

399
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Playback Filter Condition

You can narrow down the images to be played back using multiple filtering conditions.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Target] → [Playback Filter Condition] → Set the desired conditions,
and then select [Execute Filter].

Menu item details

Date:
Filters the playback target by date.
Folder:
Filters the playback target by folder.
Still Images/Movies :
Sets the playback target to still images only or to movies only. ([Still Image]/[Movie])
Rating :
Filters the playback target by rating. ([ ]-[ ]/[ ])
Protect:
Filters the playback target by the presence of protection. ([Yes]/[No])
Shot Mark:
Filters the playback target by the presence of shot marks. ([Yes]/[Shot Mark1 Only]/[Shot Mark2 Only]/[No])
Smartphone Trans State:
Filters the playback target by transferring status to a smartphone. ([Non-transferred]/[Success. Trans. Img.])
File Format :
Filters the playback target by the file format when [Still Images/Movies] is set to [Still Image].
([RAW]/[JPEG]/[HEIF]/[RAW & JPEG]/[RAW & HEIF]/[RAW/RAW & JPEG]/[RAW/RAW & HEIF]/[Images Incl RAW])
File Format:
Filters the playback target by the recorded format when [Still Images/Movies] is set to [Movie]. ([XAVC HS 4K]/[XAVC S
4K]/[XAVC S HD]/[XAVC S-I 4K]/[XAVC S-I HD])

Hint
The white lines at the top and bottom of the playback screen indicate that the playback target is being filtered.

When you use the filtering condition [Date] or [Folder], add check marks to the dates/folders to set as the playback target. You
can also specify the range using the Fn (Function) button.

When you perform the following functions while the playback target is filtered, the function is applied only to the filtered images.
Delete
Protect
Rating
Transferring to a smartphone

Note
Filtering of the playback target is canceled by the following operations.
Shooting a still image or movie
Crop
Photo Capture
Turning the camera off

400
Inserting/removing a memory card

TP1001804779

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

401
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Image Order

Sets the order in which to display images on the playback screen.

This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Target] → [Image Order] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Date Order:
Displays images in order of date.
Folder Order:
Displays images in order of folder.

Hint
When [Folder Order] is selected, the folder for movies is displayed on top.

TP1001804780

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

402
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Display as Group

Sets whether or not to display continuously shot images or images shot using interval shooting as a group.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Display as Group] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays images as a group.
To play back the images in a group, select the group and press the center of the control wheel.
Off:
Does not display images as a group.

Hint
The following images are grouped.
Images shot with [Drive Mode] set to [Cont. Shooting] (One sequence of images shot continuously by holding down the shutter
button during continuous shooting becomes one group.)
Images shot with [Interval Shoot Func.] (Images shot during one session of interval shooting become one group.)

On the image index screen, (Display as Group) icon is displayed over the group.

Note
If you delete the group, all the images in the group will be deleted.

Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Interval Shoot Func.

TP1001262565

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

403
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Focus Frame Display (playback)

Sets whether or not to display a focus frame around the area where the camera focused when you play back a still
image.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [ Focus Frame Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not display a focus frame during playback.
On:
Displays a focus frame in green during playback.

Hint
Even if multiple focus frames are displayed at the time of shooting, only the one indicating where the camera actually focused will
be displayed during playback.

Even if a focus frame is displayed around the face of the subject at the time of shooting, the focus frame will be displayed around
the eye during playback when an eye is recognized.

Note
A focus frame will not be displayed over the following images.
Still images shot with manual focus
Movies
Still images created with [Photo Capture]

The focus frame is displayed only on the single-image playback screen. The focus frame is not displayed on the image index
screen or over enlarged images.

The focus frame is not displayed during auto reviewing.

If you shoot an image with a different composition after performing auto-focusing, the focus frame will appear offset from the
subject.

Even if the focus frame is displayed, it may not be in focus to the subject.

Even if you turn off the focusing frame display while shooting using the [AF Area Auto Clear] or [AF-C Area Display] function,
when [ Focus Frame Display] is set to [On], the focusing frame will be displayed during playback.

TP1001265444

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

404
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Aspect Marker Disp. (still image)

The aspect marker that was displayed during shooting can be displayed over the still image being played back.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [ Aspect Marker Disp.] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Aspect Marker Disp.:
Sets whether or not to display the aspect marker. ([On]/[Off])
Aspect Marker Level:
Sets the color density for the displayed marker. (0 to 15)

Note
Although the color density selected on the setting screen for [Aspect Marker Level] may not be applied to the setting screen, the
marker will be displayed with the selected color density on the playback screen.

When the display setting is [Histogram], the aspect marker is not displayed.

Related Topic
Marker Display (still image)

TP1001804777

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

405
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Disp Specified Time Img.

You can play back images by specifying the shooting date and time.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Disp Specified Time Img.].

2 Set the date and time of the image to be played back using the control wheel, and then press the center.

The image shot on the specified date and time will be played back.

If there are no images shot on the specified date and time, the image shot on the closest date and time will be
played back.

Note
When [Disp Specified Time Img.] is performed while playing back images in a group, the image shot on the closest date and time
in the group is played back.

For movies, the date and time when the recording was started are treated as the shooting date and time.

TP1001268187

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

406
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Select Image Jump Dial

You can jump between images during playback. This function is useful when you want to find one of many recorded
images. You can also quickly find protected images or images set with a particular rating. Assign this function to either
the control dial or the control wheel.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Select Image Jump Dial] → desired item.

Menu item details

Dial:
Use the control dial to jump between images.
Control Wheel:
Use the control wheel to jump between images.

Related Topic
Image Jump Method

TP1001262822

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

407
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Image Jump Method

Sets the method for jumping between images during playback by operating a dial.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Image Jump Method] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

One by one / By 10 images / By 100 images:
Jumps in units of the specified number of images.
By 3 minutes / By 5 minutes / By 10 minutes / By 30 minutes / By 1 hour / By 3 hours / By 6 hours / By 12 hours /
By 24 hours:
Jumps between images by the specified time unit based on the shooting date and time of the images.
Protect Only:
Plays back only protected images.
Rating Only:
Plays back all rated images.
Rating Only ( ) - Rating Only ( ):
Plays back only images for which a rating ( to ) has been specified.
W/O Rating Only:
Plays back only images that are not rated.
Shot Mark Only :
Sets the image jump target only to images with Shot Marks.
Shot Mark1 Only / Shot Mark2 Only:
Sets the image jump target only to images with the specified Shot Mark.
No Shot Mark:
Sets the image jump target only to images without Shot Marks.
Divider Frame Only:
Sets the image jump target only to divider frames.
Image After Divider:
Sets the image jump target only to images next to divider frames.

To add a Shot Mark to a movie

If you add a Shot Mark to a movie, you can use it as a mark for selecting, transferring, or editing the movie.
To add a Shot Mark during recording, swipe left or right on the screen to display the touch function icons, and then touch
(Add Shot Mark1). You can also add a Shot Mark during playback by touching (Add Shot Mark1) on the
screen.

To create a divider frame

By creating a divider frame between sessions of shooting, you can use it as a mark when selecting images.
Assign [Create Divider Frame] to the desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] in advance and press the custom key
when you want to create a divider frame.

Hint

408
 To use the touch function icons, enable touch operations during shooting or playback by configuring each setting in MENU →
(Setup) → [Touch Operation].

Use a custom key or the shutter button to add a second Shot Mark (Shot Mark 2). Shot Mark 1 can also be added using a custom
key or the shutter button.
When adding a Shot Mark with a custom key: assign [Add Shot Mark1] or [Add Shot Mark2] in [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] and
press the assigned button while shooting.
When adding a Shot Mark with the shutter button: set [ with Shutter Button] to [Add Shot Mark1] or [Add Shot Mark2 ]
and press the shutter button while shooting (when the camera's system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later).
When adding a Shot Mark while playing back a movie: assign [Add/Delete Shot Mark1] or [Add/Delete Shot Mark2] in [
Custom Key Setting] and press the assigned button during playback.

Note
When [Image Jump Method] is set to [One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images], one group is counted as one image.

Related Topic
Select Image Jump Dial
Protecting recorded images (Protect)
Rating
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001265445

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

409
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Protecting recorded images (Protect)

Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. The (protect) mark is displayed on protected images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Selection/Memo] → [Protect] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Applies the protection of the selected multiple images.
(1) Select the image to be protected, then press the center of the control wheel. The (check) mark is displayed in the
check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to remove the (check) mark.
(2) To protect other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].

All in this Folder:

Protects all images in the selected folder.
Cancel All in this Folder:
Cancels the protection of all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Protects all images taken on the selected date.
Cancel All with this date:
Cancels the protection of all images taken on the selected date.
All Images in This Group:
Protects all the images in the selected group.
Cancel All in This Group:
Cancels the protection of all the images in the selected group.
All Filtered *:
Protects all the images filtered using the playback filter function.
Cancel All Filtered *:
Cancels the protection of all the images filtered using the playback filter function.
* When the camera’s system software (firmware) version is Ver.2.00 or later

Hint
If you assign [Protect] to the key of your choice using MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key
Setting], you can protect images or cancel protection by simply pressing the key.

If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be protected. To select and protect particular images within
the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.

Note
The menu items that can be selected vary according to the setting for [Playback Filter Condition] and [Image Order] and the
selected content.

Related Topic

410
Playback Filter Condition
Image Order

TP1001224895

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

411
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Rating

You can assign ratings to recorded images on a scale of the number of stars ( - ) to make it easier to find images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Selection/Memo] → [Rating].

The image rating selection screen will appear.

2 Press the left/right sides of the control wheel to display an image to which you want to assign a rating, and
then press the center.

3 Select the level of (Rating) by pressing the left/right side of the control wheel, and then press the
center.

4 Press the MENU button to exit the rating setting screen.

To set ratings to multiple images at a time using the playback filter function
By using the playback filter function, you can set ratings to multiple images at a time (when the camera's system software
(firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later). Perform [Rating] after narrowing down the images using [Playback Filter Condition], and
then select [All Filtered].

When you select [Multiple Img.], you can rate images one by one from among the narrowed down images only.

To set ratings when shooting still images

Assign [Add Rating ( )] through [Add Rating ( )] to the desired keys using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] in advance
and press the custom keys after shooting a still image. You can set the rating for the last shot still image.

Ratings cannot be set when shooting movies.

Hint
You can also assign ratings when playing back images by using the custom key. Assign [Rating] to the desired key using [
Custom Key Setting] beforehand, and then press the custom key while playing back an image to which you want to assign a
rating. The level of (Rating) changes each time you press the custom key.

By specifying ratings with the [Image Jump Method] function, you can quickly find the desired image.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Image Jump Method
Playback Filter Condition
412
 TP1001262823

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

413
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Rating Set(Custom Key)

Sets the available number of (rating) when rating (ranking) images with the key to which you have assigned [Rating]
using [ Custom Key Setting].

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Selection/Memo] → [Rating Set(Custom Key)].

2 Add a (check) mark to the number of (rating) that you want to activate.

You can select the checked number when setting [Rating] using the custom key.

Related Topic
Rating
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

TP1001262824

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

414
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Rotating an image (Rotate)

Rotates a recorded image counter-clockwise.

1 Display the image to be rotated, then select MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [Rotate].

2 Press the center of the control wheel.

The image is rotated counter-clockwise. The image rotates as you press the center.
If you rotate the image once, the image remains rotated even after the product is turned off.

Note
Even if you rotate a movie file, it will be played back horizontally on the monitor of the camera.

You may not be able to rotate images shot using other products.

When viewing rotated images on a computer, the images may be displayed in their original orientation depending on the software.

TP1001224894

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

415
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Crop

Crops recorded images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [Crop].

The image selection screen will appear.

2 Select the still image that you want to crop, and then press the center of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the size and position of the cropping frame.

You can change the size of the cropping frame using the control dial or the control wheel.
You can move the position of the cropping frame using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.
You can preview the cropped image by pressing the Fn button.

4 Press the center of the control wheel.

The cropped image will be saved.

Hint
The cropped image is saved as a separate image file. The original image remains as is.

The file format and image quality setting of the cropped image will be the same as those of the original image.

On the playback screen, the (Crop) icon is displayed with cropped images.

Note
You cannot crop RAW images or movies.

TP1001266991

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

416
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Photo Capture

Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback
to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.

1 Display the movie that you want to capture as a still image.

2 MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [Photo Capture].

3 Play back the movie and pause it.

4 Find the desired scene using forward slow playback, reverse slow playback, displays the next frame, and
displays the previous frame, and then stop the movie.

5 Press (Photo Capture) to capture the chosen scene.

The scene is saved as a still image.

Hint
With [ JPEG/HEIF Switch], you can select either JPEG or HEIF as the recording file format for still images.

Related Topic
Shooting movies (Intelligent Auto)
Playing back movies
JPEG/HEIF Switch (Photo Capture / Creating still images from Shot Marks)

TP1001257069

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

417
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Creating still images from Shot Marks

While playing back a movie, you can create still images from movie frames with Shot Marks.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

1 Play back a movie with Shot Mark(s).

2 MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [ Create Still Image].

By registering [ Create Still Image] to [ Custom Key Setting], you can easily call up [ Create Still Image].

About the still images created

You can select either the JPEG or HEIF format for the still images to be created. You can switch the format by
selecting MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [ JPEG/HEIF Switch].
The size of the still images created will be the same size as the movie being played back (i.e., the size depends on
the recording format of the movie).

Related Topic
JPEG/HEIF Switch (Photo Capture / Creating still images from Shot Marks)
File Format (movie)

TP1001804772

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

418
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Shot Marks after still image creation (playback)

Sets whether to automatically delete Shot Marks after creating still images when playing back a movie using the [
Create Still Image] function.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [ after still img crt] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto Delete:
Deletes Shot Marks automatically after creating still images.
Maintain:
Does not delete Shot Marks automatically after creating still images.

Related Topic
Creating still images from Shot Marks

TP1001804773

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

419
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

JPEG/HEIF Switch (Photo Capture / Creating still images from Shot Marks)

Switches the file format (JPEG / HEIF) for still images captured with [Photo Capture] or [ Create Still Image].
You can view and edit JPEG files in various environments. The HEIF format has high compression efficiency. The
camera can record with high image quality and small file sizes in the HEIF format. Depending on the computer or
software, you may not be able to view or edit HEIF files. In addition, a HEIF-compatible environment is required to play
back still images in the HEIF format. You can enjoy high-quality still images by connecting the camera and the TV via
HDMI.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [ JPEG/HEIF Switch] → desired setting.

Menu item details

JPEG:
Switches the file format for still images captured to JPEG. This setting gives priority to compatibility.
HEIF(4:2:0):
Switches the file format for still images captured to HEIF 4:2:0 10bit. This setting gives priority to image quality and
compression efficiency.
HEIF(4:2:2):
Switches the file format for still images captured to HEIF 4:2:2 10bit. This setting gives priority to image quality.

Note
HEIF image files recorded with this camera cannot be displayed on other cameras that do not support the HEIF file format. Be
careful not to accidentally erase HEIF image files by formatting the memory card or deleting the files.

Related Topic
Photo Capture
Creating still images from Shot Marks

TP1001265446

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

420
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)

You can delete multiple selected images. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it. Confirm the image to
be deleted beforehand.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → [Delete] → desired setting.

Menu item details

All Other Than This Img.:
Deletes all images in the group except the selection.
All Images in This Group:
Deletes all images in the selected group.
Multiple Img.:
Deletes the selected images.
(1) Select the images to be deleted, then press the center of the control wheel. The (check) mark is displayed in the
check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to remove the (check) mark.
(2) To delete other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].
All in this Folder:
Deletes all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Deletes all images taken on the selected date.
All Filtered *:
Deletes all the images filtered using the playback filter function.
* When the camera’s system software (firmware) version is Ver.2.00 or later

Hint
Perform [Format] to delete all images, including protected images.

To display the desired folder or date, select the desired folder or date during playback by performing the following procedure:
(Image Index) lever → select the bar on the left using the control wheel → select the desired folder or date using the
top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be deleted. To select and delete particular images within the
group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.

Note
The protected images cannot be deleted.

The menu items that can be selected vary according to the settings for [Playback Filter Condition] and [Image Order] and the
selected content.

Related Topic
Display as Group
Delete button

421
Format
Playback Filter Condition

TP1001224887

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

422
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Delete pressing twice

Sets whether or not you can delete the image currently being played back by pressing the (Delete) button twice in
sequence.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → [ Delete pressing twice] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Enables you to delete the image currently being played back by pressing the (Delete) button twice.
Off:
Does not enable you to delete the image currently being played back by pressing the (Delete) button twice.

TP1001266992

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

423
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Delete confirm.

You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as a default on the delete confirmation screen.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → [Delete confirm.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

"Delete" first:
[Delete] is selected as the default setting.
"Cancel" first:
[Cancel] is selected as the default setting.

TP1001224907

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

424
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable

To view images stored on this product using a TV, an HDMI cable (sold separately) and a TV equipped with an HDMI jack
are required. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the compatible TV.

1 Turn off both this product and the TV.

2 Connect the HDMI terminal of this product to the HDMI jack of the TV using an HDMI cable (sold separately).

Use an HDMI cable that is compatible with the HDMI Type-D micro jack of the product and the HDMI jack of the TV.

3 Turn on the TV and switch the input.

4 Turn on this product.

Images shot with the product appear on the TV screen.

5 Select an image using the right/left sides of the control wheel.

The monitor of this camera is not lit up on the playback screen.

If the playback screen is not displayed, press the (Playback) button.

Note
Do not connect this product and another device using the output terminals of both. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Some devices may not work properly when connected to this product. For example, they may not output video or audio.

Use an HDMI cable with the HDMI logo or a genuine Sony cable.

When [Time Code Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or recording device. In such cases, set
[Time Code Output] to [Off].

425
If images do not appear on the TV screen properly, select MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [ HDMI Resolution]
→ [2160p], [1080p] or [1080i] according to the TV to be connected.

During HDMI output, when you switch the movie from 4K to HD image quality or vice-versa, or change the movie to a different
frame rate or different color mode, the screen may become dark. This is not a malfunction.

If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control, select MENU → (Setup) → [External
Output] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → [Off].

TP1001248283

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

426
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Format

When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the
camera for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory
card, and is unrecoverable. Save valuable data on a computer, etc.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [Format].

2 Select [Enter]. (Quick formatting)

If you press the (Delete) button, a message to perform full formatting will be displayed. You can launch full
formatting by selecting [Enter].

The difference between quick formatting and full formatting

Perform full formatting when you feel like the speed of recording to the memory card or read-out from the memory card
has become slow, or when you want to erase data completely, etc.
Full formatting takes longer than quick formatting, because all areas of the memory card are initialized.

Hint
You can also display the screen for formatting the memory card by pressing and holding the MENU button and then the
(Delete) button on the shooting screen for approximately two seconds.

You can cancel full formatting before it is completed. Even if you cancel full formatting in the middle of the process, the data will
be erased, so you can use the memory card as is.

Note
Formatting permanently erases all data including protected images and registered settings (from M1 to M4).

The access lamp lights up during formatting. Do not remove the memory card while the access lamp is lit up.

Format the memory card on this camera. If you format the memory card on the computer, the memory card may not be usable
depending on the format type.

It may take a few minutes to complete formatting, depending on the memory card.

You cannot format the memory card if the remaining battery charge is less than 1%.

Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used
Notes on memory card

TP1001224919

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

427
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Recover Image DB (still image/movie)

If image files were processed on a computer, problems may occur in the image database file. In such cases, the images
on the memory card will not be played back on this product. Also, if you use a memory card in the camera after using it in
another device, the images on the memory card may not be played back correctly. For example, the images may not be
displayed as a group. If these problems happen, repair the file using [ Recover Image DB].
Images recorded on the memory card are not deleted by [ Recover Image DB].

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Recover Image DB] → [Enter].

Note
If the battery pack is extremely depleted, image database files cannot be repaired. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.

TP1001224924

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

428
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Display Media Info. (still image/movie)

Displays the recordable number of still images and the remaining recording time for movies on the memory card.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Display Media Info.].

TP1001224925

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

429
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

File/Folder Settings

Configure settings related to the folder and file name of the still image to be shot.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [File/Folder Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to still images.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers for each folder.
[Reset]: Resets file numbers for each folder.
Forced File Number Reset:
Resets the still image file number and creates a new folder.
Set File Name:
You can specify the first three characters of the file name.
Folder Name:
You can set how folder names are assigned.
[Standard Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + any 5 characters”. Example: 100MSDCF
[Date Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + Y (the last digit of the year)/MM/DD”.
Example: 10030405 (Folder number: 100; date: 04/05/2023)

Hint
When [Folder Name] is set to [Standard Form], the last 5 characters of the folder name can be set using [Create New Folder].

You can also change the last five characters of the folder name by using [Forced File Number Reset].

Note
Only capital letters, numbers, and underscores can be used for [Set File Name]. Underscores cannot be used for the first
character.

The three characters specified using [Set File Name] are only applied to files recorded after the setting is made.

Related Topic
Create New Folder
File Settings

TP1001264522

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

430
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Select REC Folder

If [Folder Name] under [File/Folder Settings] is set to [Standard Form] and there are 2 folders or more, you can select the
folder on the memory card to which images are to be recorded.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [Select REC Folder] → desired folder.

Note
You cannot select the folder when [Folder Name] under [File/Folder Settings] is set to [Date Form].

Related Topic
File/Folder Settings
Create New Folder

TP1001224921

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

431
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Create New Folder

Creates a new folder on the memory card for recording still images. A new folder is created with a folder number one
greater than the largest folder number currently used. Images are recorded in the newly created folder.
Up to 9 999 images in total can be stored in one folder. When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new folder may be
automatically created.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [Create New Folder].

Hint
You can set the last 5 characters of the folder name.

Note
When you insert a memory card that was used with other equipment into this product and shoot images, a new folder may be
automatically created.

You cannot change the folder name when [Folder Name] under [File/Folder Settings] is set to [Date Form].

Related Topic
File/Folder Settings

TP1001224922

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

432
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

File Settings

Configure settings for the file names of recorded movies.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [File Settings] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to movies.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers even if the memory card is changed.
[Reset]: Resets the file number when the memory card is changed.
Series Counter Reset:
Resets the series counter used when [File Number] is set to [Series].
File Name Format:
You can set the format for movie file names.
[Standard]: The file name of the recorded movie starts with “C.” Example: C0001
[Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+File number.”
[Date + Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Date+Title+File number.”
[Title + Date]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+Date+ File number.”
Title Name Settings:
You can set the title when [File Name Format] is set to [Title], [Date + Title], or [Title + Date].

Note
Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be input for [Title Name Settings]. Up to 37 characters can be entered.

Titles specified using [Title Name Settings] are only applied to movies recorded after the setting is made.

You cannot set how folder names are assigned for movies.

If you are using an SDHC memory card, [File Name Format] is locked to [Standard].

If you insert a memory card used with [File Name Format] set to one of the following into another device, the memory card may
not function properly.
[Title]
[Date + Title]
[Title + Date]

If there are unused numbers due to file deletion, etc., these numbers will be reused when the movie file number reaches “9999.”

Related Topic
File/Folder Settings

TP1001264523

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

433
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Copyright Info

Writes copyright information onto the still images.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [Copyright Info] → desired setting.

2 When you select [Set Photographer] or [Set Copyright], a keyboard appears on the screen. Enter your
desired name.

You can only enter alphanumeric characters and symbols for [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright]. You can enter
up to 46 letters.

Menu item details

Write Copyright Info:
Sets whether to write copyright information. ([On]/[Off])
If you select [On], a (Copyright) icon will appear on the shooting screen.

Set Photographer:
Sets the photographer name.
Set Copyright:
Sets the copyright holder name.
Disp. Copyright Info:
Displays the current copyright information.

Note
A (Copyright) icon appears during the playback of images with copyright information.

In order to prevent unauthorized use of [Copyright Info], be sure to clear the [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright] columns
before lending out or handing over your camera.

Sony is not liable for problems or damages resulting from use of [Copyright Info].

Related Topic
Keyboard screen

TP1001248319

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

434
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Write Serial Number (still image/movie)

Writes the camera's serial number when shooting.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [ Write Serial Number] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Writes the camera's serial number to the image.
Off:
Does not write the camera's serial number to the image.

TP1001263922

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

435
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Wi-Fi Connect

Sets whether to use the Wi-Fi function of the camera.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Connect] → desired setting.

Set this function to [On] to search for connectable access points. If connectable access points are not found,
use [WPS Push] or [Access Point Set.] to configure the settings.

Menu item details

On:
Uses the Wi-Fi function.
Off:
Does not use the Wi-Fi function.

Related Topic
WPS Push
Access Point Set.

TP1001271260

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

436
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

WPS Push

If your access point has a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily.
For details about the available functions and settings of your access point, see the access point operating instructions or
contact the administrator of the access point.
Set [Wi-Fi Connect] to [On] in advance.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [WPS Push].

2 Push the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button on the access point to connect.

Note
[WPS Push] works only if the security setting of your access point is set to WPA or WPA2 and your access point supports the Wi-
Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method. If the security setting is WEP or WPA3 only or your access point does not support the
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method, perform [Access Point Set.].

A connection may not be possible or the communication distance may be shorter depending on the surrounding conditions, such
as the type of wall material and the presence of obstructions or radio waves between the product and access point. In this case,
change the location of the product or move the product closer to the access point.

Related Topic
Access Point Set.

TP1001224939

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

437
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Access Point Set.

You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point,
security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point
operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.
Set [Wi-Fi Connect] to [On] in advance.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Access Point Set.].

2 Select the access point you want to register.

When the desired access point is displayed on the screen: Select the desired access point.
When the desired access point is not displayed on the screen: Select [Manual Setting] and set the access
point.

If you select [Manual Registration], input the SSID name of the access point, then select the security system.
If you select [WPS PIN], you can register the access point by entering the PIN code displayed on the camera
into the connected device.

3 Input the password, and select [OK].

Access points without (Lock mark) do not require a password.

Note that unmasking your password risks revealing your password to a third party. Make sure that no one is
around before unmasking.

4 Select [OK].

Other setting items

Depending on the status or the setting method of your access point, you may want to set more items.

438
For an unregistered access point, select the [Detail] button on the password entry screen.
For a registered access point, press the right side of the control wheel on the access point selection screen.

Priority Connection:
Select [On] or [Off].
IP Address Setting:
Select [Auto] or [Manual].
IP Address:
If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the set address.
Subnet Mask/Default Gateway/Primary DNS Server/Second DNS Server:
If you have set [IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter each address according to your network environment.

Hint
When you select a registered access point, [Priority Connection] for that access point becomes set to [On], prioritizing
connections to that access point.

The prioritized access point is marked with a (crown) icon.

Note
Once an access point is registered, [Priority Connection] for that access point is set to [On]. If you want to stop preferentially
connecting to a certain access point, set [Priority Connection] for the access point to [Off].

If there are both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz access points with the same SSID and encryption format, the access point with the stronger
radio field will be displayed.

Related Topic
WPS Push
Keyboard screen

TP1001224940

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

439
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Wi-Fi Frequency Band (models supporting 5 GHz)

Sets the frequency band for Wi-Fi communications. [5GHz] has faster communication speeds and more stable data
transfers than [2.4GHz].
The [Wi-Fi Frequency Band] setting applies to a Wi-Fi Direct connection with a smartphone or computer, which is a direct
connection to the camera not via an access point.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Frequency Band] → desired setting.

Menu item details

2.4GHz/5GHz

TP1001264527

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

440
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Display Wi-Fi Info.

Displays Wi-Fi information for the camera such as the MAC address, IP address, etc.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Display Wi-Fi Info.].

Hint
Information other than the MAC address is displayed when [Wi-Fi Connect] is set to [On].

TP1001264684

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

441
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

SSID/PW Reset

This product shares connection information with devices that have permission to connect when establishing a Wi-Fi
Direct connection with a smartphone or a computer. If you want to change which devices have permission to connect,
reset the connection information.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [SSID/PW Reset] → [OK].

Note
If you connect this product to a smartphone after resetting the connection information, you must make the settings for the
smartphone again.

If you connect this product to a computer with Wi-Fi Direct after resetting the connection information, you must reconfigure the
settings on the computer.

Related Topic
Operating the camera from a computer (Remote Shoot Function)

TP1001224943

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

442
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Bluetooth Settings

Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander or shooting grip via a
Bluetooth connection.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.

Menu item details

Bluetooth Function:
Sets whether to activate or not the Bluetooth function of the camera. ([On]/[Off])
Pairing:
Displays the screen for pairing the camera and smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander.
Manage Paired Device:
Enables you to check or delete the pairing information for devices paired with the camera.
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl:
Sets whether or not to use a Bluetooth compatible remote commander (sold separately). ([On]/[Off])
Disp Device Address:
Displays the BD address of the camera.

Note
After you delete the pairing information for the camera from your smartphone, delete pairing information for the smartphone from
the camera using [Manage Paired Device].

Related Topic
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
Cnct. while Power OFF (smartphone)
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)

TP1001257118

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

443
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

You can operate the camera using a Bluetooth compatible remote commander (sold separately) or shooting grip (sold
separately). For details on compatible remote commanders or shooting grips, visit the Sony website in your area, or
consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

1 On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On].

2 On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] → [On].

If there is no Bluetooth device currently paired with the camera, the screen for pairing as described in Step 3 will
appear.

3 On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → [Pairing] to display the screen for pairing.

4 On the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing.

For details, refer to the instruction manual for the Bluetooth remote commander.

5 On the camera, select [OK] on the confirmation screen for the Bluetooth connection.

Pairing is complete, and you can now operate the camera from the Bluetooth remote commander. After pairing
the device once, you can connect the camera and the Bluetooth remote commander again in the future by
setting [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [On].

Menu item details

On:
Enables Bluetooth remote commander operation.
Off:
Disables Bluetooth remote commander operation.

Icons for Bluetooth connection

(Bluetooth connection available): Bluetooth connection with the Bluetooth remote commander is established.
(Bluetooth connection unavailable): Bluetooth connection with the Bluetooth remote commander is not established.

Icons displayed when connecting to a Bluetooth remote commander

(remote commander mark): A Bluetooth remote commander can be used.

Hint
The Bluetooth connection is only active while you are operating the camera using the Bluetooth remote commander.

The Bluetooth icon is not displayed when the touch function icons are displayed in the movie recording mode. To see the
Bluetooth icon, swipe the touch function icons left or right to hide the touch function icons.

444
 If the (Bluetooth connection available) icon is displayed on the screen but (remote commander mark) is not displayed, set
[Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [On] and follow the on-screen instructions.

Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To use the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing
again.

If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the
paired Bluetooth remote commander.

The following functions cannot be used when [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].
Power-saving mode

Only one Bluetooth remote commander can be connected to the camera at a time.

If the function does not work properly, check the following notes and then try pairing again.
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
If the function does not work properly even after you have performed the above operations, delete the pairing information for
the device that you want to connect using [Manage Paired Device] on the camera.

Related Topic
Bluetooth Settings

TP1001264526

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

445
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Wired LAN (USB-LAN)

Configures a wired LAN. You can connect this product to a network via wired LAN by connecting a commercially
available USB-LAN conversion adaptor to the USB Type-C terminal on the product.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wired LAN] → desired setting.

Menu item details

IP Address Setting:
Sets whether to configure the IP address for the wired LAN automatically or manually. ([Auto]/[Manual])
Display Wired LAN Info.:
Displays wired LAN information for this product such as the MAC address or IP address.

IP Address:
If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the fixed address.
Subnet Mask/Default Gateway/Primary DNS Server/Second DNS Server:
If you have set [ IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter each address according to your network environment.

Hint
We recommend that you use a gigabit ethernet adaptor for USB Type-C connections.

Note
Not all types of USB-LAN conversion adaptors are guaranteed to operate properly.

Related Topic
Keyboard screen

TP1001261642

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

446
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

USB-LAN/Tethering

Connects to the network by connecting a USB-LAN conversion adaptor to the camera or uses a tethering connection on
your smartphone to connect to the network.

1 MENU → (Network) → [USB-LAN/Tethering] → desired connection method.

To disconnect from the network, select [USB-LAN Disconnection] or [Tethering Disconnection].

Menu item details

USB-LAN Connection:
Connects to the network using a USB-LAN conversion adaptor.
Tethering Connection:
Connects to the network using your smartphone’s tethering connection.

Related Topic
Wired LAN (USB-LAN)

TP1001271184

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

447
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Airplane Mode

When you board an airplane, etc., you can temporarily disable all the wireless-related functions including Wi-Fi.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Airplane Mode] → desired setting.

If you set [Airplane Mode] to [On], an airplane mark will be displayed on the screen.

TP1001224938

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

448
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Edit Device Name

You can change the device name for Wi-Fi, [Remote Shooting], or Bluetooth connections.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Edit Device Name].

2 Select the input box, then input the device name → [OK].

Related Topic
WPS Push
Access Point Set.
Operating the camera from a computer (Remote Shoot Function)
Keyboard screen

TP1001224941

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

449
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)

Imports a root certificate needed to verify a server from a memory card.

Use this function for communications encrypted using RTMPS protocol during network streaming.
The root certificate is saved to the camera and can be updated.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

1 Save a root certificate to a memory card.

Save the certificate to the root directory of the memory card. Name the file as follows according to the function
you will use.

[Streaming]: RTMPcert.pem (PEM format)

[Cloud Connection and other functions]: sonycert

2 Insert the memory card to which the root certificate has been saved into the camera.

3 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Import Root Certificate] → Select a function that uses the
root certificate, and then select [OK].

The root certificate saved to the memory card is read by the camera, and then the root certificate on the camera
is updated.

Menu item details

Streaming:
Reads a root certificate to verify the distribution server for network streaming.
Cloud Connection and other functions:
Reads a root certificate to verify the server for the cloud connection or other functions.

Note
Do not remove the memory card from the camera during read operations.

When the network settings are reset, the root certificate on the camera is reset as well.

TP1001261656

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

450
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Access Authen. Settings

Encrypts communications between the camera and device during remote shooting or image transfer.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Access Authen. Settings] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Access Authen.:
Sets whether to encrypt communication with access authentication. ([On] / [Off])
User:
Sets the username for access authentication.
Password:
Sets the password for access authentication.
Generate Password:
Automatically generates a password for access authentication.

Note
When [Access Authen.] is set to [Off], communication is performed without SSH connection authentication or encryption, so the
content may be intercepted, or the camera may be accessed by an unintended third party.

Before connecting the camera to a smartphone or computer, make sure that [Access Authen.] is not unintentionally set to [Off].

The username and password for [Access Authen. Settings] are automatically generated and set when the camera is purchased.
When setting your own username and password, be careful not to be intercepted by others.

For the password in [Access Authen. Settings], set a character string that is long enough that it is difficult for others to guess, and
keep it securely.

If you unmask your password when entering it, there is a risk that it will be revealed to a third party. Make sure that no one is
around before unmasking.

Initialize the camera before lending or giving it to others.

For [User], set a string of alphanumeric characters/symbols of 16 characters or less.

For [Password], set a string of alphanumeric characters/symbols of 8 to 16 characters including both letters and numerals.

Related Topic
Access Authen. Info
Keyboard screen

TP1001271259

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

451
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Access Authen. Info

Displays the information required when connecting the camera to a computer or smartphone using access
authentication.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Access Authen. Info].

The information required to connect such as the username, password, MAC address, and fingerprint of this camera
are displayed.

Note
When displaying [Access Authen. Info] on the screen, make sure that no one is around to avoid the information on the screen
being seen by others and to prevent unauthorized use of usernames, passwords, and fingerprints.

Initialize the camera before lending or giving it to others.

Related Topic
Access Authen. Settings

TP1001271258

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

452
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Wi-Fi Direct Settings

Changes the Wi-Fi Direct setting to improve connection compatibility.

This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Wi-Fi Direct Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Type1 (Standard):
Connects via Wi-Fi Direct in a standard format.
It is recommended that you normally set it to [Type1 (Standard)].
Type2:
Set to [Type2] only if you cannot connect via Wi-Fi Direct with the [Type1 (Standard)] setting.
This may improve the Wi-Fi Direct connection.

Note
If you change the setting when the Wi-Fi connection is normal, it may affect connections with external devices.

TP1001804774

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

453
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Reset Network Set.

Resets all the network settings to default settings.

[Airplane Mode] will not be reset to [Off] even if you perform [Reset Network Set.] when [Airplane Mode] is set to [On].

1 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Reset Network Set.] → [Enter].

TP1001257154

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

454
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Monitor Brightness

Adjust the brightness of the screen.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Monitor] → [Monitor Brightness] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Manual:
Adjusts the brightness within the range of –2 to +2.
Sunny Weather:
Sets the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.

Note
The [Sunny Weather] setting is too bright for shooting indoors. Set [Monitor Brightness] to [Manual] for indoor shooting.

TP1001248282

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

455
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Auto Monitor OFF (still image)

Sets whether or not to turn the monitor off automatically in shooting modes for still images.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → [ Auto Monitor OFF] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Does not turn OFF:
Does not turn the monitor off.
2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec/1 Min:
Turns the monitor off after the designated time has been elapsed without any operation performed.
You can resume shooting by performing an operation, such as pressing the shutter button halfway down.

Note
If you will not be using the camera for a long period of time, turn the camera off.

TP1001266968

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

456
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Power Save Start Time

Sets the amount of time that the camera will wait before going into the power save mode if it is not in use (except when
powered from a computer or smartphone). You can resume shooting by pressing the shutter button halfway down or
performing other operations.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → [Power Save Start Time] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off/30 Min/5 Min/2 Min/1 Min/10 Sec

Note
Turn off the product when you do not use it for a long time.

When [Power Save Start Time] is set to [Off] or [30 Min], power consumption becomes higher than usual.

The power save function is deactivated in the following situations:

When powered via USB from a computer or other device
While playing back slideshows
While recording movies
While connected to a computer or TV
When [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On]
While streaming
While uploading images to Creators’ Cloud

TP1001248316

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

457
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Power Save by Monitor

Sets whether or not to enable power save linkage when the monitor is opened or closed facing inward.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → [Power Save by Monitor] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Both Linked :
Enables power save linkage with the monitor. The camera returns from power saving mode when the monitor is opened,
and enters power saving mode when the monitor is closed facing inward.
Open: Return :
The camera returns from power saving mode when the monitor is opened.
Close: Power Save :
The camera enters power saving mode when the monitor is closed facing inward.
Does Not Link :
Disables power save linkage with the monitor.

TP1001268264

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

458
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Auto Power OFF Temp.

Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to [High],
you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → [Auto Power OFF Temp.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard:
Sets the standard temperature for the camera to turn off.
High:
Sets the temperature at which the camera turns off to higher than [Standard].

Notes when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]

Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand. Use a tripod.
Using the camera while holding it in your hand for a long period of time may cause low-temperature burns.

Continuous recording time for movies when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]
The duration of time available for continuous movie recording is as follows when the camera starts recording with the
default settings after the power has been turned off for a while. The following values indicate the continuous time from
when the camera starts recording until the camera stops recording.

Ambient temperature: 25°C (77°F)

Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 90 minutes
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 30 minutes
Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F)
Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 20 minutes
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 20 minutes
HD: XAVC S HD (60p 50M/50p 50M 4:2:0 8bit; when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi; when the monitor is open)
4K: XAVC S 4K (60p 150M/50p 150M 4:2:0 8bit; when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi; when the monitor is open)

Note
Even if [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High], depending on the conditions or the temperature of the camera, the recordable
time for movies may not change.

Related Topic
Recordable movie times

TP1001261638

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

459
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Display Quality (still image)

You can change the display quality.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Monitor] → [ Display Quality] → desired setting.

Menu item details

High:
Displays in high quality.
Standard:
Displays in standard quality.

Note
When [High] is set, battery consumption will be higher than when [Standard] is set.

When the temperature of the camera rises, the setting may become locked to [Standard].

TP1001224908

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

460
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

USB Connection Mode

Selects the USB connection method when the camera is connected to a computer, etc.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB] → [USB Connection Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Sel. When Connect:
Each time you connect the USB cable to the camera, select the mode you want to use from the following. ([Live
Stream(USB Streaming)], [Image Transfer (MSC)], [Image Transfer (MTP)], or [Remote Shooting])
USB Streaming:
Performs USB streaming via the connected computer or smartphone.
MassStorage(MSC):
Establishes a Mass Storage connection when connecting the camera to a computer, etc.
When you connect the camera to a computer or other USB device, the camera is recognized as a removable disk, and
you can transfer files on the camera.
MTP:
Establishes an MTP connection between the camera, a computer, and other USB devices.
When you connect the camera to a computer or other USB device, the camera is recognized as a media device, and you
can transfer still images/movies on the camera.

Remote Shooting:
Uses Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote) to control the product from a computer, including such functions as shooting and
storing images on the computer.

Related Topic
USB Streaming (movie)
Importing images to the computer
Operating the camera from a computer (Remote Shoot Function)

TP1001224914

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

461
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

USB LUN Setting

Enhances compatibility by limiting of USB connection functions.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB] → [USB LUN Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multi:
Normally, use [Multi].
Single:
Set [USB LUN Setting] to [Single] only if you cannot make a connection.

TP1001224915

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

462
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

USB Power Supply

Sets whether to supply power via the USB cable when the product is connected to a computer or an USB device.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB] → [USB Power Supply] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Power is supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc.
Off:
Power is not supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc.

Operations available while supplying power via a USB cable

The following table shows you which operations are available/unavailable while supplying power via a USB cable.

Operation Available / Unavailable

Shooting images Available

Playing back images Available

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connections Available

Charging a battery pack Unavailable

Turning the camera on without a battery pack inserted Unavailable

Note
Insert the battery pack into the product to supply power via USB cable.

TP1001248318

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

463
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

HDMI Resolution

When you connect the camera to a TV or monitor device using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select the
resolution to be output from the HDMI terminal of the camera during still image shooting or playback.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [ HDMI Resolution] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
The camera automatically recognizes the resolution of the connected TV or output device and sets the output resolution
accordingly.
2160p:
Outputs signals in 2160p.
1080p:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).

Note
If images are not displayed properly using the [Auto] setting, select [1080i], [1080p], or [2160p] based on the connected TV.

TP1001224912

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

464
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

HDMI Output Settings (movie)

Sets the video and audio to be output to an external recorder/player connected via HDMI when shooting a movie.
Use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable (sold separately) to output 4K movies.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [ HDMI Output Settings] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Rec. Media dur HDMI Output:
Sets whether or not to record movies on the memory card of the camera during HDMI output.
[On]: Records movies on the memory card of the camera, and outputs the movies to the HDMI-connected device at the
same time. The color depth for the output movie is based on [Record Setting] under [ Movie Settings].
[Off(HDMI Only)]: Does not record movies on the memory card of the camera, and outputs movies only to devices
connected via HDMI.
Output Resolution:
Sets the resolution of the image that will be output to another device connected via HDMI when [Rec. Media dur HDMI
Output] is set to [On]. ([Auto] / [2160p] / [1080p] / [1080i])
4K Output Set.(HDMI Only):
Sets the frame rate and color depth of 4K movie output to another device connected via HDMI when [Rec. Media dur
HDMI Output] is set to [Off(HDMI Only)]. ([60p 10bit] / [50p 10bit] / [30p 10bit] / [25p 10bit] / [24p 10bit])
Time Code Output:
Sets whether or not to output the time code and user bit to another device connected via HDMI. ([On] / [Off])
Time code information is transmitted as digital data, not as an image displayed on the screen. The connected device can
then refer to the digital data in order to recognize the time data.
REC Control:
Sets whether to start or stop recording on the external recorder/player remotely by operating the camera when the
camera is connected to an external recorder/player. ([On] / [Off])
4ch Audio Output:
When recording audio in 4 channels, set the combination of audio channels that will be output to other devices connected
via HDMI.
[CH1/CH2]: Outputs audio from channel 1 to the L (left) side and from channel 2 to the R (right) side.
[CH3/CH4]: Outputs audio from channel 3 to the L (left) side and from channel 4 to the R (right) side.

Hint
With [REC Control] set to [On], (STBY) is displayed when a recording command is ready to be sent to the external
recorder/player, and (REC) is displayed when a recording command is being sent to the external recorder/player.

Even when playing back a movie with 4 channels on a device connected to the HDMI terminal of the camera, the audio is output
with the [4ch Audio Output] setting.

Note
When [Rec. Media dur HDMI Output] is set to [Off(HDMI Only)], [HDMI Info. Display] becomes temporarily set to [Off].

When [Rec. Media dur HDMI Output] is set to [Off(HDMI Only)], the counter does not move forward (the actual recording time is
not counted) while the movie is being recorded on an external recorder/player.

Regardless of the [Output Resolution] setting, the HDMI output resolution will be 1080 in the following cases.*
When [Log Shooting] under [Log Shooting Setting] is set to an item other than [Off]
When [ Picture Profile] is set to PPLUT1-PPLUT4
465
 * However, when [Rec. Media dur HDMI Output] is set to [Off(HDMI Only)], the video is output in 4K.

[REC Control] can be used with external recorders/players that support the [REC Control] function.

When [Time Code Output] is set to [Off], you cannot set [REC Control].

Even when (REC) is displayed, the external recorder/player may not work properly depending on the settings or status of
the recorder/player. Check if the external recorder/player works properly before use.

When [Time Code Output] is set to [On], images may not be output properly to the TV or recording device. In this case, set [Time
Code Output] to [Off].

It is not possible to output audio in 4 channels to other devices connected via HDMI.

TP1001265448

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

466
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

HDMI Info. Display

Selects whether or not to display shooting information on a TV or a monitor device when the camera and TV, etc. are
connected via an HDMI cable (sold separately).

1 MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [HDMI Info. Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the shooting information on the TV.
The recorded image and shooting information are displayed on the TV, while nothing is displayed on the camera’s
monitor.
Off:
Does not display the shooting information on the TV.
Only the recorded image is displayed on the TV, while the recorded image and shooting information are displayed on the
camera’s monitor.

TP1001224916

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

467
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

CTRL FOR HDMI

When connecting this product to a TV using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can operate this product by aiming the
TV remote control at the TV.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → desired setting.

2 Connect this product to a TV.

The input of the TV is switched automatically and images on this product are displayed on the TV screen.

The operation method differs depending on the TV you are using. For details, refer to the operating instructions
supplied with the TV.

Menu item details

On:
You can operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Off:
You cannot operate this product with a TV’s remote control.

Note
If you connect this product to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.

If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control, set [CTRL FOR HDMI] to [Off].

TP1001224913

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

468
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Language

Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings and messages.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Area/Date] → [ Language] → desired language.

TP1001225360

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

469
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Area/Date/Time Setting

You can set the area (where you are using the camera), daylight savings ([On]/[Off]), the date display format, and the
date and time.
The Area/Date/Time setting screen will be displayed automatically if you did not register your smartphone in the initial
setup or when the internal rechargeable backup battery has fully discharged. Select this menu to set the date and time
after the first time.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Area/Date] → [Area/Date/Time Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Area Setting:
Sets the area where you are using the camera.
Daylight Savings:
Selects Daylight Savings [On] / [Off].
Date/Time:
Sets the date and time.
You can switch the time display format (24-hour or 12-hour format) by pressing the (Delete) button.

Date Format:
Selects the date display format.

Hint
To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack, and leave the product for 24 hours or more
with the power off.

If the clock resets every time the battery is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out. Consult your
service facility.

TP1001224918

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

470
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

NTSC/PAL Selector

Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Area/Date] → [NTSC/PAL Selector] → [Enter]

TP1001225361

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

471
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Audio signals

Selects whether the product produces a sound or not.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Sound Option] → [Audio signals] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:all:
The shutter produces sounds, and sounds are produced for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter
button halfway down.
On:shutter only:
Only the shutter produces sounds. Sounds are not produced when focusing by pressing the shutter button halfway down,
etc.
Off:
Sounds are not produced.

Hint
When [Silent Mode] is set to [On], [Audio signals] becomes locked to [Off].

Note
If [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the camera will not beep when it focuses on a subject.

Related Topic
Silent Mode Settings (still image/movie)

TP1001257203

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

472
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

REC Lamp

Sets whether to turn on the recording lamps during movie recording.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [REC Lamp] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On
The recording lamp lights up during recording.
Off
The recording lamp does not light up during recording.

Hint
Set [REC Lamp] to [Off] if the light of the recording lamp reflected by an object, such as glass, is captured by the camera.

TP1001266996

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

473
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Video Light Mode

Sets the illumination setting for the HVL-LBPC LED light (sold separately).

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Video Light Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Power Link:
The video light turns on/off in sync with the ON/OFF operation of this camera.
REC Link:
The video light turns on/off in sync with movie recording start/stop.
REC Link&STBY:
The video light turns on when movie recording starts and dims when not recording (STBY).
Auto:
The video light automatically turns on when it is dark.

Note
When shooting time-lapse movies, the video light will turn on/off differently according to the [ Time-lapse Settings] setting. For
details, see “ Time-lapse Settings .”

When shooting time-lapse movies, [Video Light Mode] cannot be set to [Auto]. It will automatically switch to [REC Link].

Related Topic
Time-lapse Settings

TP1001257114

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

474
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Pixel Mapping

You can manually optimize the image sensor (pixel mapping). Perform [Pixel Mapping] regularly according to the
following procedure. We recommend that you perform the operation once every three days.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → select [Pixel Mapping].

2 Attach the lens cap.

Be sure to attach the lens cap.

3 Select [OK] on the confirmation screen.

Pixel mapping will be performed.

The camera cannot be operated during pixel mapping.

The camera will restart when pixel mapping is complete.

Hint
When you turn the camera on, a message to perform pixel mapping will occasionally be displayed. If the message is displayed,
perform [Pixel Mapping].

If you see bright spots in a recorded image on the camera monitor, immediately perform [Pixel Mapping].

Note
Pixel mapping cannot be performed when the battery is low.

If [Pixel Mapping] is not performed regularly, bright spots may appear in recorded images.

TP1001265449

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

475
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Version

Displays the version of this product’s software. Check the version when updates for this product’s software are released,
etc.
Also displays the version of the lens if a lens compatible with firmware updates is attached.
The version of the Mount Adaptor is displayed in the lens area if a Mount Adaptor compatible with firmware updates is
attached.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Version].

When the camera is connected to the Internet, software information is obtained. If new software is available,
information about it will be displayed (when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later).

Menu item details

Body:
Displays the firmware version of the camera body.
Lens:
Displays the firmware version of the lens when a lens that supports firmware updates is attached.

Hint
You can also save the downloaded firmware data to a memory card and use the memory card to update the firmware of the
camera.

Note
Updating can be performed only when the remaining battery level is 51% or more. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.

TP1001268219

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

476
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Display Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the camera.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Display Serial Number].

TP1001271161

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

477
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Privacy Notice

Displays the privacy notification screen.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Privacy Notice].

TP1001269020

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

478
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Screen Reader (For some models only)

Sets the function for reading aloud information such as text on the screen.
Only some languages may be supported for this function depending on the model. This function is available only when
the language set in the menu is supported by this function.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [ Accessibility] → [Screen Reader] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Screen Reader:
Sets whether to use the function to read aloud. ([On]/[Off])
Speed:
Sets the speed when reading aloud.
Volume:
Sets the volume when reading aloud.

TP1001268251

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

479
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Certification Logo (For some models only)

Displays some of the certification logos for this product.

This function is available on products sold in some countries and regions only.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Certification Logo].

TP1001224927

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

480
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Save/Load Settings

You can save/load camera settings to/from a memory card. You can also load settings from another camera of the same
model.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Save/Load Settings] → desired item.

Menu item details

Load:
Loads the settings from a memory card to this camera.
Save:
Saves the current settings of this camera to a memory card.
Delete:
Deletes the settings saved on a memory card.

Settings that cannot be saved

The following setting parameters cannot be saved using the [Save/Load Settings] function. (Menu items without setting
parameters, such as, [Focus Magnifier], are not listed.)

(Shooting)
Copyright Info

(Exposure/Color)
External Flash Set.
White Balance: Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3

(Focus)

Face Memory

(Network)
Cloud Connection
WPS Push
Access Point Set.
Wi-Fi Frequency Band
IP Address Setting
Edit Device Name
Import Root Certificate
Access Authen. Settings

(Setup)
Language
Area/Date/Time Setting

Note

481
You can save up to 10 settings per memory card. When 10 settings have been already saved, you cannot perform [Save New].
Delete the existing settings using [Delete], or overwrite them.

You cannot load settings from a camera of a different model.

Even if the model name is the same, settings from a camera with a different system software version may fail to load.

You can use this function to save settings registered to [ Camera Set. Memory]. However, [Save/Load Settings] is unavailable
when the shooting mode is set to [ Cam.Set]. Set the shooting mode to a mode other than MR ( Cam.Set) before using
this function.

TP1001264495

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

482
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Setting Reset

Resets the product to the default settings. Even if you perform [Setting Reset], the recorded images are retained.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Camera Settings Reset:
Initializes the main shooting settings to the default settings. The setting values for both still image shooting and movie
recording are initialized.
Initialize:
Initializes all the settings to the default settings.

Note
Be sure not to eject the battery pack while resetting.

If you perform [Initialize], the privacy policy agreement will also be initialized, so agree to the privacy policy again before using the
camera.

The settings for [ Picture Profile] are not reset even when [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] is performed, except the
settings for PPLUT 1 - 4.

The check mark for [Picture Profile] in [Different Set for Still/Mv] is not reset when you perform either [Camera Settings Reset] or
[Initialize].

TP1001224928

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

483
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Functions available with a smartphone (Creators' App)

Using the smartphone application Creators' App, you can shoot an image while controlling the camera using a
smartphone or transfer the images recorded on the camera to the smartphone.
Download and install the application Creators' App from your smartphone’s application store. If Creators' App is already
installed on your smartphone, be sure to update it to the latest version.
For details on Creators' App, refer to the following website.
https://www.sony.net/ca/

Hint
You can also install Creators' App by scanning the QR Code displayed on the screen of the camera using your smartphone.

Note
Depending on future version upgrades, the operational procedures or screen displays are subject to change without notice.

Supported smartphones
Refer to the support page for the latest information.
https://www.sony.net/ca/help/mobile/

For details on Bluetooth versions compatible with your smartphone, check the product website for your smartphone.

TP1001248320

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

484
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Monitor & Control

Monitor & Control is a smartphone application that supports monitoring and remote shooting functions required for movie
shooting.
Monitor & Control provides detailed live view and remote shooting controls by using the screen of your smartphone as a
monitor for movie shooting (when the camera's system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later).

Download and install the application Monitor & Control from your smartphone's application store. If Monitor & Control is
already installed on your smartphone, be sure to update it to the latest version.
For details on Monitor & Control, refer to the following website.
https://www.sony.net/ccmc/

TP1001804778

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

485
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)

Connects the camera to your smartphone (pairing) to use the smartphone application Creators' App.

If you did not connect the camera with your smartphone when you turned on the camera for the first time, perform the
following procedure.
The following is the procedure for connecting the camera to your smartphone when you install Creators' App on your
smartphone for the first time.
: Operations performed on the smartphone
: Operations performed on the camera

1 : On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [Smartphone Connection].

2 : Follow the instructions on the screen and set [Bluetooth Function] to [On].

A screen for waiting for a connection from the app will appear.

If [Bluetooth Function] is already set to [On], the screen for waiting for a connection from the app will appear
immediately.

3 : Launch Creators' App on your smartphone.

4 : Follow the instructions on the screen to pair the camera with your smartphone.

When the connection is completed, a menu to select a function for the camera appears on the smartphone.

5 : On the smartphone screen, select the desired function.

Connecting to a smartphone via a Wi-Fi access point

After pairing in steps 1 to 4, connect the camera and smartphone to the same Wi-Fi access point by selecting MENU on
the camera → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Connect] → [On]. After that, follow the instructions on the smartphone
screen to connect the camera and smartphone.

If you have used Creators' App with other cameras

Launch Creators' App after Step 2, open the [Cameras] screen, select the (Add Camera) button, and follow the
instructions on the screen to continue the operation.

About the icons when connecting to a smartphone

(Bluetooth connection available): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is established.
(Bluetooth connection unavailable): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is not established.
(Wi-Fi connection available): Wi-Fi connection with the smartphone is established.
(Wi-Fi connection unavailable): Wi-Fi connection with the smartphone is not established.

486
Connecting the camera and smartphone without pairing
If you want to connect without pairing, you need to perform the Wi-Fi connection operation every time.

1. On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [Smartphone Connection].

2. Press the (Delete) button on the camera to switch to the SSID and password screen.
3. Open the Wi-Fi setting screen on your smartphone.
4. On the Wi-Fi setting screen on your smartphone, select the SSID displayed on the camera and enter the password.
5. Launch Creators' App on your smartphone and open the [Cameras] screen.
6. Select the (Setup) button in the upper right corner of the [Cameras] screen, and then select [Connect only via Wi-
Fi].
7. On the screen of Creators' App on your smartphone, select the product name of the camera (ZV-E1).
The smartphone will connect to the camera.
Note
[Smartphone Connection] cannot be executed when [Airplane Mode] is set to [On].

Up to 2 devices can be connected to the camera at the same time using Bluetooth communication.

Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi (2.4 GHz) communications use the same frequency
band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the Bluetooth function of the smartphone.

The Bluetooth icon is not displayed when the touch function icons are displayed in the movie recording mode. To see the
Bluetooth icon, swipe the touch function icons left or right to hide the touch function icons.

Related Topic
Functions available with a smartphone (Creators' App)
Using a smartphone as a remote commander
Select on Cam & Send (transferring to a smartphone)
Cnct. while Power OFF (smartphone)
Reading location information from a smartphone

TP1001268247

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

487
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Using a smartphone as a remote commander

With Creators' App, you can shoot images while checking the shooting range of the camera on the screen of the
smartphone. Connect the camera and smartphone by referring to "Related Topic" at the bottom of this page. For details
on functions that can be operated from a smartphone, refer to the following support page.
https://www.sony.net/ca/help/opr/

Related Topic
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
Remote Shoot Setting

TP1001265451

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

488
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Remote Shoot Setting

Configures settings for images saved when performing remote shooting using a smartphone or computer.

1 MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [Remote Shoot Setting] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Still Img. Save Dest.:
Sets the save destination. ([Destination Only]/[Dest.+Camera]/[Camera Only])
Save Image Size:
Selects the file size for images to be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to
[Dest.+Camera]. The original-sized JPEG/HEIF file or a 2M-equivalent JPEG/HEIF file can be transferred.
([Original]/[2M])
RAW+J Save Image:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to
[Dest.+Camera] and [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG]. ([RAW & JPEG]/[JPEG Only]/[RAW Only])
RAW+H Save Image:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to
[Dest.+Camera] and [ File Format] is set to [RAW & HEIF]. ([RAW & HEIF]/[HEIF Only]/[RAW Only])

Note
When an unrecordable memory card is inserted into the camera, you cannot record still images even if [Still Img. Save Dest.] is
set to [Camera Only] or [Dest.+Camera].

When [Camera Only] or [Dest.+Camera] is selected for [Still Img. Save Dest.] and no memory card is inserted into the camera,
the shutter will not be released even if [Release w/o Card] is set to [Enable].

While a still image is being played back on the camera, you cannot perform remote shooting using a smartphone or a computer.

[RAW+J Save Image] and [RAW+H Save Image] can be set only when [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG] or [RAW &
HEIF].

Related Topic
Using a smartphone as a remote commander

TP1001267002

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

489
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Select on Cam & Send (transferring to a smartphone)

You can transfer images to a smartphone by selecting images on the camera.

Refer to “Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection) ” to pair the camera and smartphone in
advance.

The following is the procedure for transferring the image currently displayed on the camera.

1 MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [ Select on Cam & Send] → [Size of Sending Image],
[RAW+J/H Send Target], [ Sending Target], and [Movie with Shot Mark] → desired setting.

2 Display the image to be transferred on the playback screen.

3 MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [ Select on Cam & Send] → [ Send] → [This
Image].

You can also display the [ Send] screen by pressing the (Send to Smartphone) button.

4 Launch Creators' App on your smartphone.

A message indicating that the transfer has started will appear.

5 Select [OK] on the smartphone.

The image will be transferred to the smartphone.

Even while a transfer is in progress, you can perform the following operations:*
Shooting
Menu operations
Pausing an ongoing transfer
Resuming or canceling a paused transfer
Scheduling additional transfers

The (transferred) icon will be displayed on images that have been transferred.*
You can transfer multiple images at once by selecting a setting other than [This Image] under [ Send].

* When the camera’s system software (firmware) version is Ver.2.00 or later

Menu item details

Send:
Selects images and transfers them to a smartphone. ([This Image]/[All Images in This Group]/[All with this date]/[All
Filtered] */[Add filter condition]/[Manual selection])
The options displayed may differ depending on the setting for [Playback Filter Condition] and the selected content.*
If you select [Manual selection], select the desired images using the center of the control wheel, then press MENU →
[Enter].

* When the camera's system software (firmware) version is Ver.2.00 or later

490
Size of Sending Image:
Selects the file size for images to be transferred to the smartphone. The original-sized JPEG/HEIF file or a 2M-equivalent
JPEG/HEIF file can be transferred. ([Original]/[2M])
RAW+J/H Send Target:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to a smartphone when the images are shot with [ File Format] set to
[RAW & JPEG] or [RAW & HEIF]. ([JPEG & HEIF]/[RAW]/[RAW+J & RAW+H])
Sending Target:
Sets whether to transfer the low-bit-rate proxy movie or the high-bit-rate original movie when transferring a movie to a
smartphone. ([Proxy Only]/[Original Only]/[Proxy & Original])
When you select [Proxy Only], movies can be transferred faster than when transferring the original movies.
Movie with Shot Mark:
Cuts and transfers a specified number of seconds from a movie with the position of a Shot Mark set as the center. ([Cut
to 60 seconds]/[Cut to 30 seconds]/[Cut to 15 seconds]/[Don't Cut])

To filter the images to be transferred ( Add filter condition )

Images to be transferred can be filtered by the following conditions:

Target Group: [This Date]/[This Media]

Still Images/Movies: [All]/[Only Still Images]/[Only Movies]
Target Img (Rating): [ ]-[ ], [ ]
Target Movie ( ): [All]/[Only Shot Mark Mov.]
Target Img (Protect): [All]/[Only Protected Img.]
Transfer Status *: [All]/[Only Non-transfer]
* Images transferred by selecting them on the smartphone are treated as not yet transferred.
* When [Movie with Shot Mark] is set to an item other than [Don't Cut], even if you have already transferred a clip by using a Shot Mark and
then set another Shot Mark to the movie, all of the Shot Marks will create clips which will be retransferred as not-yet transferred images.

To add a Shot Mark to a movie

If you add a Shot Mark while recording a movie, you can use it as a mark for selecting, transferring, or editing the movie.
To add a Shot Mark during recording, swipe left or right on the screen to display the touch function icons, and then touch
(Add Shot Mark1). You can also add a Shot Mark during playback by touching (Add Shot Mark1) on the
screen.

About the transfer icons

This section describes the icons displayed if the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

Current transfer status icons

(Transferring): Images are being transferred to your smartphone.
(Transfer error)*: The connection was lost while transferring images to the smartphone by operating the
camera. You can check the details of the error by opening the [ Select on Cam & Send] menu.
* If a transfer error occurs while transferring images by operating the smartphone, this icon will not be displayed.

Transfer status icons on played-back images

(Transferring): The image currently being played back is being transferred to your smartphone.
(Transferred)*: The image currently being played back has been transferred to the smartphone.
* For images transferred by selecting them on the smartphone, this icon will not be displayed.

Hint
To use the touch function icons, enable touch operations during shooting or playback by configuring each setting in MENU →
(Setup) → [Touch Operation].

While the playback filter function is used, you can set the filtered images as the target to transfer by selecting [All Filtered] in [
Send] (when the camera's system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later).

491
 Use a custom key or the shutter button to add a second Shot Mark (Shot Mark 2). Shot Mark 1 can also be added using a custom
key or the shutter button. Assign the following functions to the desired keys and press the keys while shooting or playing back a
movie.
When adding a Shot Mark with a custom key: assign [Add Shot Mark1] or [Add Shot Mark2] in [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] and
press the assigned button while shooting.
When adding a Shot Mark with the shutter button: set [ with Shutter Button] to [Add Shot Mark1] or [Add Shot Mark2]
and press the shutter button while shooting (when the camera's system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later).
When adding a Shot Mark while playing back a movie: assign [Add/Delete Shot Mark1]/[Add/Delete Shot Mark2] in [
Custom Key Setting] and press the assigned button during playback.

For movies with a Shot Mark, you can jump to the position with the Shot Mark by touching the touch function icon while paused.

Even if a transfer stops due to a network failure, you can simply resume the transfer from the camera once the connection is
restored, and the remaining images will then be transferred.

Note
Transfers initiated from the smartphone cannot be paused or canceled on the camera.

While transferring images by operating your smartphone, you can schedule additional transfers from the camera, but it may take
some time before the transfers begin.

Even if you cancel the transfer midway, the images that have already been transferred will remain.

If the camera is turned off, restarted, or disconnected during a transfer, the transfer will be paused.

Depending on the smartphone, the transferred movie may not be played back correctly. For example, the movie may not play
smoothly, or there may be no sound.

Depending on the format of the still image, movie, slow-motion movie, or quick-motion movie, it may not be possible to play it
back on a smartphone.

When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].

Related Topic
Functions available with a smartphone (Creators' App)
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
Airplane Mode

TP1001267003

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

492
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Reset Transfer Status (transferring to a smartphone)

You can reset the transfer status of images that have been transferred to your smartphone. Use this function if you want
to retransfer images that have previously been transferred. The transferred images will not be deleted even if you reset
the transfer status.

1 MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [ Reset Transfer Status].

If you press [OK] on the confirmation screen, all images that have been transferred to your smartphone will
become untransferred images.

Hint
If there are images being transferred or scheduled to be transferred, you cannot execute [ Reset Transfer Status]. Wait until all
transfers are complete before resetting.

Related Topic
Select on Cam & Send (transferring to a smartphone)

TP1001268228

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

493
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Cnct. while Power OFF (smartphone)

Sets whether or not to accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off. When [ Cnct.
while Power OFF] is set to [On], you can browse images on the camera's memory card and transfer images from the
camera to a smartphone by operating the smartphone.

1 MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [ Cnct. while Power OFF] → desired setting.

Menu Item Details

On :
Accepts Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off.
The battery level is depleted gradually while the camera is turned off. If you do not want to use [ Cnct. while Power
OFF], turn it off.
Off :
Does not accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off.

How to browse/transfer images on the smartphone

Refer to “Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection) ” to pair the camera and smartphone in
advance.

1. Set [ Cnct. while Power OFF] to [On].

2. Turn off the camera.
3. Launch Creators' App on the smartphone.
4. Select [View and Import] on the smartphone.

The images saved on the memory card of the camera can be viewed and are ready to be transferred.

Note
If the smartphone is not operated for a certain period of time, the Bluetooth connection will become deactivated. Select [View and
Import] again on the smartphone.

When the camera is turned on, the camera will switch to the shooting screen, and the connection with the smartphone will be
terminated.

[ Cnct. while Power OFF] will be set to [Off] if you cancel pairing between the camera and the smartphone or pairing fails.

If the function does not work properly, check the following notes and then try pairing again.
Ensure that the camera is either not connected to any other device or connected to only one device using Bluetooth
communication. (Up to 2 devices can be connected to the camera at the same time.)
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
If the function does not work properly even after you have performed the above operations, delete the pairing information for
the device that you want to connect using [Manage Paired Device] on the camera.

Related Topic
Functions available with a smartphone (Creators' App)
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)

494
Select on Cam & Send (transferring to a smartphone)
Bluetooth Settings

TP1001264494

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

495
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Reading location information from a smartphone

You can use the application Creators' App to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected with your
camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting images.
Refer to “Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection) ” to pair the camera and smartphone in
advance.

1 Launch Creators' App on your smartphone, open the [Cameras] screen, and tap [Setup] → [Location
Information Linkage].

2 Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Creators'
App.

(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information
obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.
When you activate [Auto Time Correction] or [Auto Area Adjustment] on a linked smartphone, the camera
automatically corrects the date setting or area setting using information from the smartphone.

Icons displayed when obtaining the location information

(Obtaining location information): The camera is obtaining the location information.
(Location information cannot be obtained): The camera cannot obtain the location information.

Hint
Location information can be linked when Creators' App is running on your smartphone even if the smartphone monitor is off.
However, if the camera has been turned off for a while, location information may not be linked immediately when you turn the
camera back on. In this case, location information will be linked immediately if you open the Creators' App screen on the
smartphone.

When Creators' App is not operating, such as when the smartphone is restarted, launch Creators' App to resume location
information linking.

If the location information linking function does not work properly, see the following notes and perform pairing again.
Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.
Ensure that the camera is either not connected to any other device or connected to only one device using Bluetooth
communication. (Up to 2 devices can be connected to the camera at the same time.)
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
Delete the pairing information for the camera registered in Creators' App.
Delete the pairing information for the camera registered in the Bluetooth settings on your smartphone.
Delete the pairing information for your smartphone registered in [Manage Paired Device] on the camera.

The Bluetooth icon is not displayed when the touch function icons are displayed in the movie recording mode. To see the
Bluetooth icon, swipe the touch function icons left or right to hide the touch function icons.

Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. Before performing pairing again, first delete the pairing
information for the camera registered in the smartphone's Bluetooth settings and Creators' App.

The location information will not be recorded when it cannot be obtained, such as when the Bluetooth connection is disconnected.

The camera can be paired with up to 15 Bluetooth devices, but can link the location information with that of only one smartphone.
If you want to link the location information with that of another smartphone, turn off the [Location Information Linkage] function

496
 under [Setup] in Creators' App on the smartphone that is already linked.

If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the
paired smartphone.

The communication distance for the Bluetooth connection or Wi-Fi may vary depending on the conditions of use.

Related Topic
Functions available with a smartphone (Creators' App)
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
Bluetooth Settings

TP1001268222

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

497
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Recommended computer environment

You can confirm the operating computer environment of the software from the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/pcenv/

TP1001257158

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

498
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Connecting the camera to a computer

1 Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the camera.

2 Turn on the camera and the computer.

3 (Setup) → [USB] → Set [USB Connection Mode] to [MassStorage(MSC)].

4 Connect the USB Type-C terminal on the camera to the computer with a USB cable (commercially available).

When you connect the camera to the computer for the first time, the procedure for recognizing the camera may
start automatically on the computer. Wait until the procedure is finished.
If you connect the camera to your computer using the USB cable when [USB Power Supply] is set to [On],
power is supplied from your computer. (Default setting: [On])
Use a cable that complies with the USB standard.
Use a SuperSpeed USB 5 Gbps (USB 3.2)-compatible computer and a commercially available USB cable for
higher-speed communications.

Note
Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode when a USB connection has been established
between the computer and the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or
waking the computer from sleep mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.

Related Topic
USB Connection Mode
USB LUN Setting

TP1001224961

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

499
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Disconnecting the camera from the computer

Perform the following operations on the computer before disconnecting the camera from the computer.

1 Click (Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media ) in the taskbar.

2 Click the displayed message.

The following operations are available after you have completed the steps above.
Disconnecting the USB cable.
Removing a memory card.
Turning off the camera.

Note
On Mac computers, drag and drop the memory card icon or the drive icon into the “Trash” icon. The camera will be disconnected
from the computer.

On some computers, the disconnection icon may not appear. In this case, you can skip the steps above.

Do not remove the USB cable from the camera while the access lamp is lit. The data may be damaged.

TP1001224963

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

500
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)

Imaging Edge Desktop

Imaging Edge Desktop is a software suite that includes functions such as remote shooting from a computer, and
adjusting or developing RAW images recorded with the camera.

For details on how to use Imaging Edge Desktop, refer to the support page.
https://www.sony.net/disoft/help/

Installing Imaging Edge Desktop on your computer

Download and install the software by accessing the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/disoft/d/

Catalyst Browse (free software)/Catalyst Prepare (paid software)

Catalyst Browse is software for previewing clips. You can preview recorded XAVC S/XAVC HS clips, view and edit media
metadata, apply image stabilization* using metadata, apply color calibration, copy to the local hard drive, or transcode to
a variety of formats and so on with Catalyst Browse.
​Catalyst Prepare adds to the functions of Catalyst Browse allowing you to organize clips using bins, perform basic
timeline editing with storyboards, and so on.
* For the conditions of use of the image stabilization function, refer to the support page.

Installing Catalyst Browse/Catalyst Prepare on your computer

Download and install the software by accessing the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/catalyst/

TP1001265452

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

501
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Importing images to the computer

You can import images from the camera to a computer by connecting the camera to the computer with a USB cable
(commercially available), or by inserting the memory card of the camera into the computer.
Open the folder in which the images you want to import are stored on the computer, and then copy the images to the
computer.

Example: Folder tree during USB Mass Storage connection

DCIM: still images

CLIP: movies
SUB: proxy movies

Note
Do not edit or otherwise process movie files/folders from the connected computer. Movie files may be damaged or become
unplayable. Do not delete movies on the memory card from the computer. Sony is not held liable for consequences resulting from
such operations via the computer.

If you delete images or perform other operations from the connected computer, the image database file may become inconsistent.
In this case, repair the image database file.

The folder tree is different during MTP connection.

TP1001248336

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

502
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Operating the camera from a computer (Remote Shoot Function)

Uses a Wi-Fi or USB connection, etc. to control the camera from a computer, including such functions as shooting and
storing images on the computer.
When the camera and a smartphone are connected, you cannot control the camera from a computer. Make sure that the
camera is not connected to a smartphone beforehand.
For details on [Remote Shoot Function], refer to the following URL:
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/app/imagingedge/l/instruction/4_1_connection/index.php
The following is the procedure for connecting the camera to your computer using a Wi-Fi connection via a Wi-Fi access
point. If you will use another connection method, refer to “How to connect the camera and the computer using a method
other than a Wi-Fi access point.”

1 Select MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Connect] → [On] to connect the camera to the Wi-Fi
access point.

Connect the computer to the same Wi-Fi access point.

2 Select MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [Remote Shoot Function] → [Remote Shooting]
→ [On].

3 Select [Access Authen. Info] to display the information such as the username, password, and fingerprint.

You can check the information by selecting MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Access Authen.
Info].

4 Launch Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote) on the computer, and then enter and confirm the access
authentication information.

You can now operate the camera using Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote).

Menu item details

Remote Shooting:
Sets whether or not to use the Remote Shooting function. ([On] / [Off])
Pairing:
When connecting via a Wi-Fi access point without using the [Access Authen.] function, pair the camera with the
computer.
Wi-Fi Direct Info.:
Displays information for connecting the computer and the camera via Wi-Fi Direct.

How to connect the camera and the computer using a method other than a Wi-Fi access point
When connecting with Wi-Fi Direct
Use the camera as an access point, and connect the computer to the camera directly via Wi-Fi.
Select MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [Remote Shoot Function] → [Wi-Fi Direct Info.] to display the
Wi-Fi connection information (SSID and password) for the camera. Connect the computer and the camera using the Wi-
Fi connection information displayed on the camera.
When connecting with a USB cable

503
Connect the USB Type-C terminal on the camera to the computer with a USB cable (commercially available).
Next, select [Remote Shooting] on the screen displayed on the camera.
Hint
In [Remote Shoot Setting] under [ Cnct./Remote Sht.], you can set the save destination and saved format of still images for
remote shooting.

When [Access Authen.] is set to [Off] and you are connecting via a Wi-Fi access point, you need to pair the camera with the
computer. Select MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [Remote Shoot Function] → [Pairing] after Step 1, and
then pair the camera and the computer using Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote) on the computer. Pairing information is deleted
when you initialize the camera.

Related Topic
Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)
Remote Shoot Setting

TP1001264530

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

504
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Remote Shoot Setting

Configures settings for images saved when performing remote shooting using a smartphone or computer.

1 MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [Remote Shoot Setting] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Still Img. Save Dest.:
Sets the save destination. ([Destination Only]/[Dest.+Camera]/[Camera Only])
Save Image Size:
Selects the file size for images to be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to
[Dest.+Camera]. The original-sized JPEG/HEIF file or a 2M-equivalent JPEG/HEIF file can be transferred.
([Original]/[2M])
RAW+J Save Image:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to
[Dest.+Camera] and [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG]. ([RAW & JPEG]/[JPEG Only]/[RAW Only])
RAW+H Save Image:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to
[Dest.+Camera] and [ File Format] is set to [RAW & HEIF]. ([RAW & HEIF]/[HEIF Only]/[RAW Only])

Note
When an unrecordable memory card is inserted into the camera, you cannot record still images even if [Still Img. Save Dest.] is
set to [Camera Only] or [Dest.+Camera].

When [Camera Only] or [Dest.+Camera] is selected for [Still Img. Save Dest.] and no memory card is inserted into the camera,
the shutter will not be released even if [Release w/o Card] is set to [Enable].

While a still image is being played back on the camera, you cannot perform remote shooting using a smartphone or a computer.

[RAW+J Save Image] and [RAW+H Save Image] can be set only when [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG] or [RAW &
HEIF].

Related Topic
Using a smartphone as a remote commander

TP1001267002

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

505
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

USB Streaming (movie)

You can connect a computer, etc. to the camera and use the camera video and audio for livestreaming or web-
conferencing services. Select MENU → (Setup) → [USB] → [USB Connection Mode] → [Sel. When Connect] or
[USB Streaming] beforehand.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Streaming] → [ USB Streaming] → Set [Output Res/Frame Rate] and [Movie
Rec During Streaming].

2 Connect the camera to a computer or other device with a USB cable (commercially available).

[Streaming:Standby] will appear on the camera screen, and the camera will switch to the streaming standby state.

If [USB Connection Mode] is set to [Sel. When Connect], select [Live Stream(USB Streaming)] on the selection
screen for the USB connection mode.
Use a cable or adapter that matches the terminal on the device to be connected.

3 Start streaming from your livestreaming/web-conferencing service.

[Streaming:Output] will appear on the camera screen.

To exit USB Streaming, turn off the power of the camera or disconnect the USB cable.

Menu item details

Output Res/Frame Rate:
Sets the resolution and the frame rate of the video. ([4K(2160p) 30p]/[4K(2160p) 25p]/[4K(2160p)
15p]/[4K(2160p)12.5p]/[HD(1080p) 60p]/[HD(1080p) 50p]/[HD(1080p) 30p]/[HD(1080p) 25p]/[HD(720p) 30p]/[HD(720p)
25p])
Movie Rec During Streaming:
Sets whether or not to enable recording of the video to the recording media during streaming. ([Enable]/[Disable])

Hint
If you assign the shutter speed, ISO sensitivity, etc. to the dial or control wheel or register them to the function menu, you can
adjust these values even during USB streaming.

The format of the streaming data is as follows.

Video format: MJPEG* or YUV420

* When the resolution is set to HD (720p), only MJPEG is available.

Audio format: PCM, 48 kHz, 16 bit, 2 ch

During USB streaming, power is supplied to the camera from the computer. If you want to consume as little computer power as
possible, set [USB Power Supply] to [Off].

When using an external microphone, you can minimize deviations between your voice and the movements of your mouth by
connecting the microphone to the (microphone) terminal of the camera.

506
 Note
While USB streaming is in progress, the camera is always set to the movie recording mode regardless of the position of the
Still/Movie/S&Q switch.

You cannot do the following while USB Streaming is running.

Transition to the playback screen
Network functions (Remote Shooting, remote operation from a smartphone, Bluetooth function, etc.)

The following functions are disabled while USB Streaming is running.

Picture Profile
Power Save Start Time
Auto Monitor OFF

When performing USB streaming with a resolution of 4K (2160p) or HD (1080p), use a computer that is compatible with
SuperSpeed USB 5 Gbps (USB 3.2) and a commercially available USB cable.
Even if the resolution is set to 4K (2160p) or HD (1080p), the actual output resolution will be HD (720p) when connected via the
USB 2.0 standard.

If you change the settings for the following items during USB streaming, the streaming screen may pause temporarily. You may
also need to resume streaming from an application depending on the livestreaming service.
[Output Res/Frame Rate] or [Movie Rec During Streaming] under [ USB Streaming]
[ File Format]
[Auto Framing Settings]

Depending on the temperature environment, output image quality setting for streaming, setting for movie recording during
streaming, Wi-Fi connection environment, and usage conditions before the start of streaming, the internal temperature of the
camera may rise, and the time available for streaming may become shorter.

Related Topic
USB Connection Mode

TP1001268964

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

507
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Creators’ Cloud

Creators’ Cloud is a cloud solution that integrates production applications and services.
Creators’ Cloud provides services and applications to creators of various productions.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

The availability of Creators’ Cloud and the supported services differ depending on the country/region.
For details on Creators’ Cloud and the support status of each service, refer to the following website.
https://www.sony.net/cc/

TP1001271181

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

508
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Creating an account for Creators’ Cloud and linking your camera to the account
(Cloud Connection)

Create an account for the cloud service Creators’ Cloud and link your camera to the account using Creators' App on your
smartphone.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

Note
This function may only be available in certain countries and regions.
For information about countries/regions where the service is supported, refer to the following website.
https://creatorscloud.sony.net/catalog/servicearea.html

: Operations performed on the smartphone

: Operations performed on the camera

Preparing in advance

Create an account for Creators’ Cloud.

Follow the instructions in the smartphone application Creators' App to create an account for Creators’ Cloud.

Pair the camera and smartphone.

For detailed instructions, see “Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection) .”

Confirm that [Wi-Fi Connect] and [Bluetooth Function] are set to [On] on the camera.

Linking the camera to the account

1. Set the camera to shooting mode.

2. Launch Creators' App on your smartphone, and then open the [Cameras] screen.

3. Select [Camera Settings] button.

4. Select [Cloud Function], and then follow the instructions on the screen to start setup.

5. When you register the access point, select the access point you use and enter the password, and then select
[OK].
The settings for the access point (the SSID and the password) are loaded to the camera.

If the access point to be used is already registered on the camera, select [Skip] and proceed to step 6.

6. Select [Start linking] on the smartphone screen.

The camera and the account will be linked. Then, follow the instructions on the screen to configure the image
upload settings.
The camera may not be linked to the account if there is already account information on the camera or there is
already camera information in Creators’ Cloud. Remove the account and camera information before linking the
camera to the account.

Note

509
 The camera may not be linked to the account properly if the procedure is canceled, the camera is powered off, or a network error,
etc. occurs during the procedure. In this case, make sure that the account information on the camera or the camera information in
Creators’ Cloud is correct. If the information is not correct, remove the information and link the camera to the account again.

Linking the camera to the account or connecting to Creators’ Cloud may fail if the time setting on the camera is not correct. Make
sure that the time setting is correct.

Connecting the camera to Creators’ Cloud

1. MENU → (Network) → [Creators' Cloud] → [Cloud Connection] → [On].

To upload images on the camera to Creators’ Cloud

Once the camera has been linked to the account for Creators’ Cloud and [Cloud Upload] is turned on in Creators' App,
you can connect to the server and upload images by simply setting [Cloud Connection] to [On].
Newly recorded images will be uploaded the next time you turn on the camera and connect to Creators’ Cloud. Turn on
the camera at the timing you want to upload.
For details, refer to the following support page.
https://www.sony.net/ca/help/opr/

To cancel the linkage of the camera with Creators’ Cloud

You need to cancel the linkage of the camera with the account both on the camera and in Creators’ Cloud.
Operations on the camera:

1. MENU → (Network) → [Creators' Cloud] → [Cloud Information].

2. Select [Detail] in [Account Info.].

3. Select [Delete account info.].

4. Check the message displayed on the screen and select [OK].

The information for the account will be removed from the camera.

Operations on the Creators’ Cloud:

1. Open [Cameras] screen on Creators' App.

2. Select [Camera Settings] button.

3. Select [Cloud Function] → [Disconnect the Link].

The information for the camera will be removed from the account.

Hint
You can also perform the following operations in Creators’ Cloud Web (https://www.sony.net/capp/).
Creating an account for Creators’ Cloud
Removing information of the camera from Creators’ Cloud

Related Topic
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
Displaying cloud connection information (Cloud Information)
Notes on using the cloud service (Creators’ Cloud)

TP1001271180

510
5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

511
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Displaying cloud connection information (Cloud Information)

Displays information about the camera and Creators’ Cloud linkage account and the cloud connection.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

Note
This function may only be available in certain countries and regions.
For information about countries/regions where the service is supported, refer to the following website.
https://creatorscloud.sony.net/catalog/servicearea.html

1 MENU → (Network) → [Creators' Cloud] → [Cloud Information].

Displayed item details

Account Info.:
Displays detailed information about the linked account when [Detail] is selected. Selecting [Delete account info.] on the
displayed screen removes the account information from the camera.
If you delete the Creators’ Cloud account information from the camera, be sure to delete the camera information from
Creators’ Cloud as well.
Error Info.:
Displays error details when a network connection error occurs.
SSID:
The SSID of the connected access point is displayed.

TP1001271261

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

512
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Notes on using the cloud service (Creators’ Cloud)

Before lending or transferring the camera, make sure that the camera linkage information and upload settings are
appropriate to prevent damage such as the content on the camera being uploaded to an unintended third party’s
Creators’ Cloud. If the settings are not appropriate, be sure to perform the following operations.

If you will transfer or lend the camera: initialize the camera or cancel the linkage with Creators’ Cloud on the camera.
Also, cancel the camera linkage in Creators’ Cloud.
If the camera is transferred to you or you borrow the camera: initialize the camera or cancel the linkage with Creators’
Cloud on the camera.

Note that Creators’ Cloud may only be available in certain countries and regions.

Notes on the network environment

The following network environments may interfere with the use of Creators’ Cloud.

Connecting to a network via a proxy server

Configuring a firewall to your network
If a firewall is configured, open the following outbound ports in the firewall settings.
TCP Source Port 32768-60999 Destination Port 443
TCP Source Port 32768-60999 Destination Port 80
UDP Source Port 32768-60999 Destination Port 53
UDP Source Port 32768-60999 Destination Port 443
UDP Source Port 32768-60999 Destination Port 32768-60999

Related Topic
Creating an account for Creators’ Cloud and linking your camera to the account (Cloud Connection)
Displaying cloud connection information (Cloud Information)

TP1001273143

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

513
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Audio accessories compatible with the Multi Interface Shoe

If you shoot movies with an audio accessory (sold separately) attached to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera, analog
or digital audio will be recorded via the Multi Interface Shoe.
If you use an audio accessory that supports the digital audio interface, the sound signals will be transmitted in a digital
format. This will allow you a wider range of recordable audio quality, such as the following.

High-quality audio recording with less deterioration

4-channel or 24-bit audio recording

The recordable audio quality differs depending on the audio accessory. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the
audio accessory.

Hint
You can change the audio settings for audio accessories that support the digital audio interface using [ Shoe Audio Set.].

Note
Movies recorded with 24-bit audio may not be played back normally on devices or software incompatible with 24-bit audio,
resulting in unexpectedly loud volumes or no sound.

Related Topic
Shoe Audio Set.
HDMI Output Settings (movie)
4ch Audio Monitoring (movie)
Audio Out Timing
Audio Recording

TP1001265505

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

514
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Mount Adaptor

Using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately), you can attach an A-mount lens (sold separately) to this product.
For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the Mount Adaptor.

Note
You may not be able to use the Mount Adaptor or auto-focus with certain lenses. Consult your Sony dealer or local authorized
Sony service facility on compatible lenses.

The sound of the lens and the product in operation may be recorded during movie recording.
You can turn the sound off by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Audio Recording] → [Off].

It may take a long time or may be difficult for the product to focus, depending on the lens used or the subject.

Related Topic
LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor
LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor

TP1001224979

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

515
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor

If you use the LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) or LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), the following
functions are available.

Full frame shooting:

Available with full frame shooting-compatible lenses only
Autofocus:
LA-EA3: Available with SAM/SSM lens only
LA-EA5: Available with A-mount AF lenses* (For lenses other than SAM and SSM, autofocus is driven by the LA-EA5 AF
coupler.)
* Autofocus is not available with some Minolta/Konica Minolta lenses and teleconverters.
AF system:
Phase Detection AF
AF/MF select:
Can be changed using the operating switch on the lens.
Focus Mode:
Single-shot AF/Automatic AF/Continuous AF/Direct manual focus (DMF)/Manual Focus

When using a Mount Adaptor in the movie mode, adjust the aperture value and the focus manually.

Available focus area:

[Wide]/[Zone]/[Center Fix]/[Spot]/[Expand Spot]/[Tracking]
SteadyShot:
In-body

Related Topic
Mount Adaptor
LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor

TP1001224903

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

516
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor

If you use the LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), the following functions are available.

Full size shooting:

Available with full frame shooting-compatible lenses only
Autofocus:
Not available.

Only the manual focusing mode is supported.

SteadyShot:
In-body

Related Topic
Mount Adaptor
LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor

TP1001239842

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

517
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Multi Battery Adaptor Kit

You can use the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit (sold separately) with this camera to shoot for long periods.
When using the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit, insert the plug-in plate into the battery insertion slot, and then pass the cord
through the connection plate cover.

Make sure that the cord is not pinched when you close the cover.

For details, refer also to the operating instructions supplied with the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit.

TP1001264575

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

518
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Battery life and number of recordable images

Number of recordable images when shooting still images

Approx. 570 images

Battery life when shooting movies

Actual shooting of movies Approx. 95 min.

Continuous shooting of movies Approx. 140 min.

The above estimates for battery life and number of recordable images apply when the battery pack has been fully
charged. The battery life and number of images may decrease depending on the conditions of use.
The battery life and number of recordable images are estimates based on shooting with the default settings under the
following conditions:

Using the battery pack at an ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F).

Using a Sony SDXC memory card (U3) (sold separately)
Using a FE 28-60mm F4-5.6 lens

The numbers of recordable still images are based on the CIPA standard and shooting under the following conditions:
(CIPA: Camera & Imaging Products Association)

One picture is taken every 30 seconds.

The power is turned on and off once every ten times.
The zoom is switched alternately between the W and T ends.

The number of minutes for movie shooting is based on the CIPA standard and shooting under the following
conditions:

The image quality is set to XAVC S HD 60p 50M /50p 50M 4:2:0 8bit.
Actual shooting (movies): Battery life based on repeated shooting, zooming, shooting stand-by, turning on/off, etc.
Continuous shooting (movies): No operations other than starting and ending shooting are performed.

TP1001248225

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

519
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Number of recordable images

When you insert a memory card into the camera and turn the camera on, the number of images that can be recorded
(should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the screen.

Note
A maximum of 40 000 still images can be recorded to each memory card. If the number of recorded images reaches the upper
limit, replace the memory card.

When “0” (the number of recordable images) flashes in orange, the memory card is full or the number of recorded images
exceeds the number that can be managed using the database file. Replace the memory card with another one, or delete images
from the current memory card. When you transfer images on a memory card to a computer, etc., the number of recordable
images may be displayed as “0”. In this case, you may be able to record images by executing [ Recover Image DB].

When “NO CARD” flashes in orange, it means no memory card has been inserted. Insert a memory card.

The number of images that can be recorded on a memory card

The table below shows the approximate number of images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this
camera.
The numbers shown reflect the following conditions:

Using a Sony memory card

[Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2], and [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF Image Size] is set to [L: 12M]. *1

The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type of memory card used.

(Unit: images)

SD memory card
JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality/ File Format
64GB 128GB

JPEG Standard 15 000 30 000

JPEG Fine 11 000 22 000

JPEG Extra fine 6 200 12 000

HEIF Standard 24 000 40 000

HEIF Fine 18 000 37 000

HEIF Extra fine 13 000 27 000

RAW & JPEG (Compressed RAW)*2 2 800 5 600

RAW & HEIF (Compressed RAW)*2 3 100 6 200

RAW (Compressed RAW) 3 700 7 400

RAW & JPEG (Lossless Compressed RAW)*2 2 600 5 200

520
 SD memory card
JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality/ File Format
64GB 128GB

RAW & HEIF (Lossless Compressed RAW)*2 2 800 5 700

RAW (Lossless Compressed RAW) 3 300 6 800

RAW & JPEG (Uncompressed RAW)*2 1 700 3 400

RAW & HEIF (Uncompressed RAW)*2 1 800 3 600

RAW (Uncompressed RAW) 2 000 4 000

*1 When [Aspect Ratio] is set to other than [3:2], you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above. (except when [RAW] is
selected)
*2 JPEG image quality when [RAW & JPEG] is selected: [Fine]
HEIF image quality when [RAW & HEIF] is selected: [Fine]

Note
Even if the number of recordable images is higher than 9 999 images, “9999” will appear.

Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used

TP1001248311

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

521
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Recordable movie times

The table below shows the approximate total recording times using a memory card formatted with this camera. The
values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type of memory card used.

(h (hour), min (minute))

SD memory card
File Format Rec Frame Rate Record Setting
64 GB 128 GB

200M 35 min 1 h 10 min

150M 45 min 1 h 35 min

XAVC HS 4K 60p/50p 100M 1 h 5 min 2 h 10 min

75M 1 h 25 min 2 h 50 min

45M 2 h 10 min 4 h 30 min

200M 35 min 1 h 10 min

XAVC S 4K 60p/50p
150M 45 min 1 h 35 min

50M 2h 4 h 10 min
XAVC S HD 60p/50p
25M 3 h 20 min 7h

60p 600M 10 min 25 min

XAVC S-I 4K
50p 500M 10 min 25 min

60p 222M 30 min 1 h 5 min

XAVC S-I HD
50p 185M 30 min 1 h 5 min

The recording times when [ Proxy Recording] is set to [Off].

The times shown are recordable times using a Sony memory card.
The duration of time available for movie recording varies depending on the file format/recording settings for movies,
memory card, ambient temperature, Wi-Fi network environment, condition of the camera before you start recording,
and condition of the charging of the battery.
The maximum continuous recording time for a single movie shooting session is approximately 13 hours (a product
specification limit).

Note
The recordable time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit-Rate), which automatically adjusts
image quality depending on the shooting scene. When you record a fast-moving subject, the image is clearer but the recordable
time is shorter because more memory is required for recording. The recordable time also varies depending on the shooting
conditions, the subject or the image quality/size settings.

522
 Notes on continuous movie recording

High-quality movie recording and high-speed continuous shooting require large amounts of power. Therefore, if you
continue to shoot, the temperature inside the camera will rise, especially that of the image sensor. In such cases, the
camera will turn off automatically because the surface of the camera is heated to a high temperature or the high
temperature affects the quality of the images or the internal mechanism of the camera.
The duration of time available for continuous movie recording when the camera records with the default settings after
the power has been turned off for a while is as follows. The values indicate the continuous time from when the
camera starts recording until the camera stops recording.

When [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [Standard]

File Format XAVC S HD XAVC S 4K

Ambient temperature: 25°C (77°F) Approx. 10 minutes Approx. 10 minutes

Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F) Approx. 10 minutes Approx. 5 minutes

When [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]

File Format XAVC S HD XAVC S 4K

Ambient temperature: 25°C (77°F) Approx. 90 minutes Approx. 30 minutes

Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F) Approx. 20 minutes Approx. 20 minutes

XAVC S HD: 60p 50M/50p 50M 4:2:0 8bit; when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi; when the monitor is open
XAVC S 4K: 60p 150M/50p 150M 4:2:0 8bit; when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi; when the monitor is open

The duration of time available for movie recording varies with the temperature, file format/record setting for movies,
Wi-Fi network environment, or condition of the camera before you start recording. If you frequently recompose or
shoot images after the power is turned on, the temperature inside the camera will rise and the recording time
available will be shorter.
If the (Overheating warning) icon appears, the temperature of the camera has risen.
If the camera stops movie recording due to a high temperature, leave it for some time with the power turned off. Start
recording after the temperature inside the camera drops fully.
If you observe the following points, you will be able to record movies for longer periods of time.
Keep the camera out of direct sunlight.
Turn the camera off when it is not being used.

Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used
Battery life and number of recordable images

TP1001248343

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

523
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

List of icons on the screen for shooting movies

The displayed contents and their positions in the illustrations are just guidelines, and may differ from the actual displays.
Also, the displayed contents may vary depending on your camera’s system software (firmware) version.
Descriptions are given below the indications of the icons.

In addition to the icons described on this page, there are more icons for touch operations (touch function icons) that are
displayed on the left or right side of the screen when you swipe the monitor. For details, refer to “Touch function icons.”

1. Basic camera settings

Audio level

Audio recording off

Microphone Directivity

Focus Mode

Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom

Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.

S-log3 s709 709(800%) User1 LUT OFF
LUT
STBY REC
Movie recording standby/Movie recording in progress
1:00:12
Actual movie recording time (hours: minutes: seconds)
4K HD
File format of movies
120p 100p 60p 50p 30p 25p 24p
Frame rate of movies

A memory card is inserted

NO CARD
No memory card inserted

524
 Nearing the rewriting upper limit of the memory card / Rewriting upper limit of the memory card reached
1h 30m
Recordable time of movies

Writing data / Number of images left to write

Remaining battery

Remaining battery warning

USB power supply

2. Exposure and other settings
1/250
Shutter speed
F3.5
Aperture value

Exposure compensation/Metered Manual

ISO400 ISO 400
ISO sensitivity
7500K A5 G5
White Balance (Auto, Preset, Underwater Auto, Custom, Color temperature, Color filter)

AE lock/AWB lock

Shooting
3. Other settings (displayed during recording standby)

Shooting mode

Shooting mode ( Cam.Set)

Scene Recognition icons

Tripod recognition

REC Control

4K external output
00:00:00.00
Time code (hours: minutes: seconds. frames)
00 00 00 00
User Bit
Spot Focus
Performing [Spot Focus]
x4 Slow x4 Quick
Slowness/quickness scale during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting

Movie self-timer

525
Product Showcase Set

Starting/stopping network streaming output

High / Standard / Low / HD (1080p) 60p/50p 9.0M
Image quality setting for network streaming output
Streaming : Standby / Output / Connecting / Connect. Err. / Not Connect
Network streaming status

USB connection mode (USB streaming)

4K(2160p) 30p / 4K(2160p) 25p /4K(2160p) 15p / 4K(2160p) 12.5p / HD(1080p) 60p / HD(1080p) 50p / HD(1080p)
30p / HD(1080p) 25p / HD(720p) 30p / HD(720p) 25p
USB streaming output format
Streaming : Standby / Streaming : Output
USB streaming status
Select Focus Point On/Off
Guide display for setting Focus Area
Tracking Cancel
Guide display for tracking
Focus Cancel
Guide display for canceling focusing
Tracking+AE Cancel
Guide display for tracking+AE
Focus+AE Cancel
Guide display for focus+AE
Touch AE Cancel
Guide display for touch AE
Lock Composition/ Cancel Lock Composition
Guide display for locking the composition with [Framing Stabilizer]

Audio format

Guide display for dials

Anti-flicker Tv Scan

Focus Cancel

Touch Focus+AE cancel/TouchTracking+AE cancel/Touch AE cancel

Tracking Cancel

Lock composition/Cancel lock composition

Remote Shooting (connected) / Remote Shooting (connection error)

Connected to the cloud / Communicating with the cloud / Cloud connection error

Transferring to smartphone / Transfer error

Airplane Mode

526
 Connected to Wi-Fi (via a Wi-Fi access point)

Disconnected from Wi-Fi (via a Wi-Fi access point)

Connected to Wi-Fi/Disconnected from Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Direct)

Connected to LAN/Disconnected from LAN (When using a USB-LAN conversion adaptor)

Bluetooth connection available / Bluetooth connection unavailable

Remote control

Obtaining location information / Location information cannot be obtained

Metering Mode

D-Range Optimizer

Histogram

Digital level gauge

Overheating warning

Database file full / Database file error

Hint
Area 3 icons may not be displayed while the touch function icons are displayed. To see hidden icons, swipe the touch function
icons left or right to hide the touch function icons.

Related Topic
List of icons on the screen for shooting still images
List of icons on the playback screen

TP1001269025

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

527
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

List of icons on the screen for shooting still images

The displayed contents and their positions in the illustrations are just guidelines, and may differ from the actual displays.
Also, the displayed contents may vary depending on your camera’s system software (firmware) version.
Descriptions are given below the indications of the icons.

In addition to the icons described on this page, there are more icons for touch operations (touch function icons) that are
displayed on the left or right side of the screen when you swipe the monitor. For details, refer to “Touch function icons.”

1. Shooting mode/Scene recognition

Shooting mode

Shooting mode (Scene Selection)

Shooting mode ( Cam.Set)

Scene Recognition icons

2. Camera settings

A memory card is inserted

NO CARD
No memory card inserted

Nearing the rewriting upper limit of the memory card / Rewriting upper limit of the memory card reached
100
Remaining number of recordable images

Writing data / Number of images left to write

12M / 11M / 10M / 8M / 5.1M / 4.6M / 4.3M / 3.4M / 3.0M / 2.7M / 2.6M / 2M
Image size of still images
J-X.FINE J-FINE J-STD H-X.FINE H-FINE H-STD
JPEG Quality / HEIF Quality
4:2:2
Color sampling for HEIF

Focus Mode
528
Flash charge in progress

Setting Effect OFF

Exposure Effect (Exposure Setting Only)

Anti-flicker Tv Scan

Product Showcase Set

* Displayed at position 5 during vertical display

SteadyShot off/on, Camera shake warning

* Displayed at position 6 during vertical display

SteadyShot focal length / Camera shake warning

* Displayed at position 6 during vertical display

Smart Zoom/Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom

Remote Shooting (connected) / Remote Shooting (connection error)

USB connection mode (USB streaming)

Bright Monitoring

Silent mode

Remote control

Connected to the cloud / Communicating with the cloud / Cloud connection error

Transferring to smartphone / Transfer error

Connected to Wi-Fi (via a Wi-Fi access point)

Disconnected from Wi-Fi (via a Wi-Fi access point)

Connected to Wi-Fi/Disconnected from Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Direct)

Connected to LAN/Disconnected from LAN (When using a USB-LAN conversion adaptor)

Writing copyright information [On]

Focus Cancel

Touch Focus+AE cancel/TouchTracking+AE cancel/Touch AE cancel

Tracking Cancel

Bluetooth connection available / Bluetooth connection unavailable

529
 Obtaining location information / Location information cannot be obtained

Airplane Mode

Overheating warning

Database file full / Database file error

Tripod recognition
3. Battery

Remaining battery

Remaining battery warning

USB power supply

4. Shooting settings

Drive Mode

Flash Mode / Wireless Flash / Red Eye Reduction

±0.0
Flash Comp.

Focus Area

Metering Mode
7500K A5 G5
White Balance (Auto, Preset, Underwater Auto, Custom, Color temperature, Color filter)

D-Range Optimizer

Creative Look

Subject Recog in AF/ Recognition Target

Soft Skin Effect

–
Picture Profile
5. Focus indicator/exposure settings

Focus indicator
1/250
Shutter speed
F3.5
Aperture value

Background Defocus

Exposure compensation/Metered Manual

ISO400 ISO AUTO
ISO sensitivity
530
 AE lock/FEL lock/AWB lock

Shooting
6. Guides/other
Select Focus Point On/Off
Guide display for setting Focus Area
Tracking Cancel
Guide display for tracking
Focus Cancel
Guide display for canceling focusing
Tracking+AE Cancel
Guide display for tracking+AE
Focus+AE Cancel
Guide display for focus+AE
Touch AE Cancel
Guide display for touch AE

Guide display for dials

Bracket indicator

Spot metering area

Histogram

Digital level gauge

Related Topic
List of icons on the screen for shooting movies
List of icons on the playback screen

TP1001269024

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

531
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

List of icons on the playback screen

The displayed contents and their positions in the illustrations are just guidelines, and may differ from the actual displays.
Also, the displayed contents may vary depending on your camera’s system software (firmware) version.
Descriptions are given below the indications of the icons.
Single-image playback

Histogram display

1. Basic information

A memory card is inserted

Rating

Protect
3/7
File number/Number of images in the view mode

Remaining battery

Display as Group

Cropped image

Proxy movie included

Shot Mark included

532
 Smartphone transfer status (when using [ Select on Cam & Send])
2. Camera settings

Connected to the cloud / Communicating with the cloud / Cloud connection error

Transferring to smartphone / Transfer error

Connected to Wi-Fi (via a Wi-Fi access point)

Disconnected from Wi-Fi (via a Wi-Fi access point)

Connected to Wi-Fi/Disconnected from Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Direct)

Connected to LAN/Disconnected from LAN (When using a USB-LAN conversion adaptor)

Bluetooth connection available / Bluetooth connection unavailable

Airplane Mode

Overheating warning

Database file full / Database file error

3. Touch operation icons

Shooting mode switching

Add/Delete Shot Mark1

Jump to the positions of Shot Marks

4. Shooting settings

Aspect ratio
12M / 11M / 10M / 8M / 5.1M / 4.6M / 4.3M / 3.4M / 3.0M / 2.7M / 2.6M / 2M
Image size of still images

RAW recording
J-X.FINE J-FINE J-STD H-X.FINE H-FINE H-STD
JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality
4:2:2
Color sampling for HEIF
XAVC HS 4K XAVC S 4K XAVC S HD XAVC S-I 4K XAVC S-I HD
File format of movies
120p 100p 60p 50p 30p 25p 24p
Frame rate of movies

Record setting of movies

1/250
Shutter speed
F3.5
Aperture value
ISO400

533
 ISO sensitivity
PASM
Exposure mode

Exposure compensation

Metering Mode
35mm
Lens focal length

Creative Look
7500K A5 G5
White Balance (Auto, Preset, Underwater Auto, Color temperature, Color filter)

D-Range Optimizer
HLG
HDR recording (Hybrid Log-Gamma)

Copyright information exists for image

5. Image information

Latitude/longitude information
2023-1-1 10:37:00PM
Date of recording
100-0003
Folder number - file number
C0003
Movie file number

Histogram (Luminance/R/G/B)

Related Topic
List of icons on the screen for shooting movies
List of icons on the screen for shooting still images

TP1001269026

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

534
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

List of default setting values (Shooting)

The default setting values at the time of purchase are shown in the following table.
The content of the menu displayed on the screen differs depending on the position of the Still/Movie/S&Q switch. For
details, refer to “Finding functions from MENU.”

To reset settings to the default values

Select MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] →
[Enter].
Initialize: All the settings of the camera will be reset to the default values.
Camera Settings Reset: Items that can be reset are limited. See the following table.

(Shooting) tab

Resettable using
MENU item Default setting value [Camera Settings
Reset]

JPEG/HEIF Switch JPEG

File Format JPEG/HEIF

RAW File Type Compressed

JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality Fine

JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size (when [Aspect Ratio] is set

L: 12M
to [3:2])

JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size (when [Aspect Ratio] is set

L: 11M
to [4:3])

JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size (when [Aspect Ratio] is set

L: 10M
to [16:9])

JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size (when [Aspect Ratio] is set

L: 8M
to [1:1])

Aspect Ratio 3:2

File Format XAVC S HD

Movie Settings (Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File Format] is

60p/50p
set to [XAVC HS 4K])

Movie Settings (Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File Format] is

60p/50p
set to [XAVC S 4K])

Movie Settings (Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File Format] is

60p/50p
set to [XAVC S HD])

Movie Settings (Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File Format] is

60p/50p
set to [XAVC S-I 4K])

535
 Resettable using
MENU item Default setting value [Camera Settings
Reset]

Movie Settings (Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File Format] is

60p/50p
set to [XAVC S-I HD])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

45M 4:2:0 10bit
set to [XAVC HS 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [60p]/[50p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

50M 4:2:0 10bit
set to [XAVC HS 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [24p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

150M 4:2:0 8bit
set to [XAVC S 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [60p]/[50p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

60M 4:2:0 8bit
set to [XAVC S 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [30p]/[25p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

60M 4:2:0 8bit
set to [XAVC S 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [24p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

50M 4:2:0 8bit
set to [XAVC S HD] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [60p]/[50p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

50M 4:2:0 8bit
set to [XAVC S HD] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [30p]/[25p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

50M 4:2:0 8bit
set to [XAVC S HD] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [24p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

set to [XAVC S HD] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 60M 4:2:0 8bit
[120p]/[100p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is 600M 4:2:2 10bit/500M
set to [XAVC S-I 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [60p]/[50p]) 4:2:2 10bit

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is 300M 4:2:2 10bit/250M
set to [XAVC S-I 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [30p]/[25p]) 4:2:2 10bit

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

240M 4:2:2 10bit
set to [XAVC S-I 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [24p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is 222M 4:2:2 10bit/185M
set to [XAVC S-I HD] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [60p]/[50p]) 4:2:2 10bit

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is 111M 4:2:2 10bit/93M
set to [XAVC S-I HD] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [30p]/[25p]) 4:2:2 10bit

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

89M 4:2:2 10bit
set to [XAVC S-I HD] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [24p])

S&Q Settings ( Frame Rate Settings) (when [ File

60p 60fps / 50p 50fps
Format] is set to [XAVC HS 4K])

S&Q Settings ( Frame Rate Settings) (when [ File

60p 60fps / 50p 50fps
Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K])

S&Q Settings ( Frame Rate Settings) (when [ File

60p 120fps / 50p 100fps
Format] is set to [XAVC S HD])

536
 Resettable using
MENU item Default setting value [Camera Settings
Reset]

S&Q Settings ( Frame Rate Settings) (when [ File

60p 60fps / 50p 50fps
Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K])

S&Q Settings ( Frame Rate Settings) (when [ File

60p 120fps / 50p 100fps
Format] is set to [XAVC S-I HD])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC HS 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is 45M 4:2:0 10bit
set to [60p]/[50p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC HS 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is 50M 4:2:0 10bit
set to [24p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 150M 4:2:0 8bit
to [60p]/[50p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 60M 4:2:0 8bit
to [30p]/[25p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 60M 4:2:0 8bit
to [24p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 50M 4:2:0 8bit
to [60p]/[50p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 50M 4:2:0 8bit
to [30p]/[25p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 50M 4:2:0 8bit
to [24p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 60M 4:2:0 8bit
to [120p]/[100p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is 600M 4:2:2 10bit
set to [60p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is 500M 4:2:2 10bit
set to [50p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is 300M 4:2:2 10bit
set to [30p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is 250M 4:2:2 10bit
set to [25p])

537
 Resettable using
MENU item Default setting value [Camera Settings
Reset]

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is 240M 4:2:2 10bit
set to [24p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I HD] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is 222M 4:2:2 10bit
set to [60p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I HD] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is 185M 4:2:2 10bit
set to [50p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I HD] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is 111M 4:2:2 10bit
set to [30p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I HD] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is 93M 4:2:2 10bit
set to [25p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I HD] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is 89M 4:2:2 10bit
set to [24p])

Time-lapse Settings (when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC

60p
HS 4K])

Time-lapse Settings (when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC

60p
S 4K])

Time-lapse Settings (when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC

60p
S HD])

Time-lapse Settings (when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC

60p
S-I 4K])

Time-lapse Settings (when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC

60p
S-I HD])

Time-lapse Settings ( Interval Time) 1 Sec

Time-lapse Settings( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC HS 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 45M 4:2:0 10bit
to [60p]/[50p])

Time-lapse Settings( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC HS 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 50M 4:2:0 10bit
to [24p])

Time-lapse Settings( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set to 150M 4:2:0 8bit
[60p]/[50p])

Time-lapse Settings( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set to 60M 4:2:0 8bit
[30p]/[25p])

538
 Resettable using
MENU item Default setting value [Camera Settings
Reset]

Time-lapse Settings( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set to 60M 4:2:0 8bit
[24p])

Time-lapse Settings( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 50M 4:2:0 8bit
to [60p]/[50p])

Time-lapse Settings( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 50M 4:2:0 8bit
to [30p]/[25p])

Time-lapse Settings( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 50M 4:2:0 8bit
to [24p])

Time-lapse Settings( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 600M 4:2:2 10bit
to [60p])

Time-lapse Settings( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 500M 4:2:2 10bit
to [50p])

Time-lapse Settings( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 300M 4:2:2 10bit
to [30p])

Time-lapse Settings( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 250M 4:2:2 10bit
to [25p])

Time-lapse Settings( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 240M 4:2:2 10bit
to [24p])

Time-lapse Settings( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I HD] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 222M 4:2:2 10bit
to [60p])

Time-lapse Settings( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I HD] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 185M 4:2:2 10bit
to [50p])

Time-lapse Settings( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I HD] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 111M 4:2:2 10bit
to [30p])

Time-lapse Settings( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I HD] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 93M 4:2:2 10bit
to [25p])

Time-lapse Settings( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I HD] and [ Rec Frame Rate] is set 89M 4:2:2 10bit
to [24p])

Time-lapse Settings( Video Light Setting) Off

539
 Resettable using
MENU item Default setting value [Camera Settings
Reset]

Log Shooting Setting (Log Shooting) Off

Log Shooting Setting (Color Gamut)

Log Shooting Setting (Embed LUT File) On

Proxy Settings ( Proxy Recording) Off

Proxy Settings ( Proxy File Format) XAVC S HD

Proxy Settings ( Proxy Rec. Settings) (when [

9M 4:2:0 10bit
Proxy File Format] is set to [XAVC HS HD])

Proxy Settings ( Proxy Rec. Settings) (when [

6M 4:2:0 8bit
Proxy File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD])

Shooting Auto

High ISO NR Normal

HLG Still Image Off

Color Space sRGB

Lens Compensation (Shading Comp.) Auto

Lens Compensation (Chromatic Aberration Comp.) Auto

Lens Compensation (Distortion Comp.) Off

Lens Compensation (Breathing Comp.) Off

Format ―

Recover Image DB*

* This item is not reset even if you select [Camera Settings
―
Reset] or [Initialize].

Display Media Info. ―

File/Folder Settings (File Number) Series

File/Folder Settings (Forced File Number Reset) ―

File/Folder Settings (Set File Name) DSC

File/Folder Settings (Folder Name) Standard Form

Select REC Folder ―

Create New Folder ―

Copyright Info (Write Copyright Info) Off

Copyright Info (Set Photographer) ―

Copyright Info (Set Copyright) ―

540
 Resettable using
MENU item Default setting value [Camera Settings
Reset]

Copyright Info (Disp. Copyright Info) ―

Write Serial Number Off

File Settings (File Number) Series

File Settings (Series Counter Reset) ―

File Settings (File Name Format) Standard

File Settings (Title Name Settings) C

Shoot Mode Intelligent Auto

Shoot Mode Intelligent Auto

Shoot Mode (S&Q Motion) Intelligent Auto

Shoot Mode ( Time-lapse) Intelligent Auto

Camera Set. Memory ―

Drive Mode Single Shooting

Bracket Settings (Selftimer during Bracket) Off

Bracket Settings (Bracket order) 0→-→+

Bracket Settings (Focus Bracket Order) 0→+

Bracket Settings (Exposure Smoothing) Off

Bracket Settings (Shooting Interval) Shortest

Bracket Settings (Focus Brckt Saving Dest) Current Folder

Interval Shoot Func. (Interval Shooting) Off

Interval Shoot Func. (Shooting Start Time) 1 Sec

Interval Shoot Func. (Shooting Interval) 3 Sec

Interval Shoot Func. (Number of Shots) 30

Interval Shoot Func. (AE Tracking Sensitivity) Mid

Interval Shoot Func. (Shoot Interval Priority) Off

Silent Mode Settings (Silent Mode) Off

Silent Mode Settings ([Aperture Drive in AF] under [Target

Standard
Function Settings])

Release w/o Lens Enable

Release w/o Card Enable

Anti-flicker Set. ( Var. Shutter) Off

Anti-flicker Set. ( Var. Shutter Set.) ―

541
 Resettable using
MENU item Default setting value [Camera Settings
Reset]

Audio Recording On

Audio Rec Level 26

Audio Out Timing Live

Wind Noise Reduct. Auto

Microphone Directivity Auto

Mic Direct Select Setting ―

Shoe Audio Set.

Time Code Preset 00:00:00.00

User Bit Preset 00 00 00 00

Time Code Format DF

Time Code Run Rec Run

Time Code Make Preset

User Bit Time Rec Off

SteadyShot On

SteadyShot Active

SteadyShot Adjust. Auto

Focal Length (when [ SteadyShot Adjust.] is set to

8mm
[Manual])

Framing Stabilizer Off

Zoom Range Clear Image Zoom

Step Zoom Magnif. ―

Zoom Lever Speed (Zoom Speed ) 3

Zoom Lever Speed (Zoom Speed ) 3

Custom Key Z. Speed (Fixed Speed ) 3

Custom Key Z. Speed (Fixed Speed ) 3

Remote Zoom Speed ( Speed Type) Variable

Remote Zoom Speed ( Fixed Speed ) 3

Remote Zoom Speed ( Fixed Speed ) 3

Grid Line Display Off

Grid Line Type Rule of 3rds Grid

Live View Display Set. (Live View Display) Setting Effect ON

542
 Resettable using
MENU item Default setting value [Camera Settings
Reset]

Live View Display Set. (Exposure Effect) Exposure Set. & flash

Emphasized REC Display On

Aspect Marker Off

Aspect Marker Type 1:1

Aspect Marker Level 12

Marker Display Off

Center Marker Off

Aspect Marker Off

Safety Zone Off

Guideframe Off

Product SC Set Off

Defocus Level Set ―

Cinematic Vlog Set. Off

Self-timer Off

Auto Framing Settings (Auto Framing) Off

Auto Framing Settings (Framing Oper. Mode) Auto Start

Auto Framing Settings (Crop Level) Medium crop level

Auto Framing Settings (Framing Tracking Speed) 3

Auto Framing Settings (Movie Rec/Streaming) Crop

Auto Framing Settings (HDMI Output) Crop

AutoCreateStillImage Off

after still img crt Maintain

TP1001271257

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

543
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

List of default setting values (Exposure/Color)

The default setting values at the time of purchase are shown in the following table.
The content of the menu displayed on the screen differs depending on the position of the Still/Movie/S&Q switch. For
details, refer to “Finding functions from MENU.”

To reset settings to the default values

Select MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] →
[Enter].
Initialize: All the settings of the camera will be reset to the default values.
Camera Settings Reset: Items that can be reset are limited. See the following table.

(Exposure/Color) tab

Resettable using [Camera Settings

MENU item Default setting value
Reset]

Auto Slow Shutter On

ISO ISO AUTO

ISO Range Limit ―

ISO AUTO Min. SS Standard

Exposure Comp. ±0.0

Exposure step 0.3EV

Exposure Std. Adjust ( Multi) ±0

Exposure Std. Adjust ( Center) ±0

Exposure Std. Adjust ( Spot) ±0

Exposure Std. Adjust ( Entire Screen

±0
Average)

Exposure Std. Adjust ( Highlight) ±0

Metering Mode Multi

Face Priority in Multi Metering On

Spot Metering Point Center

AEL w/ Shutter Auto

Flash Mode Autoflash

Flash Comp. ±0.0

Exp.comp.set Ambient only

Wireless Flash Off

544
 Resettable using [Camera Settings
MENU item Default setting value
Reset]

Red Eye Reduction Off

External Flash Set. (Ext. Flash Firing Set.) ―

External Flash Set. (Ext. Flash Cust. Set.) ―

White Balance Auto

Priority Set in AWB Standard

Shutter AWB Lock Off

Shockless WB 1 (Fast)

D-Range Optimizer:
D-Range Optimizer
Auto

Creative Look ST

Picture Profile Off

Select LUT s709

Manage User LUTs ―

Soft Skin Effect On: Mid

Zebra Display Off

Zebra Level 70

TP1001271256

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

545
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

List of default setting values (Focus)

The default setting values at the time of purchase are shown in the following table.
The content of the menu displayed on the screen differs depending on the position of the Still/Movie/S&Q switch. For
details, refer to “Finding functions from MENU.”

To reset settings to the default values

Select MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] →
[Enter].
Initialize: All the settings of the camera will be reset to the default values.
Camera Settings Reset: Items that can be reset are limited. See the following table.

(Focus) tab

MENU item Default setting value Resettable using [Camera Settings Reset]

Focus Mode Automatic AF

Priority Set in AF-S Balanced Emphasis

Priority Set in AF-C Balanced Emphasis

AF Tracking Sensitivity 3(Standard)

Aperture Drive in AF Standard

AF w/ Shutter On

Pre-AF On

AF Transition Speed 7 (Fast)

AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity 5(Responsive)

AF Assist Off

Focus Area Wide

Focus Area Limit ―

Switch V/H AF Area Off

Focus Area Color White

AF Area Registration Off

Del. Regist. AF Area ―

AF Area Auto Clear Off

AF-C Area Display On

Phase Detect. Area Off

Circ. of Focus Point Does Not Circulate

546
 MENU item Default setting value Resettable using [Camera Settings Reset]

AF Frame Move Amt Standard

Subject Recog in AF On

Recognition Target Human

Recog Trgt Select Set ―

Right/Left Eye Select Auto

Sbj Recog Frm Disp. Off

Sbj Recog Frm Disp. On

Face Memory ―

Regist. Face Priority On

Focus Map Off

Auto Magnifier in MF On

Focus Magnifier ―

Focus Magnif. Time No Limit

Initial Focus Mag. x1.0

AF in Focus Mag. On

Initial Focus Mag. x1.0

Peaking Display Off

Peaking Level Mid

Peaking Color White

TP1001271255

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

547
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

List of default setting values (Playback)

The default setting values at the time of purchase are shown in the following table.

To reset settings to the default values

Select MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] →
[Enter].
Initialize: All the settings of the camera will be reset to the default values.
Camera Settings Reset: Items that can be reset are limited. See the following table.

(Playback) tab

Default setting Resettable using [Camera Settings

MENU item
value Reset]

Playback Filter Condition

Image Order Date Order

Enlarge Image ―

Enlarge Initial Mag. Standard. Mag.

Enlarge Initial Position Focused Position

Protect ―

Rating ―

Rating Set(Custom Key) ―

Delete ―

Delete pressing twice Off

Delete confirm. "Cancel" first

Crop ―

Rotate ―

Photo Capture ―

Create Still Image ―

after still img crt Maintain

JPEG/HEIF Switch JPEG

Cont. Play for Interval —

Play Speed for Interval 5

Slide Show (Repeat) Off

548
 Default setting Resettable using [Camera Settings
MENU item
value Reset]

Slide Show (Interval) 3 Sec

Image Index 9 Images

Display as Group On

Display Rotation Auto

Focus Frame Display Off

Aspect Marker Disp. ( Aspect Marker

On
Disp.)

Aspect Marker Disp. (Aspect Marker Level) 12

Disp Specified Time Img. —

Select Image Jump Dial Dial

Image Jump Method One by one

TP1001271254

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

549
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

List of default setting values (Network)

The default setting values at the time of purchase are shown in the following table.

To reset settings to the default values

Select MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] →
[Enter].
Initialize: All the settings of the camera will be reset to the default values.
Camera Settings Reset: Items that can be reset are limited. See the following table.

(Network) tab

Resettable using [Camera

MENU item Default setting value
Settings Reset]

Smartphone Connection —

Remote Shoot Function (Remote Shooting) Off

Remote Shoot Function (Pairing) ―

Remote Shoot Function (Wi-Fi Direct Info.) ―

Select on Cam & Send ( Send) ―

Select on Cam & Send (Size of Sending

2M
Image)

Select on Cam & Send (RAW+J/H Send

JPEG & HEIF
Target)

Select on Cam & Send ( Sending

Proxy Only
Target)

Select on Cam & Send (Movie with Shot

Cut to 15 seconds
Mark)

Reset Transfer Status —

Cnct. while Power OFF Off

Remote Shoot Setting (Still Img. Save Dest.) Dest.+Camera

Remote Shoot Setting (Save Image Size) 2M

Remote Shoot Setting (RAW+J Save Image) JPEG Only

Remote Shoot Setting (RAW+H Save Image) HEIF Only

Network Streaming (Streaming) Off

Network Streaming (Stream Connect

―
Error Display)

550
 Resettable using [Camera
MENU item Default setting value
Settings Reset]

Network Streaming (Output Img. Quality Standard / HD (1080p) /

Set) 60p/50p / ―

Network Streaming (Output Information

―
Display)

Network Streaming (Movie Rec During

Disable
Streaming)

Network Streaming (Emphasized Output

On
Display)

Network Streaming (Root Certificate

Does Not Connect
Error)

USB Streaming (Output Res/Frame

HD(1080p) 30p
Rate)

USB Streaming (Movie Rec During

Disable
Streaming)

Cloud Connection * Off

Cloud Information * ―

Wi-Fi Connect Off

WPS Push ―

Access Point Set. ―

Wi-Fi Frequency Band 2.4GHz

Display Wi-Fi Info. ―

SSID/PW Reset ―

Bluetooth Function Off

Pairing ―

Manage Paired Device ―

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl Off

Disp Device Address ―

IP Address Setting Auto

Display Wired LAN Info. ―

USB-LAN Connection ―

USB-LAN Disconnection ―

Tethering Connection ―

Tethering Disconnection ―

Airplane Mode Off

551
 Resettable using [Camera
MENU item Default setting value
Settings Reset]

Edit Device Name ―

Import Root Certificate ―

Access Authen. Settings (Access Authen.) On

Access Authen. Settings (User) ―

Access Authen. Settings (Password) ―

Access Authen. Settings (Generate

―
Password)

Access Authen. Info ―

Wi-Fi Direct Settings Type1 (Standard)

Reset Network Set. ―

* Only available in certain countries and regions

TP1001271222

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

552
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

List of default setting values (Setup)

The default setting values at the time of purchase are shown in the following table.

To reset settings to the default values

Select MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] →
[Enter].
Initialize: All the settings of the camera will be reset to the default values.
Camera Settings Reset: Items that can be reset are limited. See the following table.

(Setup) tab

Resettable using [Camera Settings

MENU item Default setting value
Reset]

Language ―

Area/Date/Time Setting (Area Setting) ―

Area/Date/Time Setting (Daylight Savings) Off

Area/Date/Time Setting (Date/Time) ―

Area/Date/Time Setting (Date Format) Y-M-D

NTSC/PAL Selector ―

Setting Reset ―

Save/Load Settings ―

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Control Dial) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Control Wheel) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 1) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 2) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Center Button) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Left Button) Drive Mode

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Right Button) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Down Button) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (MOVIE Button) Movie Shooting

Custom Key/Dial Set. ( Button) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Focus Hold Button) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Control Dial) Av/Tv (Av in M mode)

553
 Resettable using [Camera Settings
MENU item Default setting value
Reset]

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Control Wheel) Av/Tv (Tv in M mode)

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 1) Background Defocus

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 2) Step Zoom

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Center Button) Focus Standard

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Left Button) Self-timer

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Right Button) ISO

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Down Button) Exposure Comp.

Custom Key/Dial Set. (MOVIE Button) Movie Shooting

Custom Key/Dial Set. ( Button) Product Showcase Set

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Focus Hold Button) Focus Hold

Follow Custom ( /
Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 1)
)

Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 2) Magnification

Follow Custom ( /
Custom Key Setting (MOVIE Button)
)

Custom Key Setting (Fn/ Button) Send

Fn Menu Settings ―

Different Set for Still/Mv ―

DISP (Screen Disp) Set ―

REC w/ Shutter Off

with Shutter Button Do not add

Zoom Ring Rotate Left(W)/Right(T)

Custom Key/Dial Set. ―

Custom Key/Dial Set. ―

My Dial Settings ―

Av/Tv Rotate Normal

Function Ring(Lens) Power Focus

Dial / Wheel Lock Off

Touch Operation On

Shooting Screen (Shooting Screen) On

Shooting Screen (Footer Icon Touch) On

Shooting Screen (Swipe Right) Icon Display: L&R

554
 Resettable using [Camera Settings
MENU item Default setting value
Reset]

Shooting Screen (Swipe Left) Icon Display: L&R

Shooting Screen (Swipe Up) Open the Fn Menu

Shooting Screen (Touch Func. in Shooting) Touch Tracking

Shooting Screen (Icon When Monitor Flipped) Flip

Playback Screen On

Menu Screen On

Screen Reader (Screen Reader) Off

Screen Reader (Speed) Standard

Screen Reader (Volume) 7

Monitor Brightness Manual

Display Quality Standard

Monitor Flip Direction Auto

Vertical Display On

TC/UB Disp. Setting Counter

Gamma Display Assist Off

Gamma Disp. Assist Typ. Auto

Display LUT On

Auto Review Off

Shoot Mode Sel. Screen Display

Auto Monitor OFF Does not turn OFF

Power Save Start Time 1 Min

Power Save by Monitor Both Linked

Auto Power OFF Temp. Standard

Volume Settings 7

4ch Audio Monitoring CH1/CH2

Audio signals On:all

USB Connection Mode Sel. When Connect

USB LUN Setting Multi

USB Power Supply On

HDMI Resolution Auto

555
 Resettable using [Camera Settings
MENU item Default setting value
Reset]

HDMI Output Settings (Rec. Media dur HDMI

On
Output)

HDMI Output Settings (Output Resolution) Auto

HDMI Output Settings (4K Output Set.(HDMI

60p 10bit
Only))

HDMI Output Settings (Time Code Output) Off

HDMI Output Settings (REC Control) Off

HDMI Output Settings (4ch Audio Output) CH1/CH2

HDMI Info. Display On

CTRL FOR HDMI On

Video Light Mode Power Link

REC Lamp On

Sensor Cleaning ―

Pixel Mapping ―

Version ―

Display Serial Number ―

Privacy Notice ―

Certification Logo ―

TP1001271267

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

556
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

List of default setting values (My Menu)

The default setting values at the time of purchase are shown in the following table.

To reset settings to the default values

Select MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] →
[Enter].
Initialize: All the settings of the camera will be reset to the default values.
Camera Settings Reset: Items that can be reset are limited. See the following table.

(My Menu) tab

MENU item Default setting value Resettable using [Camera Settings Reset]

Add Item ―

Sort Item ―

Delete Item ―

Delete Page ―

Delete All ―

Display From My Menu Off

TP1001271221

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

557
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Specifications

System

Camera Type
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
Lens
Sony E-mount lens

Image sensor

Image format
35 mm full frame (35.6 mm × 23.8 mm), CMOS image sensor
Effective pixel number of camera
Approx. 12 100 000 pixels
Total pixel number of camera
Approx. 12 900 000 pixels

SteadyShot

System
In-camera sensor shift image stabilization system

Anti-Dust

System
Charge protection coating on optical filter and image sensor shift mechanism

Auto focus system

Detection system
Phase-detection system/Contrast detection system
Sensitivity Range
–6 EV to +20 EV (at ISO 100 equivalent, F2.0)

Monitor

LCD monitor
7.5 cm (3.0 type) TFT drive, touch panel
Total number of dots
1 036 800 dots

Exposure control

Metering method

558
1 200-zone evaluative metering
Metering Range
–3 EV to +20 EV (at ISO 100 equivalent with F2.0 lens)
ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images: ISO 80 to ISO 102 400 (Extended ISO: Minimum ISO 40, maximum ISO 409 600), [ISO AUTO] (ISO 80 to
ISO 12 800, Maximum/Minimum can be set.)
Movies: ISO 80 to ISO 102 400 equivalent (Extended ISO: Maximum equivalent to ISO 409 600), [ISO AUTO] (ISO 80 to
ISO 12 800 equivalent, Maximum/Minimum can be set.)
Exposure compensation
±5.0 EV (switchable between 1/3 EV and 1/2 EV steps)

Shutter

Type
Electronic shutter
Speed range
Still images: 1/8000 second to 30 seconds
Movies: 1/8000 second to 1 second (1/3 EV step)
60p-compatible devices: up to 1/60 second in AUTO mode (up to 1/30 second in Auto slow shutter mode)
50p-compatible devices: up to 1/50 second in AUTO mode (up to 1/25 second in Auto slow shutter mode)

Flash sync speed (when using a flash manufactured by Sony)

1/30 second (Full-frame)
1/60 second (APS-C size)

Continuous shooting

Continuous shooting speed

(Continuous Shooting: Hi+) : Maximum of approx. 10 images per second/ (Continuous Shooting: Hi):
Maximum of approx. 8 images per second/ (Continuous Shooting: Mid): Maximum of approx. 6 images per second/
(Continuous Shooting: Lo): Maximum of approx. 3 images per second
Based on our measurement conditions. The speed of continuous shooting can be slower, depending on the shooting
conditions.

Recording format

File format
JPEG (compliant with DCF Ver. 2.0, Exif Ver. 2.32, and MPF Baseline), HEIF (MPEG-A MIAF compliant), RAW (Sony
ARW 5.0 format compliant)
Movie (XAVC HS format)
XAVC Ver2.1: MP4 format compliant
Video: MPEG-H HEVC/H.265
Audio: LPCM 2ch (48 kHz 16 bit), LPCM 4ch (48 kHz 24 bit)*1, LPCM 2ch (48 kHz 24 bit)*1, MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch*2
Movie (XAVC S format)
XAVC Ver2.1: MP4 format compliant
Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio: LPCM 2ch (48 kHz 16 bit), LPCM 4ch (48 kHz 24 bit)*1, LPCM 2ch (48 kHz 24 bit)*1, MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch*2
*1 When using accessories that can support 4ch output and 24 bits with the multi-interface shoe
*2 Proxy movies

Recording media

SD cards (UHS-I and UHS-II compatible)

559
 Input/output terminals

USB Type-C terminal

SuperSpeed USB 5Gbps (USB 3.2)
Compatible with USB Power Delivery
HDMI
HDMI type D micro jack
(Microphone) terminal
Ø 3.5 mm Stereo mini jack
(Headphones) terminal
Ø 3.5 mm Stereo mini jack

Power, general

Rated input
7.2 V
Power consumption
Using an FE 28-60 mm F4-5.6
Approx. 3.5 W (while shooting still images)/approx. 7.0 W (while shooting movies)
Operating temperature
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Storage temperature
–20 °C to 55 °C (–4 °F to 131 °F)
Dimensions (W/H/D) (Approx.)
121.0 × 71.9 × 54.3 mm
4 7/8 × 2 7/8 × 2 1/4 in.
Mass (Approx.)
483 g (1 lb 1.1 oz) (including battery pack, SD card)
Microphone
Stereo
Speaker
Monaural
Exif Print
Compatible
PRINT Image Matching III
Compatible

Eco and energy saving

Power consumption (Off mode)

Not available
Power consumption (Standby mode/Low power mode)
0.5 W
Power consumption (Networked standby mode)
2.0 W (Bluetooth) / 2.0 W (all terminals and networks connected)
Low power mode activated
Within 20 minutes (default)
Networked standby mode activated
Within 20 minutes (default)

560
 Wireless LAN

WW694956 (see name plate on the bottom of camera)

Supported format
IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac
Frequency band
2.4 GHz / 5 GHz
Security
WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK/WPA3-SAE
Connection method
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)/Manual
Access method
Infrastructure mode

WW942672 (see name plate on the bottom of camera)

Supported format
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Frequency band
2.4 GHz
Security
WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK/WPA3-SAE
Connection method
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)/Manual
Access method
Infrastructure mode

Bluetooth communications

Bluetooth standard Ver. 4.2

Frequency band
2.4 GHz

Rechargeable battery pack NP-FZ100

Rated voltage
7.2 V

Recommended USB-PD-compatible AC adaptor

Input
100 – 240 V , 50/60 Hz
Output
9V / 2 A or more

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

TP1001271166

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

561
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Trademarks

XAVC S and are trademarks of Sony Group Corporation.

XAVC HS and are trademarks of Sony Group Corporation.
Mac is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
USB Type-C® and USB-C® are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum.
The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi logo and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered trademarks or trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by Sony Group Corporation and its subsidiaries is under license.
QR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc.
In addition, system and product names used in this manual are, in general, trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective developers or manufacturers. However, the ™ or ® marks may not be used in all cases in this
manual.

TP1001248376

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

562
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

License

Notes on the License

This product comes with software that are used based on licensing agreements with the owners of that software. Based
on requests by the owners of copyright of these software applications, we have an obligation to inform you of the
following. Licenses (in English) are recorded in the internal memory of your product. Establish a Mass Storage
connection between the product and a computer to read licenses in the “PMHOME” - “LICENSE” folder.

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE OF A
CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR
WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE https://www.via-la.com/

Covered by one or more claims of the HEVC patents listed at patentlist.accessadvance.com.

On GNU GPL/LGPL applied software

The software included in this product contains copyrighted software that is licensed under the GPLv2 and other licenses
which may require access to source code. You may find a copy of the relevant source code as required under the GPLv2
(and other licenses) at https://www.sony.net/Products/Linux/.

You may obtain the source code as required by the GPLv2 on a physical medium from us for a period of three years after
our last shipment of this product by applying through the form at https://www.sony.net/Products/Linux/.
This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information.

TP1001224983

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

563
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Troubleshooting

If you experience trouble with the product, try the following solutions.

1 Remove the battery pack, wait for about one minute, re-insert the battery pack, then turn on the power.

2 Initialize the settings.

3 Consult your dealer or local authorized service facility. Additional information on this product and answers
to frequently asked questions can be found at our Customer Support Website.
https://www.sony.net/

Related Topic
Setting Reset

TP1001224985

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

564
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ZV-E1

Warning messages

Set Area/Date/Time.

Set the area, date and time. If you have not used the product for a long time, charge the internal rechargeable backup
battery.

Power insufficient.

The image sensor cleaning function will not operate because the remaining battery level is low. Recharge the battery
pack.

Unable to use memory card. Format?

The memory card was formatted on a computer and the file format was modified. Select [Enter] and then format the
memory card. You can use the memory card again, however, all previous data in the memory card is erased. It may
take some time to complete the format. If the message still appears, change the memory card.

Memory Card Error

An incompatible memory card is inserted.

Formatting has failed. Format the memory card again.

Unable to read memory card. Reinsert memory card.

An incompatible memory card is inserted.

The memory card is damaged.
The terminal section of the memory card is dirty.

Memory card locked.

You are using a memory card with a write-protect switch or a delete-protect switch with the switch set to the LOCK
position. Set the switch to the record position.

Cannot open the shutter since the memory card is not inserted.

No memory card has been inserted.

To release the shutter without inserting a memory card into the camera, set [Release w/o Card] to [Enable]. In this
case, images will not be saved.

This memory card may not be capable of recording and playing normally.

An incompatible memory card is inserted.

Unable to display.

Images recorded with other products or images modified with a computer may not be displayed.
Processing on the computer such as deletion of the image files may cause inconsistencies in the image database
files. Repair the image database files.

Check that a lens is mounted. For an unsupported lens, set "Release w/o Lens" in the menu to "Enable".

565
 The lens is not attached properly, or the lens is not attached. If the message appears when a lens is attached,
reattach the lens. If the message appears frequently, check whether the contacts of the lens and product are clean or
not.
When attaching the product to an astronomical telescope or similar instrument, or using an unsupported lens, set [
Release w/o Lens] to [Enable].
Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.

The product has become hot because you have been shooting continuously. Turn the power off and cool the product
and wait until the product is ready to shoot again.

(Overheating warning)

You have been recording images for a long time, the product temperature has risen.

(Database file error)

The number of images exceeds that for which date management in a database file by the product is possible.

(Database file error)

Unable to register to the database file. Import all the images to a computer and recover the memory card.

Image DataBase File error

There is something wrong in the Image Database File. Select MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [
Recover Image DB].

System Error
Camera Error. Turn power off then on.

Remove the battery pack, and then re-insert it. If the message appears frequently, consult local authorized Sony
service facility.

Unable to magnify.
Unable to rotate image.

Images recorded with other products may not be enlarged or rotated.

Cannot create more folders.

A folder in the memory card has the first three digits “999.” You cannot create any more folders on this camera.

Related Topic
Notes on memory card
Area/Date/Time Setting
Format
Release w/o Card
Release w/o Lens (still image/movie)
Recover Image DB (still image/movie)

TP1001225036

5-048-827-15(1) Copyright 2023 Sony Corporation

566